CA2302438A1 - Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders - Google Patents
Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2302438A1 CA2302438A1 CA002302438A CA2302438A CA2302438A1 CA 2302438 A1 CA2302438 A1 CA 2302438A1 CA 002302438 A CA002302438 A CA 002302438A CA 2302438 A CA2302438 A CA 2302438A CA 2302438 A1 CA2302438 A1 CA 2302438A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- cancer
- compound
- group
- cells
- salt
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 102000004022 Protein-Tyrosine Kinases Human genes 0.000 title claims abstract description 16
- 108090000412 Protein-Tyrosine Kinases Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 16
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 title claims description 192
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 217
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 166
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 154
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 133
- DLGOEMSEDOSKAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carmustine Chemical compound ClCCNC(=O)N(N=O)CCCl DLGOEMSEDOSKAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims abstract description 114
- 108091008794 FGF receptors Proteins 0.000 claims abstract description 111
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 75
- VHOGYURTWQBHIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N leflunomide Chemical compound O1N=CC(C(=O)NC=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(F)(F)F)=C1C VHOGYURTWQBHIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims abstract description 46
- 208000005017 glioblastoma Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 24
- 206010003571 Astrocytoma Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 13
- OSTGTTZJOCZWJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrosourea Chemical compound NC(=O)N=NO OSTGTTZJOCZWJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims abstract description 10
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 302
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 claims description 118
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 98
- -1 heteroalicyclic Chemical group 0.000 claims description 57
- 108091008606 PDGF receptors Proteins 0.000 claims description 52
- 102000011653 Platelet-Derived Growth Factor Receptors Human genes 0.000 claims description 46
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 claims description 41
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 claims description 39
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 39
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 38
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 38
- 241000282414 Homo sapiens Species 0.000 claims description 36
- 102000027426 receptor tyrosine kinases Human genes 0.000 claims description 36
- 108091008598 receptor tyrosine kinases Proteins 0.000 claims description 36
- 206010027476 Metastases Diseases 0.000 claims description 34
- 208000003174 Brain Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 32
- 230000009401 metastasis Effects 0.000 claims description 30
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 29
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 claims description 29
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 28
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 26
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical group 0.000 claims description 26
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 23
- 230000002062 proliferating effect Effects 0.000 claims description 22
- 239000008196 pharmacological composition Substances 0.000 claims description 20
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 125000005152 trihalomethanesulfonyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 18
- 208000026310 Breast neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 17
- 206010006187 Breast cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 16
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 15
- 210000004204 blood vessel Anatomy 0.000 claims description 14
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000003176 fibrotic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 125000000472 sulfonyl group Chemical group *S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 claims description 14
- 206010061535 Ovarian neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 13
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 13
- 230000000973 chemotherapeutic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 13
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 claims description 13
- 206010018338 Glioma Diseases 0.000 claims description 12
- 208000000236 Prostatic Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 12
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 12
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 12
- 208000029742 colonic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 12
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 claims description 12
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 12
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 claims description 12
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 12
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 claims description 12
- 206010033128 Ovarian cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 11
- 206010061902 Pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 11
- 206010060862 Prostate cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 11
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 11
- 208000008443 pancreatic carcinoma Diseases 0.000 claims description 11
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 10
- 208000007766 Kaposi sarcoma Diseases 0.000 claims description 10
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 claims description 10
- 208000020816 lung neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 10
- 206010005003 Bladder cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 9
- 208000007097 Urinary Bladder Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 9
- 208000019425 cirrhosis of liver Diseases 0.000 claims description 9
- 210000003734 kidney Anatomy 0.000 claims description 9
- 208000015486 malignant pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 claims description 9
- 201000002528 pancreatic cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 9
- 206010009944 Colon cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000005553 heteroaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 201000001441 melanoma Diseases 0.000 claims description 8
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000001181 organosilyl group Chemical group [SiH3]* 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000005190 thiohydroxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000005423 trihalomethanesulfonamido group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 206010058467 Lung neoplasm malignant Diseases 0.000 claims description 7
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 claims description 7
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 7
- 201000005202 lung cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000005499 phosphonyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- 201000005112 urinary bladder cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 claims description 6
- 201000001320 Atherosclerosis Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 208000008839 Kidney Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000000475 sulfinyl group Chemical group [*:2]S([*:1])=O 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000004953 trihalomethyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 4
- 208000003445 Mouth Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 4
- 206010038389 Renal cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000005631 S-sulfonamido group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 201000010982 kidney cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000037390 scarring Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000000381 tumorigenic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 208000004337 Salivary Gland Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 claims description 3
- 206010061934 Salivary gland cancer Diseases 0.000 claims description 3
- 208000034189 Sclerosis Diseases 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 claims description 3
- 208000012987 lip and oral cavity carcinoma Diseases 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004385 trihaloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 3
- 206010051113 Arterial restenosis Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 208000029523 Interstitial Lung disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 206010039710 Scleroderma Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000000000 cycloalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000002795 guanidino group Chemical group C(N)(=N)N* 0.000 claims description 2
- 201000006334 interstitial nephritis Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 102000044168 Fibroblast Growth Factor Receptor Human genes 0.000 claims 4
- 125000001475 halogen functional group Chemical group 0.000 claims 2
- 206010004446 Benign prostatic hyperplasia Diseases 0.000 claims 1
- 208000004403 Prostatic Hyperplasia Diseases 0.000 claims 1
- 102000052178 fibroblast growth factor receptor activity proteins Human genes 0.000 abstract description 106
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 15
- 229960005243 carmustine Drugs 0.000 abstract description 2
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 77
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 70
- 101000878540 Homo sapiens Protein-tyrosine kinase 2-beta Proteins 0.000 description 67
- 102100037787 Protein-tyrosine kinase 2-beta Human genes 0.000 description 67
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 66
- 239000002953 phosphate buffered saline Substances 0.000 description 66
- 239000006144 Dulbecco’s modified Eagle's medium Substances 0.000 description 61
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 59
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 59
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 48
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 46
- 238000002965 ELISA Methods 0.000 description 44
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 43
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 39
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 39
- 101800003838 Epidermal growth factor Proteins 0.000 description 38
- 102400001368 Epidermal growth factor Human genes 0.000 description 38
- 102000010780 Platelet-Derived Growth Factor Human genes 0.000 description 38
- 108010038512 Platelet-Derived Growth Factor Proteins 0.000 description 38
- 229940116977 epidermal growth factor Drugs 0.000 description 38
- VBEQCZHXXJYVRD-GACYYNSASA-N uroanthelone Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(O)=O)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CNC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H]1N(CCC1)C(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H]1N(CCC1)C(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(N)=O)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)CC)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 VBEQCZHXXJYVRD-GACYYNSASA-N 0.000 description 38
- 101150021185 FGF gene Proteins 0.000 description 36
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 36
- CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoxazole Chemical compound C=1C=NOC=1 CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 35
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 33
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 33
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 33
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 31
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 31
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 30
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 28
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 28
- 230000004614 tumor growth Effects 0.000 description 28
- WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazole Chemical compound C=1C=NNC=1 WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 26
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N Uridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N 0.000 description 26
- 239000006180 TBST buffer Substances 0.000 description 25
- 239000012091 fetal bovine serum Substances 0.000 description 25
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 25
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 25
- 230000004663 cell proliferation Effects 0.000 description 24
- 238000010790 dilution Methods 0.000 description 24
- 239000012895 dilution Substances 0.000 description 24
- 230000006820 DNA synthesis Effects 0.000 description 23
- OHDRQQURAXLVGJ-HLVWOLMTSA-N azane;(2e)-3-ethyl-2-[(e)-(3-ethyl-6-sulfo-1,3-benzothiazol-2-ylidene)hydrazinylidene]-1,3-benzothiazole-6-sulfonic acid Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].S/1C2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C2N(CC)C\1=N/N=C1/SC2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C2N1CC OHDRQQURAXLVGJ-HLVWOLMTSA-N 0.000 description 23
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 23
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 22
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 21
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 21
- ODGIMMLDVSWADK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-trifluoromethylaniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 ODGIMMLDVSWADK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-RRKCRQDMSA-N 5-bromodeoxyuridine Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C(Br)=C1 WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 20
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 20
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 20
- WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N BROMODEOXYURIDINE Natural products C1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C(Br)=C1 WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N L-glutamine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 19
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 19
- 229950004398 broxuridine Drugs 0.000 description 19
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N glutamine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 238000002513 implantation Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 19
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 18
- 230000035755 proliferation Effects 0.000 description 18
- 238000010079 rubber tapping Methods 0.000 description 18
- 239000002246 antineoplastic agent Substances 0.000 description 17
- 230000003197 catalytic effect Effects 0.000 description 17
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N citric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 229940127089 cytotoxic agent Drugs 0.000 description 17
- 235000013336 milk Nutrition 0.000 description 17
- 239000008267 milk Substances 0.000 description 17
- 210000004080 milk Anatomy 0.000 description 17
- 108010053099 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor Receptor-2 Proteins 0.000 description 16
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 16
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 16
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 16
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000006366 phosphorylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 15
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 15
- 210000004881 tumor cell Anatomy 0.000 description 15
- HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Aminoethan-1-ol Chemical compound NCCO HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N beta-L-uridine Natural products O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 230000010261 cell growth Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 14
- 239000000546 pharmaceutical excipient Substances 0.000 description 14
- 230000026731 phosphorylation Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 14
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N uracil arabinoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 229940045145 uridine Drugs 0.000 description 14
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 13
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 13
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 13
- 238000005755 formation reaction Methods 0.000 description 13
- UAIUNKRWKOVEES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine Chemical compound CC1=C(N)C(C)=CC(C=2C=C(C)C(N)=C(C)C=2)=C1 UAIUNKRWKOVEES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 102000038455 IGF Type 1 Receptor Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 108010031794 IGF Type 1 Receptor Proteins 0.000 description 12
- HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+] HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 12
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 12
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 12
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 12
- 229960004756 ethanol Drugs 0.000 description 12
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000004083 survival effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 102000005789 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factors Human genes 0.000 description 11
- 108010019530 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factors Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 11
- 239000013642 negative control Substances 0.000 description 11
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 11
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 11
- 239000013504 Triton X-100 Substances 0.000 description 10
- 229920004890 Triton X-100 Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 102100033177 Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 Human genes 0.000 description 10
- 230000033115 angiogenesis Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000006166 lysate Substances 0.000 description 10
- UTNUDOFZCWSZMS-YFHOEESVSA-N teriflunomide Chemical compound C\C(O)=C(/C#N)C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 UTNUDOFZCWSZMS-YFHOEESVSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 10
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 9
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 210000000056 organ Anatomy 0.000 description 9
- 230000036470 plasma concentration Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000007920 subcutaneous administration Methods 0.000 description 9
- ICSNLGPSRYBMBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminopyridine Chemical group NC1=CC=CC=N1 ICSNLGPSRYBMBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229940100198 alkylating agent Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 239000002168 alkylating agent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229940045719 antineoplastic alkylating agent nitrosoureas Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 239000012911 assay medium Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 210000004185 liver Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000002244 precipitate Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000012679 serum free medium Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000019491 signal transduction Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 8
- 235000002374 tyrosine Nutrition 0.000 description 8
- 241000283707 Capra Species 0.000 description 7
- 102000001301 EGF receptor Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108090000386 Fibroblast Growth Factor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000008512 biological response Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000024245 cell differentiation Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 210000002889 endothelial cell Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000009545 invasion Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000002207 metabolite Substances 0.000 description 7
- 206010061289 metastatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 7
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 238000003828 vacuum filtration Methods 0.000 description 7
- PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Aniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=CC=C1 PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L Calcium carbonate Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-]C([O-])=O VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 6
- 108091007045 Cullin Ring E3 Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 102000036364 Cullin Ring E3 Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 6
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-tyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108700020796 Oncogene Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 108091000080 Phosphotransferase Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 6
- 210000000481 breast Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 208000035269 cancer or benign tumor Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000004113 cell culture Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 210000001072 colon Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 231100000433 cytotoxic Toxicity 0.000 description 6
- 230000001472 cytotoxic effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 210000002744 extracellular matrix Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 235000003642 hunger Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 229940127121 immunoconjugate Drugs 0.000 description 6
- 229940126619 mouse monoclonal antibody Drugs 0.000 description 6
- MCSAJNNLRCFZED-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitroethane Chemical compound CC[N+]([O-])=O MCSAJNNLRCFZED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000002018 overexpression Effects 0.000 description 6
- 102000013415 peroxidase activity proteins Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108040007629 peroxidase activity proteins Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 6
- 102000020233 phosphotransferase Human genes 0.000 description 6
- DCWXELXMIBXGTH-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphotyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(OP(O)(O)=O)C=C1 DCWXELXMIBXGTH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000037351 starvation Effects 0.000 description 6
- 125000005309 thioalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 125000005296 thioaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 125000002813 thiocarbonyl group Chemical group *C(*)=S 0.000 description 6
- 125000005404 thioheteroaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- GKASDNZWUGIAMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N triethyl orthoformate Chemical compound CCOC(OCC)OCC GKASDNZWUGIAMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 5
- GTSMPCBIUVYFCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(ethoxymethylidene)-3-oxo-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]butanamide Chemical compound CCOC=C(C(C)=O)C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 GTSMPCBIUVYFCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OCC[NH+]1CCN(CCS([O-])(=O)=O)CC1 JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- SNUBGILHVSSQAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 SNUBGILHVSSQAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- YRNWIFYIFSBPAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]-n,n-dimethylaniline Chemical compound C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C1C1=CC=C(N(C)C)C=C1 YRNWIFYIFSBPAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- CMSMOCZEIVJLDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclophosphamide Chemical compound ClCCN(CCCl)P1(=O)NCCCO1 CMSMOCZEIVJLDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 108010052167 Dihydroorotate Dehydrogenase Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102100032823 Dihydroorotate dehydrogenase (quinone), mitochondrial Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108060006698 EGF receptor Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 101150029707 ERBB2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000010834 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108010037362 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102100031706 Fibroblast growth factor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 101000599951 Homo sapiens Insulin-like growth factor I Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 101001012157 Homo sapiens Receptor tyrosine-protein kinase erbB-2 Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 108090000723 Insulin-Like Growth Factor I Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000004218 Insulin-Like Growth Factor I Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 102000001253 Protein Kinase Human genes 0.000 description 5
- CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrimidine Chemical compound C1=CN=CN=C1 CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 102100030086 Receptor tyrosine-protein kinase erbB-2 Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 206010039491 Sarcoma Diseases 0.000 description 5
- 238000000692 Student's t-test Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000002491 angiogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003305 autocrine Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000004071 biological effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000002512 chemotherapy Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229960004397 cyclophosphamide Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 239000000824 cytostatic agent Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 230000001085 cytostatic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 5
- FMVJYQGSRWVMQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl propiolate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C#C FMVJYQGSRWVMQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 210000003584 mesangial cell Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 230000001394 metastastic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009826 neoplastic cell growth Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010899 nucleation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 108060006633 protein kinase Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 210000003491 skin Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 231100001274 therapeutic index Toxicity 0.000 description 5
- 230000029663 wound healing Effects 0.000 description 5
- 201000009030 Carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 4
- AOJJSUZBOXZQNB-TZSSRYMLSA-N Doxorubicin Chemical compound O([C@H]1C[C@@](O)(CC=2C(O)=C3C(=O)C=4C=CC=C(C=4C(=O)C3=C(O)C=21)OC)C(=O)CO)[C@H]1C[C@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 AOJJSUZBOXZQNB-TZSSRYMLSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 201000010915 Glioblastoma multiforme Diseases 0.000 description 4
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Guanidine Chemical compound NC(N)=N ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000007995 HEPES buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 102000003746 Insulin Receptor Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 108010001127 Insulin Receptor Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102100037852 Insulin-like growth factor I Human genes 0.000 description 4
- YQEZLKZALYSWHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ketamine Chemical compound C=1C=CC=C(Cl)C=1C1(NC)CCCCC1=O YQEZLKZALYSWHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229930182816 L-glutamine Natural products 0.000 description 4
- 101000851196 Mus musculus Pro-epidermal growth factor Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 241000204031 Mycoplasma Species 0.000 description 4
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiazole Chemical compound C1=CSC=N1 FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- GLNADSQYFUSGOU-GPTZEZBUSA-J Trypan blue Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].C1=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2C=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C(/N=N/C3=CC=C(C=C3C)C=3C=C(C(=CC=3)\N=N\C=3C(=CC4=CC(=CC(N)=C4C=3O)S([O-])(=O)=O)S([O-])(=O)=O)C)=C(O)C2=C1N GLNADSQYFUSGOU-GPTZEZBUSA-J 0.000 description 4
- 206010052428 Wound Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 208000027418 Wounds and injury Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 230000003187 abdominal effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000012888 bovine serum Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000006143 cell culture medium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000013592 cell lysate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000033077 cellular process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 235000010980 cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- DQLATGHUWYMOKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L cisplatin Chemical compound N[Pt](N)(Cl)Cl DQLATGHUWYMOKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 229960004316 cisplatin Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001086 cytosolic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 4
- LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I dipotassium trisodium dihydrogen phosphate hydrogen phosphate dichloride Chemical compound P(=O)(O)(O)[O-].[K+].P(=O)(O)([O-])[O-].[Na+].[Na+].[Cl-].[K+].[Cl-].[Na+] LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I 0.000 description 4
- 235000021186 dishes Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- VJJPUSNTGOMMGY-MRVIYFEKSA-N etoposide Chemical compound COC1=C(O)C(OC)=CC([C@@H]2C3=CC=4OCOC=4C=C3[C@@H](O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H]4O[C@H](C)OC[C@H]4O3)O)[C@@H]3[C@@H]2C(OC3)=O)=C1 VJJPUSNTGOMMGY-MRVIYFEKSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229960005420 etoposide Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 230000002440 hepatic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 208000032839 leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003211 malignant effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002611 ovarian Effects 0.000 description 4
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 4
- 231100000241 scar Toxicity 0.000 description 4
- 210000000952 spleen Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000000638 stimulation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 210000002784 stomach Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000004448 titration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000002023 trifluoromethyl group Chemical group FC(F)(F)* 0.000 description 4
- IHIXIJGXTJIKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N trisodium vanadate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-][V]([O-])([O-])=O IHIXIJGXTJIKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NHBKXEKEPDILRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-bis(butanoylsulfanyl)propyl butanoate Chemical compound CCCC(=O)OCC(SC(=O)CCC)CSC(=O)CCC NHBKXEKEPDILRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WFDIJRYMOXRFFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic anhydride Chemical compound CC(=O)OC(C)=O WFDIJRYMOXRFFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 108010006654 Bleomycin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000010599 BrdU assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- RGSFGYAAUTVSQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclopentane Chemical compound C1CCCC1 RGSFGYAAUTVSQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 206010012689 Diabetic retinopathy Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 240000006497 Dianthus caryophyllus Species 0.000 description 3
- 235000009355 Dianthus caryophyllus Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 238000012286 ELISA Assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOC(C)=O XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102100027842 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 3 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 101710182396 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 3 Proteins 0.000 description 3
- GHASVSINZRGABV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorouracil Chemical compound FC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O GHASVSINZRGABV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Furan Chemical compound C=1C=COC=1 YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000032612 Glial tumor Diseases 0.000 description 3
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Natural products OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000017604 Hodgkin disease Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 208000010747 Hodgkins lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 108010001336 Horseradish Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CS(O)(=O)=O AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000009433 Moyamoya Disease Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 201000010133 Oligodendroglioma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- 102000052575 Proto-Oncogene Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108700020978 Proto-Oncogene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 201000004681 Psoriasis Diseases 0.000 description 3
- RWRDLPDLKQPQOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrrolidine Chemical compound C1CCNC1 RWRDLPDLKQPQOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000283984 Rodentia Species 0.000 description 3
- 208000000453 Skin Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 208000005718 Stomach Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 3
- FOCVUCIESVLUNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiotepa Chemical compound C1CN1P(N1CC1)(=S)N1CC1 FOCVUCIESVLUNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triethylamine Chemical compound CCN(CC)CC ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000004142 Trypsin Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000631 Trypsin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 210000001789 adipocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 206010002224 anaplastic astrocytoma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035578 autophosphorylation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229960001561 bleomycin Drugs 0.000 description 3
- OYVAGSVQBOHSSS-UAPAGMARSA-O bleomycin A2 Chemical compound N([C@H](C(=O)N[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@H](O)C)C(=O)NCCC=1SC=C(N=1)C=1SC=C(N=1)C(=O)NCCC[S+](C)C)[C@@H](O[C@H]1[C@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1)O[C@@H]1[C@H]([C@@H](OC(N)=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1)O)C=1N=CNC=1)C(=O)C1=NC([C@H](CC(N)=O)NC[C@H](N)C(N)=O)=NC(N)=C1C OYVAGSVQBOHSSS-UAPAGMARSA-O 0.000 description 3
- 230000008499 blood brain barrier function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000001218 blood-brain barrier Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 229910000019 calcium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000001506 calcium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910000389 calcium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 235000011010 calcium phosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000022131 cell cycle Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000003833 cell viability Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000036755 cellular response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 108700010039 chimeric receptor Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000002648 combination therapy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000007783 downstream signaling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000008298 dragée Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000013861 fat-free Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 229960002949 fluorouracil Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 206010017758 gastric cancer Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 210000002216 heart Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- DMEGYFMYUHOHGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N heptamethylene Natural products C1CCCCCC1 DMEGYFMYUHOHGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229960000681 leflunomide Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 208000002780 macular degeneration Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 230000036210 malignancy Effects 0.000 description 3
- 206010027191 meningioma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- GLVAUDGFNGKCSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercaptopurine Chemical compound S=C1NC=NC2=C1NC=N2 GLVAUDGFNGKCSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 208000002154 non-small cell lung carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 231100000590 oncogenic Toxicity 0.000 description 3
- 230000002246 oncogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229940045681 other alkylating agent in atc Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000144 pharmacologic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 3
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- CPTBDICYNRMXFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N procarbazine Chemical compound CNNCC1=CC=C(C(=O)NC(C)C)C=C1 CPTBDICYNRMXFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229960000624 procarbazine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 210000002307 prostate Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000000329 smooth muscle myocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 206010041823 squamous cell carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 125000005420 sulfonamido group Chemical group S(=O)(=O)(N*)* 0.000 description 3
- 238000012353 t test Methods 0.000 description 3
- JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N toluene-4-sulfonic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1 JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 3
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H tricalcium bis(phosphate) Chemical compound [Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 3
- 239000012588 trypsin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000001493 tyrosinyl group Chemical group [H]OC1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])C([H])(N([H])[H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 3
- 230000004862 vasculogenesis Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229960004528 vincristine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-XQKSVPLYSA-N vincristine Chemical compound C([N@]1C[C@@H](C[C@]2(C(=O)OC)C=3C(=CC4=C([C@]56[C@H]([C@@]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@]7(CC)C=CCN([C@H]67)CC5)(O)C(=O)OC)N4C=O)C=3)OC)C[C@@](C1)(O)CC)CC1=C2NC2=CC=CC=C12 OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-XQKSVPLYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N vincristine Natural products C1C(CC)(O)CC(CC2(C(=O)OC)C=3C(=CC4=C(C56C(C(C(OC(C)=O)C7(CC)C=CCN(C67)CC5)(O)C(=O)OC)N4C=O)C=3)OC)CN1CCC1=C2NC2=CC=CC=C12 OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NDQXKKFRNOPRDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,1,1-triethoxyethane Chemical group CCOC(C)(OCC)OCC NDQXKKFRNOPRDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HLEQYKBKNSCMBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(ethoxymethylidene)-3-oxo-n-pyridin-2-ylbutanamide Chemical compound CCOC=C(C(C)=O)C(=O)NC1=CC=CC=N1 HLEQYKBKNSCMBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KVUYXCNMWQYFQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(ethoxymethylidene)-3-oxobutanamide Chemical class CCOC=C(C(C)=O)C(N)=O KVUYXCNMWQYFQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MDYVPTFAVLGYKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=C1 MDYVPTFAVLGYKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UVAATUSSWANHEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 UVAATUSSWANHEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LUDAOCYKWHUGMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 LUDAOCYKWHUGMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SZMOPOSBYUHMKU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-cyclopropyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=CC(NC(=O)C2=C(NN=C2C2CC2)C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1 SZMOPOSBYUHMKU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JAICZHZPEAVVJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 JAICZHZPEAVVJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BAUNPFCCLLCVPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1,2-oxazol-3-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound C1=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=CC(NC(=O)C=2C(=NOC=2)CCC(O)=O)=C1 BAUNPFCCLLCVPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WNATUMUOBADEAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1h-pyrazol-5-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound C1=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=CC(NC(=O)C=2C(=NNC=2)CCC(O)=O)=C1 WNATUMUOBADEAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDLIYDFUZAMICZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1,2-oxazol-3-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC1=NOC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 KDLIYDFUZAMICZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LAYKVEGEKKAIMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1h-pyrazol-5-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC1=NNC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 LAYKVEGEKKAIMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PCDWFBFHIIKIPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-ethyl-2h-1,3-benzothiazole-2-sulfonic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(CC)C(S(O)(=O)=O)SC2=C1 PCDWFBFHIIKIPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YBLSBWHFPXDRHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxylic acid Chemical compound CC1=NOC=C1C(O)=O YBLSBWHFPXDRHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MUSIFRYVOVSNMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4h-1,3-benzodioxin-6-amine Chemical group O1COCC2=CC(N)=CC=C21 MUSIFRYVOVSNMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GETUHHNATFDEKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=C1 GETUHHNATFDEKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FQQQWOMGEVCFJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 FQQQWOMGEVCFJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JOQWAJNWDBTRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 JOQWAJNWDBTRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WYWHKKSPHMUBEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-Mercaptoguanine Natural products N1C(N)=NC(=S)C2=C1N=CN2 WYWHKKSPHMUBEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- STQGQHZAVUOBTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-Cyan-hept-2t-en-4,6-diinsaeure Natural products C1=2C(O)=C3C(=O)C=4C(OC)=CC=CC=4C(=O)C3=C(O)C=2CC(O)(C(C)=O)CC1OC1CC(N)C(O)C(C)O1 STQGQHZAVUOBTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7H-purine Chemical compound N1=CNC2=NC=NC2=C1 KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000024893 Acute lymphoblastic leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000006332 Choriocarcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229920000858 Cyclodextrin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-CCXZUQQUSA-N Cytarabine Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-CCXZUQQUSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N D-glucitol Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N Dextrotartaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010014967 Ependymoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000018233 Fibroblast Growth Factor Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108050007372 Fibroblast Growth Factor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000003971 Fibroblast Growth Factor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108090000379 Fibroblast growth factor 2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108090000385 Fibroblast growth factor 7 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100028071 Fibroblast growth factor 7 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 102100023600 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101710182389 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000009465 Growth Factor Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010009202 Growth Factor Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 2
- 101000851176 Homo sapiens Pro-epidermal growth factor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WTDHULULXKLSOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroxylamine hydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.ON WTDHULULXKLSOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100039137 Insulin receptor-related protein Human genes 0.000 description 2
- PIWKPBJCKXDKJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isoflurane Chemical compound FC(F)OC(Cl)C(F)(F)F PIWKPBJCKXDKJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FBOZXECLQNJBKD-ZDUSSCGKSA-N L-methotrexate Chemical compound C=1N=C2N=C(N)N=C(N)C2=NC=1CN(C)C1=CC=C(C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 FBOZXECLQNJBKD-ZDUSSCGKSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010025323 Lymphomas Diseases 0.000 description 2
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010064912 Malignant transformation Diseases 0.000 description 2
- OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Malonic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)=O OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000000172 Medulloblastoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000034578 Multiple myelomas Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 241000699660 Mus musculus Species 0.000 description 2
- 101100445397 Mus musculus Ephb6 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101100268066 Mus musculus Zap70 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methyl-guanidine Natural products CNC(N)=N CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010029113 Neovascularisation Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000015914 Non-Hodgkin lymphomas Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 208000022873 Ocular disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 102000043276 Oncogene Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 2
- 229930012538 Paclitaxel Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 241000609499 Palicourea Species 0.000 description 2
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphoric acid Chemical compound OP(O)(O)=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010035226 Plasma cell myeloma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010037211 Psychomotor hyperactivity Diseases 0.000 description 2
- SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinoline Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000004278 Receptor Protein-Tyrosine Kinases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108090000873 Receptor Protein-Tyrosine Kinases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000006146 Roswell Park Memorial Institute medium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 108060006706 SRC Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000001332 SRC Human genes 0.000 description 2
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 210000001744 T-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- NKANXQFJJICGDU-QPLCGJKRSA-N Tamoxifen Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(/CC)=C(C=1C=CC(OCCN(C)C)=CC=1)/C1=CC=CC=C1 NKANXQFJJICGDU-QPLCGJKRSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000024313 Testicular Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010057644 Testis cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetrahydrofuran Chemical compound C1CCOC1 WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophene Chemical compound C=1C=CSC=1 YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N Thymidine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010064390 Tumour invasion Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 102000016549 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor Receptor-2 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- JXLYSJRDGCGARV-WWYNWVTFSA-N Vinblastine Natural products O=C(O[C@H]1[C@](O)(C(=O)OC)[C@@H]2N(C)c3c(cc(c(OC)c3)[C@]3(C(=O)OC)c4[nH]c5c(c4CCN4C[C@](O)(CC)C[C@H](C3)C4)cccc5)[C@@]32[C@H]2[C@@]1(CC)C=CCN2CC3)C JXLYSJRDGCGARV-WWYNWVTFSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000036142 Viral infection Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001015 abdomen Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000003815 abdominal wall Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- GCPWJFKTWGFEHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetoacetamide Chemical compound CC(=O)CC(N)=O GCPWJFKTWGFEHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000004729 acetoacetic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- RJURFGZVJUQBHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N actinomycin D Natural products CC1OC(=O)C(C(C)C)N(C)C(=O)CN(C)C(=O)C2CCCN2C(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C1NC(=O)C1=C(N)C(=O)C(C)=C2OC(C(C)=CC=C3C(=O)NC4C(=O)NC(C(N5CCCC5C(=O)N(C)CC(=O)N(C)C(C(C)C)C(=O)OC4C)=O)C(C)C)=C3N=C21 RJURFGZVJUQBHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004480 active ingredient Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108091005764 adaptor proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000035181 adaptor proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- VREFGVBLTWBCJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N alprazolam Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NN=C2CN=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 VREFGVBLTWBCJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002260 anti-inflammatory agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000340 anti-metabolite Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000259 anti-tumor effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229940100197 antimetabolite Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000002256 antimetabolite Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000001367 artery Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 206010003246 arthritis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001815 ascending colon Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000002469 basement membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000004166 bioassay Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003851 biochemical process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 201000001531 bladder carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000037396 body weight Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010322 bone marrow transplantation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000003560 cancer drug Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009400 cancer invasion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000003917 carbamoyl group Chemical group [H]N([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 2
- 125000001951 carbamoylamino group Chemical group C(N)(=O)N* 0.000 description 2
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000032823 cell division Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003915 cell function Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000030570 cellular localization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007541 cellular toxicity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002490 cerebral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000000038 chest Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 201000011024 colonic benign neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000006552 constitutive activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940097362 cyclodextrins Drugs 0.000 description 2
- MGNZXYYWBUKAII-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexa-1,3-diene Chemical compound C1CC=CC=C1 MGNZXYYWBUKAII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HCAJEUSONLESMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexylsulfamic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)NC1CCCCC1 HCAJEUSONLESMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LPIQUOYDBNQMRZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclopentene Chemical compound C1CC=CC1 LPIQUOYDBNQMRZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000018417 cysteine Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000001945 cysteines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229960000684 cytarabine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- STQGQHZAVUOBTE-VGBVRHCVSA-N daunorubicin Chemical compound O([C@H]1C[C@@](O)(CC=2C(O)=C3C(=O)C=4C=CC=C(C=4C(=O)C3=C(O)C=21)OC)C(C)=O)[C@H]1C[C@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 STQGQHZAVUOBTE-VGBVRHCVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960000975 daunorubicin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000034994 death Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000354 decomposition reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000008121 dextrose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 206010012601 diabetes mellitus Diseases 0.000 description 2
- SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethylaminoamidine Natural products CN(C)C(N)=N SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910000397 disodium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002552 dosage form Substances 0.000 description 2
- 231100000673 dose–response relationship Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 229960004679 doxorubicin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000012377 drug delivery Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000013020 embryo development Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 2
- CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M ethanesulfonate Chemical compound CCS([O-])(=O)=O CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- OEYUQMLODPIMSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 3-(2-chlorophenyl)prop-2-ynoate Chemical group CCOC(=O)C#CC1=CC=CC=C1Cl OEYUQMLODPIMSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LFSVADABIDBSBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 3-cyclopropyl-3-oxopropanoate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)CC(=O)C1CC1 LFSVADABIDBSBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007717 exclusion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000021045 exocrine pancreatic carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000002950 fibroblast Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000706 filtrate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012458 free base Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002496 gastric effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000001035 gastrointestinal tract Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 208000037824 growth disorder Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000003306 harvesting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000014829 head and neck neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 2
- 201000002222 hemangioblastoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000006454 hepatitis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 231100000283 hepatitis Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 238000007489 histopathology method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N insulin Chemical compound N1C(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)CN)C(C)CC)CSSCC(C(NC(CO)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CCC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CSSCC(NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(C)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2NC=NC=2)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)CNC2=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)NC(C(C)O)C(=O)N3C(CCC3)C(=O)NC(CCCCN)C(=O)NC(C)C(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)CC)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)C(C(C)O)NC(=O)C1CSSCC2NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(C)C)CC1=CN=CN1 NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010054372 insulin receptor-related receptor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007917 intracranial administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007928 intraperitoneal injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007913 intrathecal administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012948 isocyanate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002513 isocyanates Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229960002725 isoflurane Drugs 0.000 description 2
- AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoquinoline Chemical compound C1=NC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960003299 ketamine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229940015418 ketaset Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 208000017169 kidney disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N lactic acid Chemical compound CC(O)C(O)=O JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 231100000518 lethal Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 230000001665 lethal effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108020001756 ligand binding domains Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 210000001165 lymph node Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000001926 lymphatic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012139 lysis buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium stearate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 230000036212 malign transformation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229960001428 mercaptopurine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 208000030159 metabolic disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229960000485 methotrexate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000002297 mitogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000002950 monocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- GVUGOAYIVIDWIO-UFWWTJHBSA-N nepidermin Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(O)=O)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H]1N(CCC1)C(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(N)=O)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)CC)C(C)C)C(C)C)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 GVUGOAYIVIDWIO-UFWWTJHBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LYGJENNIWJXYER-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitromethane Chemical class C[N+]([O-])=O LYGJENNIWJXYER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CNQRUWUTTPVLOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitromethylcyclopropane Chemical group [O-][N+](=O)CC1CC1 CNQRUWUTTPVLOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 231100000252 nontoxic Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000011580 nude mouse model Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000033667 organ regeneration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229960001592 paclitaxel Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000036407 pain Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001717 pathogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000825 pharmaceutical preparation Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000865 phosphorylative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035790 physiological processes and functions Effects 0.000 description 2
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000010482 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920000053 polysorbate 80 Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000002980 postoperative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- FGIUAXJPYTZDNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N potassium nitrate Chemical compound [K+].[O-][N+]([O-])=O FGIUAXJPYTZDNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003389 potentiating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- XOFYZVNMUHMLCC-ZPOLXVRWSA-N prednisone Chemical compound O=C1C=C[C@]2(C)[C@H]3C(=O)C[C@](C)([C@@](CC4)(O)C(=O)CO)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 XOFYZVNMUHMLCC-ZPOLXVRWSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960004618 prednisone Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940002612 prodrug Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000000651 prodrug Substances 0.000 description 2
- UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine Natural products COC1=CC=CN=C1 UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000037803 restenosis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 206010039073 rheumatoid arthritis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229940069575 rompun Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000004400 serine Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000007781 signaling event Effects 0.000 description 2
- FQENQNTWSFEDLI-UHFFFAOYSA-J sodium diphosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O FQENQNTWSFEDLI-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 2
- 229940048086 sodium pyrophosphate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011550 stock solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 201000011549 stomach cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000002536 stromal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000003456 sulfonamides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000002195 synergetic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007910 systemic administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000454 talc Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052623 talc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 235000012222 talc Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- RCINICONZNJXQF-MZXODVADSA-N taxol Chemical compound O([C@@H]1[C@@]2(C[C@@H](C(C)=C(C2(C)C)[C@H](C([C@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C[C@H]3OC[C@]3([C@H]21)OC(C)=O)=O)OC(=O)C)OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](NC(=O)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)O)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 RCINICONZNJXQF-MZXODVADSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 240000003177 tenweeks stock Species 0.000 description 2
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- 201000003120 testicular cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 235000019818 tetrasodium diphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000001577 tetrasodium phosphonato phosphate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- FYSNRJHAOHDILO-UHFFFAOYSA-N thionyl chloride Chemical compound ClS(Cl)=O FYSNRJHAOHDILO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960001196 thiotepa Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000008521 threonine Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- MNRILEROXIRVNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tioguanine Chemical compound N1C(N)=NC(=S)C2=NC=N[C]21 MNRILEROXIRVNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960003087 tioguanine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000011200 topical administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229960001005 tuberculin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 208000029729 tumor suppressor gene on chromosome 11 Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000001072 type 2 diabetes mellitus Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229940121358 tyrosine kinase inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000005483 tyrosine kinase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003668 tyrosines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 210000003932 urinary bladder Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 208000010570 urinary bladder carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000000982 vasogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000015112 vegetable and seed oil Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000008158 vegetable oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960003048 vinblastine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- JXLYSJRDGCGARV-XQKSVPLYSA-N vincaleukoblastine Chemical compound C([C@@H](C[C@]1(C(=O)OC)C=2C(=CC3=C([C@]45[C@H]([C@@]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@]6(CC)C=CCN([C@H]56)CC4)(O)C(=O)OC)N3C)C=2)OC)C[C@@](C2)(O)CC)N2CCC2=C1NC1=CC=CC=C21 JXLYSJRDGCGARV-XQKSVPLYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000009385 viral infection Effects 0.000 description 2
- QYEFBJRXKKSABU-UHFFFAOYSA-N xylazine hydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.CC1=CC=CC(C)=C1NC1=NCCCS1 QYEFBJRXKKSABU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N (2S)-2-Amino-3-hydroxypropansäure Chemical compound OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LNAZSHAWQACDHT-XIYTZBAFSA-N (2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-dimethoxy-2-(methoxymethyl)-3-[(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-3,4,5-trimethoxy-6-(methoxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6r)-4,5,6-trimethoxy-2-(methoxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxane Chemical compound CO[C@@H]1[C@@H](OC)[C@H](OC)[C@@H](COC)O[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](OC)[C@@H](OC)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](OC)[C@H](OC)O[C@@H]2COC)OC)O[C@@H]1COC LNAZSHAWQACDHT-XIYTZBAFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NWZSZGALRFJKBT-KNIFDHDWSA-N (2s)-2,6-diaminohexanoic acid;(2s)-2-hydroxybutanedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](O)CC(O)=O.NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O NWZSZGALRFJKBT-KNIFDHDWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-LNVDRNJUSA-N (3r,5r)-1,3,4,5-tetrahydroxycyclohexane-1-carboxylic acid Chemical compound O[C@@H]1CC(O)(C(O)=O)C[C@@H](O)C1O AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-LNVDRNJUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FDKXTQMXEQVLRF-ZHACJKMWSA-N (E)-dacarbazine Chemical compound CN(C)\N=N\c1[nH]cnc1C(N)=O FDKXTQMXEQVLRF-ZHACJKMWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XGNXYCFREOZBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-benzodioxol-5-amine Chemical group NC1=CC=C2OCOC2=C1 XGNXYCFREOZBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GWEHVDNNLFDJLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-diphenylurea Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1NC(=O)NC1=CC=CC=C1 GWEHVDNNLFDJLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100025573 1-alkyl-2-acetylglycerophosphocholine esterase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- IXPNQXFRVYWDDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,3-diazinane-5-carboximidamide Chemical compound CN1CC(C(N)=N)C(=O)NC1=O IXPNQXFRVYWDDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-pyrrole Natural products C=1C=CNC=1 KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LOTZEUSHKCAQNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2,5-trimethyl-1,3-dioxin-4-one Chemical compound CC1=COC(C)(C)OC1=O LOTZEUSHKCAQNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;hydron;chloride Chemical compound Cl.OCC(N)(CO)CO QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTRPRMNBTVRDFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-n-methyl-1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triamine Chemical class CNC1=NC(N)=NC(N)=N1 CTRPRMNBTVRDFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NDMPLJNOPCLANR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,4-dihydroxy-15-(4-hydroxy-18-methoxycarbonyl-5,18-seco-ibogamin-18-yl)-16-methoxy-1-methyl-6,7-didehydro-aspidospermidine-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester Natural products C1C(CC)(O)CC(CC2(C(=O)OC)C=3C(=CC4=C(C56C(C(C(O)C7(CC)C=CCN(C67)CC5)(O)C(=O)OC)N4C)C=3)OC)CN1CCC1=C2NC2=CC=CC=C12 NDMPLJNOPCLANR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPYGFFPGJMGVSW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-1,2-oxazole-4-carbonyl chloride Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C)=C1C(Cl)=O MPYGFFPGJMGVSW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CUVPFGWHGVKLSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=C1 CUVPFGWHGVKLSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GWRGWOPIIUGDPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 GWRGWOPIIUGDPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DQADJOTVQLRCCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC(C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 DQADJOTVQLRCCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RYCSNJCJOVQGBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(1-cyclopropyl-2h-pyridin-4-yl)-1h-quinolin-2-one Chemical class O=C1NC2=CC=CC=C2C=C1C(C=C1)=CCN1C1CC1 RYCSNJCJOVQGBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OFMPUQCATJAXCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-cyclopropyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C(C)=CC(NC(=O)C2=C(NN=C2C2CC2)C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1 OFMPUQCATJAXCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YKXNERUIAJDQKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-cyclopropyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=CC(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)C1=C(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)NN=C1C1CC1 YKXNERUIAJDQKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HDOQTVYBINHQQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 HDOQTVYBINHQQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BXRKVJRWUYFZEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1,2-oxazol-3-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC1=NOC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 BXRKVJRWUYFZEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XUGVKTRQPIJFMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl]-1h-pyrazol-5-yl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC1=NNC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 XUGVKTRQPIJFMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RHGFJMFMHCESJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-cyclopropyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=CC(C(F)(F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)C1=CON=C1C1CC1 RHGFJMFMHCESJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZTOJFFHGPLIVKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-ethyl-2-[(3-ethyl-6-sulfo-1,3-benzothiazol-2-ylidene)hydrazinylidene]-1,3-benzothiazole-6-sulfonic acid Chemical compound S1C2=CC(S(O)(=O)=O)=CC=C2N(CC)C1=NN=C1SC2=CC(S(O)(=O)=O)=CC=C2N1CC ZTOJFFHGPLIVKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HQFLTUZKIRYQSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-ethyl-2h-1,3-benzothiazole-6-sulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=C2N(CC)CSC2=C1 HQFLTUZKIRYQSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CUMCMYMKECWGHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-1,2-oxazole Chemical compound CC=1C=CON=1 CUMCMYMKECWGHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AVSLCGYMISJJBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC=C1C(N)=O AVSLCGYMISJJBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OKNMHNHQFDCVHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-2h-1,3-thiazole-4-carboxylic acid Chemical group CN1CSC=C1C(O)=O OKNMHNHQFDCVHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YTMVUFIFISNHDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline Chemical group CC1=CC(N)=CC=C1C(F)(F)F YTMVUFIFISNHDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BPINZFULXIZOFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2h-1,3-thiazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CN1CSC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=C1 BPINZFULXIZOFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BNPSLPVRKIZOGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2h-1,3-thiazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CN1CSC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 BNPSLPVRKIZOGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DNMHOHTUCGATHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-2h-1,3-thiazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CN1CSC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 DNMHOHTUCGATHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GNVFCXUZQGCXPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)aniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 GNVFCXUZQGCXPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004199 4-trifluoromethylphenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1*)C(F)(F)F 0.000 description 1
- FBEOYGLZXHELIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=CC(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)C1=C(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)ON=C1C1CC1 FBEOYGLZXHELIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HCTBDTJKBMXHAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NOC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 HCTBDTJKBMXHAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IDPUKCWIGUEADI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]uracil Chemical compound ClCCN(CCCl)C1=CNC(=O)NC1=O IDPUKCWIGUEADI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZYUKYPJNGPUSFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-cyclopropyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=CC(C(F)(F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)C1=CNN=C1C1CC1 ZYUKYPJNGPUSFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BXDUAHVCZKJBLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-n'-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2-oxazole-4-carbohydrazide Chemical compound O1N=CC(C(=O)NNC=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(F)(F)F)=C1C BXDUAHVCZKJBLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTAQUNHHSNQBCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C(C)=C1 CTAQUNHHSNQBCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YROKSDGXNKDUHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-n-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide;5-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound N1N=CC(C(=O)NC=2C=C(C)C(=CC=2)C(F)(F)F)=C1C.N1N=CC(C(=O)NC=2C=CC(=CC=2)S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)=C1C YROKSDGXNKDUHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SFVAQWDAFROERY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-n-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-1h-pyrazole-4-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=NNC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F)C=C1 SFVAQWDAFROERY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WDYVUKGVKRZQNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-phosphonohexylphosphonic acid Chemical compound OP(O)(=O)CCCCCCP(O)(O)=O WDYVUKGVKRZQNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7553-56-2 Chemical compound [I] ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 244000215068 Acacia senegal Species 0.000 description 1
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acetate Chemical compound CC([O-])=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 208000014697 Acute lymphocytic leukaemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000031261 Acute myeloid leukaemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010067484 Adverse reaction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920001817 Agar Polymers 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N Alpha-Lactose Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO)O[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010002091 Anaesthesia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010003210 Arteriosclerosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010024976 Asparaginase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000416162 Astragalus gummifer Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000010839 B-cell chronic lymphocytic leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000032791 BCR-ABL1 positive chronic myelogenous leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000005440 Basal Cell Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010004146 Basal cell carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- OGBVRMYSNSKIEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzylphosphonic acid Chemical class OP(O)(=O)CC1=CC=CC=C1 OGBVRMYSNSKIEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 201000004569 Blindness Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010005949 Bone cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000020084 Bone disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000018084 Bone neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bromine atom Chemical compound [Br] WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- COVZYZSDYWQREU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Busulfan Chemical compound CS(=O)(=O)OCCCCOS(C)(=O)=O COVZYZSDYWQREU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100381481 Caenorhabditis elegans baz-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- SHHKQEUPHAENFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carboquone Chemical compound O=C1C(C)=C(N2CC2)C(=O)C(C(COC(N)=O)OC)=C1N1CC1 SHHKQEUPHAENFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010048964 Carotid artery occlusion Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010007687 Carotid artery stenosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- JWBOIMRXGHLCPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chloditan Chemical compound C=1C=CC=C(Cl)C=1C(C(Cl)Cl)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 JWBOIMRXGHLCPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010008723 Chondrodystrophy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010063209 Chronic allograft nephropathy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000010833 Chronic myeloid leukaemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K Citrate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)CC(O)(CC([O-])=O)C([O-])=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 208000001333 Colorectal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010052360 Colorectal adenocarcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010062344 Congenital musculoskeletal anomaly Diseases 0.000 description 1
- AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cordycepinsaeure Natural products OC1CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)C1O AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002261 Corn starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- PMPVIKIVABFJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclobutane Chemical compound C1CCC1 PMPVIKIVABFJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclohexane Chemical compound C1CCCCC1 XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-KVTDHHQDSA-N D-Mannitol Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-KVTDHHQDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004543 DNA replication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940122029 DNA synthesis inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108010092160 Dactinomycin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000012239 Developmental disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000007342 Diabetic Nephropathies Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000012591 Dulbecco’s Phosphate Buffered Saline Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010013883 Dwarfism Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000032027 Essential Thrombocythemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102100024785 Fibroblast growth factor 2 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000003974 Fibroblast growth factor 2 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100028043 Fibroblast growth factor 3 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100028072 Fibroblast growth factor 4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100028075 Fibroblast growth factor 6 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000003972 Fibroblast growth factor 7 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000368 Fibroblast growth factor 8 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003956 Fibroblast growth factor 8 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100037680 Fibroblast growth factor 8 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100037665 Fibroblast growth factor 9 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100023593 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710182386 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100027844 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine Chemical compound FF PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000287828 Gallus gallus Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010061968 Gastric neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010018364 Glomerulonephritis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920000084 Gum arabic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000010268 HPLC based assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 206010019851 Hepatotoxicity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 101001060280 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 3 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001060274 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001060265 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 6 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001060261 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 7 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001027382 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 8 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001027380 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor 9 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000917134 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor receptor 4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DOMWKUIIPQCAJU-LJHIYBGHSA-N Hydroxyprogesterone caproate Chemical compound C1CC2=CC(=O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@@](C(C)=O)(OC(=O)CCCCC)[C@@]1(C)CC2 DOMWKUIIPQCAJU-LJHIYBGHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VSNHCAURESNICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroxyurea Chemical compound NC(=O)NO VSNHCAURESNICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010062767 Hypophysitis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010021143 Hypoxia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010061218 Inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102000004877 Insulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090001061 Insulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000048143 Insulin-Like Growth Factor II Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090001117 Insulin-Like Growth Factor II Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010022773 Intracranial pressure increased Diseases 0.000 description 1
- AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-GBXIJSLDSA-N L-threonine Chemical compound C[C@@H](O)[C@H](N)C(O)=O AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-GBXIJSLDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Lactate Chemical compound CC(O)C([O-])=O JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 206010067125 Liver injury Diseases 0.000 description 1
- GQYIWUVLTXOXAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lomustine Chemical compound ClCCN(N=O)C(=O)NC1CCCCC1 GQYIWUVLTXOXAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000019693 Lung disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000007433 Lymphatic Metastasis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000031422 Lymphocytic Chronic B-Cell Leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000027311 M phase Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108010058398 Macrophage Colony-Stimulating Factor Receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000019759 Maize starch Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229930195725 Mannitol Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 102000018697 Membrane Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010052285 Membrane Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010027459 Metastases to lymph nodes Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229930192392 Mitomycin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 206010028116 Mucosal inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000010927 Mucositis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000034486 Multi-organ failure Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000699666 Mus <mouse, genus> Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100446506 Mus musculus Fgf3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000007727 Muscle Tissue Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000033761 Myelogenous Chronic BCR-ABL Positive Leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N Mytomycin Chemical compound C1N2C(C(C(C)=C(N)C3=O)=O)=C3[C@@H](COC(N)=O)[C@@]2(OC)[C@@H]2[C@H]1N2 NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HSHXDCVZWHOWCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N N'-hexadecylthiophene-2-carbohydrazide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNNC(=O)c1cccs1 HSHXDCVZWHOWCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011887 Necropsy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 206010029155 Nephropathy toxic Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010029260 Neuroblastoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010067482 No adverse event Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000000636 Northern blotting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108091005461 Nucleic proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010058765 Oncogene Protein pp60(v-src) Proteins 0.000 description 1
- ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxazole Chemical compound C1=COC=N1 ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150038994 PDGFRA gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 241000609816 Pantholops hodgsonii Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000035195 Peptidases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920002556 Polyethylene Glycol 300 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001213 Polysorbate 20 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000006664 Precursor Cell Lymphoblastic Leukemia-Lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- HFVNWDWLWUCIHC-GUPDPFMOSA-N Prednimustine Chemical compound O=C([C@@]1(O)CC[C@H]2[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@]4(C=CC(=O)C=C4CC3)C)[C@@H](O)C[C@@]21C)COC(=O)CCCC1=CC=C(N(CCCl)CCCl)C=C1 HFVNWDWLWUCIHC-GUPDPFMOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004365 Protease Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000016971 Proto-Oncogene Proteins c-kit Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010014608 Proto-Oncogene Proteins c-kit Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-ZHQZDSKASA-N Quinic acid Natural products O[C@H]1CC(O)(C(O)=O)C[C@H](O)C1O AAWZDTNXLSGCEK-ZHQZDSKASA-N 0.000 description 1
- AHHFEZNOXOZZQA-ZEBDFXRSSA-N Ranimustine Chemical compound CO[C@H]1O[C@H](CNC(=O)N(CCCl)N=O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O AHHFEZNOXOZZQA-ZEBDFXRSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100372762 Rattus norvegicus Flt1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000220317 Rosa Species 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Serine Natural products OCC(N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PMZURENOXWZQFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Sulfate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O PMZURENOXWZQFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 208000021712 Soft tissue sarcoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229930006000 Sucrose Natural products 0.000 description 1
- CZMRCDWAGMRECN-UGDNZRGBSA-N Sucrose Chemical compound O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@@]1(CO)O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 CZMRCDWAGMRECN-UGDNZRGBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sulfate Chemical compound [O-]S([O-])(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tartaric acid Natural products [H+].[H+].[O-]C(=O)C(O)C(O)C([O-])=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PDMMFKSKQVNJMI-BLQWBTBKSA-N Testosterone propionate Chemical compound C1CC2=CC(=O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H](OC(=O)CC)[C@@]1(C)CC2 PDMMFKSKQVNJMI-BLQWBTBKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000011102 Thera Species 0.000 description 1
- AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Threonine Natural products CC(O)C(N)C(O)=O AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004473 Threonine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000034841 Thrombotic Microangiopathies Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000033781 Thyroid carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000024770 Thyroid neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920001615 Tragacanth Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 206010052779 Transplant rejections Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- FYAMXEPQQLNQDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tris(1-aziridinyl)phosphine oxide Chemical compound C1CN1P(N1CC1)(=O)N1CC1 FYAMXEPQQLNQDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000006105 Uterine Cervical Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010053096 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor Receptor-1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100033178 Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229940122803 Vinca alkaloid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 208000033559 Waldenström macroglobulinemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000008383 Wilms tumor Diseases 0.000 description 1
- FYGNJYLXDRROPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N [2-(4-phenylmethoxyphenyl)-1,3-thiazol-4-yl]methanamine Chemical group NCC1=CSC(C=2C=CC(OCC=3C=CC=CC=3)=CC=2)=N1 FYGNJYLXDRROPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- USDJGQLNFPZEON-UHFFFAOYSA-N [[4,6-bis(hydroxymethylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]amino]methanol Chemical compound OCNC1=NC(NCO)=NC(NCO)=N1 USDJGQLNFPZEON-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000000683 abdominal cavity Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000010489 acacia gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000205 acacia gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035508 accumulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000011054 acetic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;2,3,4,5,6-pentahydroxyhexanal;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CC(O)=O.OCC(O)C(O)C(O)C(O)C=O DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000008919 achondroplasia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RJURFGZVJUQBHK-IIXSONLDSA-N actinomycin D Chemical compound C[C@H]1OC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)N(C)C(=O)CN(C)C(=O)[C@@H]2CCCN2C(=O)[C@@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H]1NC(=O)C1=C(N)C(=O)C(C)=C2OC(C(C)=CC=C3C(=O)N[C@@H]4C(=O)N[C@@H](C(N5CCC[C@H]5C(=O)N(C)CC(=O)N(C)[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)O[C@@H]4C)=O)C(C)C)=C3N=C21 RJURFGZVJUQBHK-IIXSONLDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001780 adrenocortical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006838 adverse reaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008272 agar Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010419 agar Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000016571 aggressive behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001476 alcoholic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000783 alginic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229960001126 alginic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000004781 alginic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001338 aliphatic hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940045714 alkyl sulfonate alkylating agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000008052 alkyl sulfonates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000473 altretamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910000147 aluminium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960003437 aminoglutethimide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ROBVIMPUHSLWNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N aminoglutethimide Chemical compound C=1C=C(N)C=CC=1C1(CC)CCC(=O)NC1=O ROBVIMPUHSLWNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000037005 anaesthesia Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000202 analgesic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003098 androgen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940030486 androgens Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005557 antagonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002178 anthracenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001772 anti-angiogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940046836 anti-estrogen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001833 anti-estrogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940121363 anti-inflammatory agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001741 anti-phlogistic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001754 anti-pyretic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003356 anti-rheumatic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940045687 antimetabolites folic acid analogs Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940045713 antineoplastic alkylating drug ethylene imines Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002221 antipyretic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003435 antirheumatic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010060350 arginyl-arginyl-leucyl-isoleucyl-glutamyl-aspartyl-alanyl-glutamyl-tyrosyl-alanyl-alanyl-arginyl-glycine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000011775 arteriosclerosis disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001541 aziridines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000021592 benign granular cell tumor Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940077388 benzenesulfonate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- SRSXLGNVWSONIS-UHFFFAOYSA-M benzenesulfonate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 SRSXLGNVWSONIS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229950005567 benzodepa Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- VFIUCBTYGKMLCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl n-[bis(aziridin-1-yl)phosphoryl]carbamate Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1COC(=O)NP(=O)(N1CC1)N1CC1 VFIUCBTYGKMLCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940108502 bicnu Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002619 bicyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000227 bioadhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003115 biocidal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012925 biological evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003592 biomimetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001574 biopsy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000001185 bone marrow Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- PHEZJEYUWHETKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N brequinar Chemical compound N1=C2C=CC(F)=CC2=C(C(O)=O)C(C)=C1C(C=C1)=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1F PHEZJEYUWHETKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950010231 brequinar Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012267 brine Substances 0.000 description 1
- GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine Substances BrBr GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007975 buffered saline Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960002092 busulfan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000013877 carbamide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000002252 carbamoylating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960002115 carboquone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003857 carboxamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001732 carboxylic acid derivatives Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 208000006170 carotid stenosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000000845 cartilage Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000015100 cartilage disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000423 cell based assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006369 cell cycle progression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008004 cell lysis buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000012292 cell migration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004715 cellular signal transduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005754 cellular signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003169 central nervous system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004720 cerebrum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 201000010881 cervical cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000003679 cervix uteri Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012829 chemotherapy agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960004630 chlorambucil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- JCKYGMPEJWAADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N chlorambucil Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCC1=CC=C(N(CCCl)CCCl)C=C1 JCKYGMPEJWAADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000001612 chondrocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001684 chronic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000032852 chronic lymphocytic leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 235000015165 citric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000005757 colony formation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000010989 colorectal carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004246 corpus luteum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003792 cranial nerve Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012043 crude product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001186 cumulative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000035250 cutaneous malignant susceptibility to 1 melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- CHVJITGCYZJHLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohepta-1,3,5-triene Chemical compound C1C=CC=CC=C1 CHVJITGCYZJHLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001559 cyclopropyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000009089 cytolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000805 cytoplasm Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000003013 cytotoxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000135 cytotoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 229960003901 dacarbazine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960000640 dactinomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002498 deadly effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000935 dehydrated alcohol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000003405 delayed action preparation Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001066 destructive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001627 detrimental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- UREBDLICKHMUKA-CXSFZGCWSA-N dexamethasone Chemical compound C1CC2=CC(=O)C=C[C@]2(C)[C@]2(F)[C@@H]1[C@@H]1C[C@@H](C)[C@@](C(=O)CO)(O)[C@@]1(C)C[C@@H]2O UREBDLICKHMUKA-CXSFZGCWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003957 dexamethasone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 208000033679 diabetic kidney disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000003745 diagnosis Methods 0.000 description 1
- RGLYKWWBQGJZGM-ISLYRVAYSA-N diethylstilbestrol Chemical compound C=1C=C(O)C=CC=1C(/CC)=C(\CC)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 RGLYKWWBQGJZGM-ISLYRVAYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000452 diethylstilbestrol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000007865 diluting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006471 dimerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002270 dispersing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000371 dose-limiting toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 239000000890 drug combination Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002183 duodenal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002500 effect on skin Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001804 emulsifying effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003511 endothelial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006911 enzymatic reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002919 epithelial cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000008472 epithelial growth Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000981 epithelium Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003238 esophagus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229960001842 estramustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- FRPJXPJMRWBBIH-RBRWEJTLSA-N estramustine Chemical compound ClCCN(CCCl)C(=O)OC1=CC=C2[C@H]3CC[C@](C)([C@H](CC4)O)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 FRPJXPJMRWBBIH-RBRWEJTLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940011871 estrogen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000262 estrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000328 estrogen antagonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- AEWHICNMVQOWJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 3-methyl-1,2-oxazole-4-carboxylate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C1=CON=C1C AEWHICNMVQOWJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FCJJZKCJURDYNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl but-2-ynoate Chemical group CCOC(=O)C#CC FCJJZKCJURDYNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000010685 fatty oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000003754 fetus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229940126864 fibroblast growth factor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940047127 fiore Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- OVBPIULPVIDEAO-LBPRGKRZSA-N folic acid Chemical compound C=1N=C2NC(N)=NC(=O)C2=NC=1CNC1=CC=C(C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 OVBPIULPVIDEAO-LBPRGKRZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002224 folic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229960004783 fotemustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- YAKWPXVTIGTRJH-UHFFFAOYSA-N fotemustine Chemical compound CCOP(=O)(OCC)C(C)NC(=O)N(CCCl)N=O YAKWPXVTIGTRJH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000010749 gastric carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000004602 germ cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002518 glial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 206010061989 glomerulosclerosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000008103 glucose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008187 granular material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000227 grinding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003324 growth hormone secretagogue Substances 0.000 description 1
- 201000010536 head and neck cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000011066 hemangioma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000005787 hematologic cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000024200 hematopoietic and lymphoid system neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- ZFGMDIBRIDKWMY-PASTXAENSA-N heparin Chemical compound CC(O)=N[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](COS(O)(=O)=O)O[C@@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](C(O)=O)O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](OS(O)(=O)=O)[C@@H](O[C@@H]3[C@@H](OC(O)[C@H](OS(O)(=O)=O)[C@H]3O)C(O)=O)O[C@@H]2O)CS(O)(=O)=O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O ZFGMDIBRIDKWMY-PASTXAENSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000669 heparin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 231100000234 hepatic damage Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000004730 hepatocarcinogenesis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000304 hepatotoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000007686 hepatotoxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000833 heterodimer Substances 0.000 description 1
- UUVWYPNAQBNQJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexamethylmelamine Chemical compound CN(C)C1=NC(N(C)C)=NC(N(C)C)=N1 UUVWYPNAQBNQJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000171 higher toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000044162 human IGF1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- IKDUDTNKRLTJSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrazine monohydrate Substances O.NN IKDUDTNKRLTJSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000017 hydrogel Substances 0.000 description 1
- WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydroxyacetaldehyde Natural products OCC=O WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001330 hydroxycarbamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229950000801 hydroxyprogesterone caproate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010979 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001866 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003088 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000000521 hyperimmunizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000010072 hypochondroplasia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000007954 hypoxia Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001101 ifosfamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- HOMGKSMUEGBAAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N ifosfamide Chemical compound ClCCNP1(=O)OCCCN1CCCl HOMGKSMUEGBAAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012744 immunostaining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001506 immunosuppresive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- DBIGHPPNXATHOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N improsulfan Chemical compound CS(=O)(=O)OCCCNCCCOS(C)(=O)=O DBIGHPPNXATHOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950008097 improsulfan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000007901 in situ hybridization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000099 in vitro assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010874 in vitro model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005462 in vivo assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004054 inflammatory process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000028709 inflammatory response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940125396 insulin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001361 intraarterial administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007927 intramuscular injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010255 intramuscular injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007914 intraventricular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011630 iodine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000003456 ion exchange resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003303 ion-exchange polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000007794 irritation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002540 isothiocyanates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000842 isoxazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000004922 lacquer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004310 lactic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000014655 lactic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000002605 large molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 231100000636 lethal dose Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 231100000225 lethality Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 201000002364 leukopenia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 231100001022 leukopenia Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 229940057995 liquid paraffin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000008818 liver damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960002247 lomustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000314 lubricant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000037841 lung tumor Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000000527 lymphocytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000000564 macroglobulinemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920002521 macromolecule Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019359 magnesium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000594 mannitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010355 mannitol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000010534 mechanism of action Effects 0.000 description 1
- SGDBTWWWUNNDEQ-LBPRGKRZSA-N melphalan Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(N(CCCl)CCCl)C=C1 SGDBTWWWUNNDEQ-LBPRGKRZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001924 melphalan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940098779 methanesulfonic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- DMVAIJCMWPNOKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 3-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-oxopropanoate Chemical group COC(=O)CC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1Cl DMVAIJCMWPNOKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RIJWDPRXCXJDPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 3-cyclopropyl-3-oxopropanoate Chemical compound COC(=O)CC(=O)C1CC1 RIJWDPRXCXJDPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000609 methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000010981 methylcellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001923 methylcellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229950009847 meturedepa Drugs 0.000 description 1
- QTFKTBRIGWJQQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N meturedepa Chemical compound C1C(C)(C)N1P(=O)(NC(=O)OCC)N1CC1(C)C QTFKTBRIGWJQQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000813 microbial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000520 microinjection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004005 microsphere Substances 0.000 description 1
- CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-BKHRDMLASA-N mithramycin Chemical compound O([C@@H]1C[C@@H](O[C@H](C)[C@H]1O)OC=1C=C2C=C3C[C@H]([C@@H](C(=O)C3=C(O)C2=C(O)C=1C)O[C@@H]1O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]2O[C@H](C)[C@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]3O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@@](C)(O)C3)C2)C1)[C@H](OC)C(=O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C)O)[C@H]1C[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](C)O1 CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-BKHRDMLASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004857 mitomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000011278 mitosis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000350 mitotane Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960001156 mitoxantrone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KKZJGLLVHKMTCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N mitoxantrone Chemical compound O=C1C2=C(O)C=CC(O)=C2C(=O)C2=C1C(NCCNCCO)=CC=C2NCCNCCO KKZJGLLVHKMTCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100001228 moderately toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- HDZGCSFEDULWCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N monomethylhydrazine Chemical class CNN HDZGCSFEDULWCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000402 monopotassium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000004899 motility Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010172 mouse model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000029744 multiple organ dysfunction syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000006417 multiple sclerosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000005962 mycosis fungoides Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000000066 myeloid cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 201000004130 myoblastoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- LNOPIUAQISRISI-UHFFFAOYSA-N n'-hydroxy-2-propan-2-ylsulfonylethanimidamide Chemical compound CC(C)S(=O)(=O)CC(N)=NO LNOPIUAQISRISI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FRZJZRVZZNTMAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-diethyl-3-(hydroxymethyl)benzamide Chemical compound CCN(CC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC(CO)=C1 FRZJZRVZZNTMAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SLFVYFOEHHLHDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(trifluoromethyl)aniline Chemical compound FC(F)(F)NC1=CC=CC=C1 SLFVYFOEHHLHDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002088 nanocapsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001624 naphthyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229930014626 natural product Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 210000003739 neck Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000017074 necrotic cell death Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000025402 neoplasm of esophagus Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000009925 nephrosclerosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000007694 nephrotoxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000417 nephrotoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 210000000653 nervous system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004770 neurodegeneration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000015122 neurodegenerative disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000002569 neuron Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000007135 neurotoxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003472 neutralizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001420 nimustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- VFEDRRNHLBGPNN-UHFFFAOYSA-N nimustine Chemical compound CC1=NC=C(CNC(=O)N(CCCl)N=O)C(N)=N1 VFEDRRNHLBGPNN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940021182 non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003000 nontoxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000956 nontoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000016709 nutrition Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000011275 oncology therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108091008819 oncoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000004768 organ dysfunction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003791 organic solvent mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002905 orthoesters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000000963 osteoblast Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000002997 osteoclast Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 201000008968 osteosarcoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000020477 pH reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000496 pancreas Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000003076 paracrine Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007911 parenteral administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003200 peritoneal cavity Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004303 peritoneum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- DCWXELXMIBXGTH-QMMMGPOBSA-N phosphonotyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(OP(O)(O)=O)C=C1 DCWXELXMIBXGTH-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004962 physiological condition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004560 pineal gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- NUKCGLDCWQXYOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N piposulfan Chemical compound CS(=O)(=O)OCCC(=O)N1CCN(C(=O)CCOS(C)(=O)=O)CC1 NUKCGLDCWQXYOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950001100 piposulfan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000003635 pituitary gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000004014 plasticizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000004983 pleiotropic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003171 plicamycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000003367 polycyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000010486 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000256 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000244 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229940068968 polysorbate 80 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000008092 positive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001883 posterior pituitary gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920001592 potato starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229960004694 prednimustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002335 preservative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000000583 progesterone congener Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000750 progressive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009696 proliferative response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011321 prophylaxis Methods 0.000 description 1
- UORVCLMRJXCDCP-UHFFFAOYSA-M propynoate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C#C UORVCLMRJXCDCP-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 201000005825 prostate adenocarcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000017854 proteolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- WOLQREOUPKZMEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N pteroyltriglutamic acid Chemical compound C=1N=C2NC(N)=NC(=O)C2=NC=1CNC1=CC=C(C(=O)NC(CCC(=O)NC(CCC(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 WOLQREOUPKZMEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000005069 pulmonary fibrosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000007047 pulmonary toxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003212 purines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004076 pyridyl group Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003230 pyrimidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000168 pyrrolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002294 quinazolinyl group Chemical class N1=C(N=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- ZHNFLHYOFXQIOW-LPYZJUEESA-N quinine sulfate dihydrate Chemical compound [H+].[H+].O.O.[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O.C([C@H]([C@H](C1)C=C)C2)C[N@@]1[C@@H]2[C@H](O)C1=CC=NC2=CC=C(OC)C=C21.C([C@H]([C@H](C1)C=C)C2)C[N@@]1[C@@H]2[C@H](O)C1=CC=NC2=CC=C(OC)C=C21 ZHNFLHYOFXQIOW-LPYZJUEESA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001959 radiotherapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002185 ranimustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000010992 reflux Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008439 repair process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004043 responsiveness Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000979 retarding effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000009410 rhabdomyosarcoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940100486 rice starch Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 102220226043 rs1064794935 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102220232643 rs1064794935 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102200082402 rs751610198 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 208000011581 secondary neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000028327 secretion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003346 selenoethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003355 serines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000741 silica gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910002027 silica gel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000010898 silica gel chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 201000000849 skin cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000017520 skin disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010040882 skin lesion Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 231100000444 skin lesion Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 210000003625 skull Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000010413 sodium alginate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000661 sodium alginate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940005550 sodium alginate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910000029 sodium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000019812 sodium carboxymethyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920001027 sodium carboxymethylcellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052938 sodium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011152 sodium sulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- HPALAKNZSZLMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;chloride;hydrate Chemical compound O.[Na+].[Cl-] HPALAKNZSZLMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000007901 soft capsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012439 solid excipient Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001179 sorption measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000278 spinal cord Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000130 stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008223 sterile water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004936 stimulating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000000498 stomach carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 125000005504 styryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000005720 sucrose Substances 0.000 description 1
- IIACRCGMVDHOTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sulfamate Chemical compound NS([O-])(=O)=O IIACRCGMVDHOTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000153 supplemental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000375 suspending agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013268 sustained release Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012730 sustained-release form Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000011580 syndromic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229960001603 tamoxifen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011975 tartaric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000002906 tartaric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940095064 tartrate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000001994 temporal artery Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- NRUKOCRGYNPUPR-QBPJDGROSA-N teniposide Chemical compound COC1=C(O)C(OC)=CC([C@@H]2C3=CC=4OCOC=4C=C3[C@@H](O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H]4O[C@@H](OC[C@H]4O3)C=3SC=CC=3)O)[C@@H]3[C@@H]2C(OC3)=O)=C1 NRUKOCRGYNPUPR-QBPJDGROSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001278 teniposide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KHGJYGFMJDVIRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl 7-nitrononanoate Chemical group CCC([N+]([O-])=O)CCCCCC(=O)OC(C)(C)C KHGJYGFMJDVIRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001712 testosterone propionate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 201000003896 thanatophoric dysplasia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940124597 therapeutic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- DLFVBJFMPXGRIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N thioacetamide Natural products CC(N)=O DLFVBJFMPXGRIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930192474 thiophene Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000003588 threonines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 206010043554 thrombocytopenia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000002510 thyroid cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000001685 thyroid gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000013077 thyroid gland carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000004408 titanium dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002110 toxicologic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000027 toxicology Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 239000003053 toxin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000765 toxin Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 108700012359 toxins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000010361 transduction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000026683 transduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- IUCJMVBFZDHPDX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tretamine Chemical compound C1CN1C1=NC(N2CC2)=NC(N2CC2)=N1 IUCJMVBFZDHPDX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950001353 tretamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003918 triazines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris Chemical compound OCC(N)(CO)CO LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005748 tumor development Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005740 tumor formation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000588 tumorigenic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 210000003606 umbilical vein Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004222 uncontrolled growth Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001055 uracil mustard Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003672 ureas Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229950006929 uredepa Drugs 0.000 description 1
- SPDZFJLQFWSJGA-UHFFFAOYSA-N uredepa Chemical compound C1CN1P(=O)(NC(=O)OCC)N1CC1 SPDZFJLQFWSJGA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002485 urinary effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002792 vascular Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000019553 vascular disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- UGGWPQSBPIFKDZ-KOTLKJBCSA-N vindesine Chemical compound C([C@@H](C[C@]1(C(=O)OC)C=2C(=CC3=C([C@]45[C@H]([C@@]([C@H](O)[C@]6(CC)C=CCN([C@H]56)CC4)(O)C(N)=O)N3C)C=2)OC)C[C@@](C2)(O)CC)N2CCC2=C1N=C1[C]2C=CC=C1 UGGWPQSBPIFKDZ-KOTLKJBCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004355 vindesine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940100445 wheat starch Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002689 xenotransplantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- BPICBUSOMSTKRF-UHFFFAOYSA-N xylazine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(C)=C1NC1=NCCCS1 BPICBUSOMSTKRF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001600 xylazine Drugs 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
- C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D261/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings
- C07D261/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D261/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D261/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
- C07D261/18—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
- C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
- C07D413/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention relates to novel heteroarylcarboxamides which modulate the activity of protein tyrosine kinases and are expected to be useful in the treatment of abnormal protein tyrosine kinase activity driven disorders, to methods for the treatment of inappropriate FGFR activity related disorders with the heteroarylcarboxamide, N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide, and to the treatment of solid tumor cancers, especially glioblastoma and astrocytoma, with a combination of a nitrosourea, preferably BCNU (carmustin) and N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide.
Description
WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ DESCRIPTION
Heteroarylcarboxamide Compounds Active Against Protein Tyrosine Kinase Related Disorders Introduction The present invention relates generally to organic chemistry, biochemistry, pharmacology, medicine and cancer therapy. More particularly, it relates to heteroaryl-carboxamide compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts which modulate the activity of protein tyrosine kinases and, as a result, are expected to exhibit a salutary effect against disorders related to abnormal protein tyrosine kinase activity including cancer. Novel chemotherapeutices comprising a heteroarylcarboxamide in combination with known chemotherapeutic agents such as the nitrosoureas are also described herein.
Background of the Invention The following is offered as background information only and is not admitted to be prior art to the present invention.
Cellular signal transduction is a fundamental mechanism whereby external stimuli that regulate diverse cellular processes are relayed to the interior of cells. Growth factor receptors ("Gfrs") are an important part of the signal transduction pathway. Gfrs are cell-surface proteins. When bound by a growth factor ligand, Gfrs are converted to an active form which interacts with proteins on the inner surface of a cell membrane. As the result of this interaction, one of the key biochemical mechanisms of signal transduction is initiated; i.e., the reversible phosphorylation of various proteins within the cell. This phosphorylation of intra-cellular proteins causes the formation inside the cell of complexes with a variety of cytoplasmic signaling molecules that, in turn, effect numerous cellular responses such as cell SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
Heteroarylcarboxamide Compounds Active Against Protein Tyrosine Kinase Related Disorders Introduction The present invention relates generally to organic chemistry, biochemistry, pharmacology, medicine and cancer therapy. More particularly, it relates to heteroaryl-carboxamide compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts which modulate the activity of protein tyrosine kinases and, as a result, are expected to exhibit a salutary effect against disorders related to abnormal protein tyrosine kinase activity including cancer. Novel chemotherapeutices comprising a heteroarylcarboxamide in combination with known chemotherapeutic agents such as the nitrosoureas are also described herein.
Background of the Invention The following is offered as background information only and is not admitted to be prior art to the present invention.
Cellular signal transduction is a fundamental mechanism whereby external stimuli that regulate diverse cellular processes are relayed to the interior of cells. Growth factor receptors ("Gfrs") are an important part of the signal transduction pathway. Gfrs are cell-surface proteins. When bound by a growth factor ligand, Gfrs are converted to an active form which interacts with proteins on the inner surface of a cell membrane. As the result of this interaction, one of the key biochemical mechanisms of signal transduction is initiated; i.e., the reversible phosphorylation of various proteins within the cell. This phosphorylation of intra-cellular proteins causes the formation inside the cell of complexes with a variety of cytoplasmic signaling molecules that, in turn, effect numerous cellular responses such as cell SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
2 division (proliferation), cell differentiation, cell growth, expression of metabolic effects on the extracellular microenvironment, etc. For a more complete discussion, see Schlessinger and Ullrich, Neuron, 9:303-391 (1992). See also, Posada and Cooper, Mol. Biol. Cell., 3:583-392 (1992) and Hardie, Symp. Soc. Exp. Biol., 44:241-255 (1990).
The molecules which effect the phosphorylation of proteins are called protein kinases ("PKs"). One of the classes of PKs which is of particular importance to the present invention phosphorylates proteins on the alcohol (-OH) moiety of serine, threonine and tyrosine residues in eukariotic cells.
These PKs fall essentially into two groups, those specific for phosphorylating serines and threonines, and those specific for phosphorylating tyrosines. The protein tyrosine kinases {"PTKs") can be further divided into receptor PTKs or "RTKs"
and non-receptor PTKs, sometimes referred to as "cellular tyrosine kinases" or "CTKs."
The RTKs are comprised of an extracellular glycosylated ligand binding domain, a transmembrane domain and an intracellular cytoplasmic catalytic domain that can phosphorylate tyrosine residues on proteins. CTKs are entirely intra-cellular and do not contain extracellular and transmembrane domains.
PTKs play an important role in the control of cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation, migration and survival. It is clear from numerous studies (q. v., infra) that the activity of PTKs must be tightly controlled in normal cells and healthy tissue, as mutations resulting in overactivity and/or overexpression of PTKs cause diseases that are associated with excessive cell growth and proliferation such as, significantly, cancer. At the other end of the spectrum, mutations which result in reduction or loss of activity can cause embryonal lethality or developmental disorders.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
The molecules which effect the phosphorylation of proteins are called protein kinases ("PKs"). One of the classes of PKs which is of particular importance to the present invention phosphorylates proteins on the alcohol (-OH) moiety of serine, threonine and tyrosine residues in eukariotic cells.
These PKs fall essentially into two groups, those specific for phosphorylating serines and threonines, and those specific for phosphorylating tyrosines. The protein tyrosine kinases {"PTKs") can be further divided into receptor PTKs or "RTKs"
and non-receptor PTKs, sometimes referred to as "cellular tyrosine kinases" or "CTKs."
The RTKs are comprised of an extracellular glycosylated ligand binding domain, a transmembrane domain and an intracellular cytoplasmic catalytic domain that can phosphorylate tyrosine residues on proteins. CTKs are entirely intra-cellular and do not contain extracellular and transmembrane domains.
PTKs play an important role in the control of cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation, migration and survival. It is clear from numerous studies (q. v., infra) that the activity of PTKs must be tightly controlled in normal cells and healthy tissue, as mutations resulting in overactivity and/or overexpression of PTKs cause diseases that are associated with excessive cell growth and proliferation such as, significantly, cancer. At the other end of the spectrum, mutations which result in reduction or loss of activity can cause embryonal lethality or developmental disorders.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
3 The RTKs comprise one of the larger families of PTKs and have diverse biological activity. At present, at least nineteen (19) distinct subfamilies of RTKs have been identified. One such subfamily is the "HER" family of RTKs, which include EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor), HER2, HERS and HERO. These RTKs consist of an extracellular glycosylated ligand binding domain, a transmembrane domain and an intracellular cytoplasmic catalytic domain that can phosphorylate tyrosine residues on proteins. One well-known example of the apparent involvement of PTKs/RTKs in cellular disorders is the association of Her2 over-expression with breast cancer (Slamon, et al, Science, 244:707 (1989).
Another RTK subfamily consists of insulin receptor (IR), insulin-like growth factor I receptor (IGF-1R) and the insulin receptor related receptor (IRR). IR and IGF-1R interact with insulin, IGF-I and IGF-II to form a heterotetramer of two entirely extracellular glycosylated a subunits and two (3 subunits which cross the cell membrane and which contain the tyrosine kinase domain.
A third RTK subfamily is referred to as the platelet derived growth factor receptor ("PDGFR") group, which includes PDGFRa, PDGFR(3, CSFIR, c-kit and c-fms. These receptors consist of glycosylated extracellular domains composed of variable numbers of immunoglobin-like loops and an intracellular domain wherein the tyrosine kinase domain is interrupted by unrelated amino acid sequences.
Another group which, because of its similarity to the PDGFR subfamily, is sometimes subsumed in the later group, is the fetus liver kinase ("flk") receptor subfamily. This group is believed to be made of up of kinase insert domain-receptor fetal liver kinase-1 (KDR/FLK-1), flk-IR, flk-4 and fms-like tyrosine kinase 1 (flt-1).
Finally, the fibroblast growth factor ("FGF") family of PTKs contains at least four distinct members: fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 (FGFRl, also called Flg and Cekl), FGFR2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
Another RTK subfamily consists of insulin receptor (IR), insulin-like growth factor I receptor (IGF-1R) and the insulin receptor related receptor (IRR). IR and IGF-1R interact with insulin, IGF-I and IGF-II to form a heterotetramer of two entirely extracellular glycosylated a subunits and two (3 subunits which cross the cell membrane and which contain the tyrosine kinase domain.
A third RTK subfamily is referred to as the platelet derived growth factor receptor ("PDGFR") group, which includes PDGFRa, PDGFR(3, CSFIR, c-kit and c-fms. These receptors consist of glycosylated extracellular domains composed of variable numbers of immunoglobin-like loops and an intracellular domain wherein the tyrosine kinase domain is interrupted by unrelated amino acid sequences.
Another group which, because of its similarity to the PDGFR subfamily, is sometimes subsumed in the later group, is the fetus liver kinase ("flk") receptor subfamily. This group is believed to be made of up of kinase insert domain-receptor fetal liver kinase-1 (KDR/FLK-1), flk-IR, flk-4 and fms-like tyrosine kinase 1 (flt-1).
Finally, the fibroblast growth factor ("FGF") family of PTKs contains at least four distinct members: fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 (FGFRl, also called Flg and Cekl), FGFR2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
4 PCT/US98/10174_ (also called Bek, Ksam, KsamI and Cek3), FGFR3 (also called Cek2) and FGFR9. They share a common structure consisting of, in the mature protein, one or more immunoglobulin-like (IgG-like) loops flanked by characteristic cysteines, a hydrophobic transmembrane domain and a intracellular domain containing a catalytic region that is split by a short insert;
See Ullrich and Schlessinger, Ce11,61:203 (1990). Additional diversity in this receptor family is generated by alternative RNA splicing within the extracellular domain (Jaye, et al., Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1135:185, 1992; Johnson and Williams, Adv. Cancer Res. 60:1, 1993).
Fibroblast growth factors and their receptors, the FGFRs, play an important role in angiogenesis, wound healing, embryonic development, and malignant transformation (Basilic and Moscatelli, Adv. Cancer Res. 59:115, 1992). For instance, FGFRs have been implicated in the induction of angiogensis (Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442, 1987; Klagsbrun and D'Amore, Annu. Rev. Physiol. 53:217, 1991), suggesting that inappropriate FGFR activity may contribute to human disorders such as diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration, rheumatoid arthritis, atherosclerosis and tumor neovascularization. In fact, several members of the FGFR family were originally isolated as oncogenes (Delli Bovi, et al., Cell 50:729, 1987) suggesting a close relationship between FGFRs and malignant transformations. FGFRs have been directly associated with a number of cancers including oral and salivary gland cancer (Myoken, et al., Int. J. Cancer 65(5):650, 1996) prostate cancer (Nakahara, et al., Nishinihon J. Urology 58(4):310, 1996; Nakamoto, et al., Cancer Res. 52(3):571, 1992), breast cancer (Penault-Llorca, et al., Int. J. Cancer 61(2):170, 1995;
Adnane, et al., Oncogene 6(4):659, 1991; Wellstein and Lippman, Molecular Foundations of Oncology, Broder, S. ed., pgs 403 -418, 1991), pancreatic cancer (Ohta, et al., Br. J. Cancer 72(4):824, 1995; Yamanaka, et al., Cancer Res. 53:5292, 1993;
Friess, et al., Chiru~ 65(7):604, 1994), ovarian cancer SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
(Crickard, et al., Gynecol. Oncol. 55(2):277, 1994), brain cancer (Yamaguchi, et al., PNAS 91(2):484, 1994; Takahashi, et al., FEBS Letts. 28891):65, 1992), kidney cancer (Nanus, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am. Assoc. Cancer Res. 32:A428, 1991),
See Ullrich and Schlessinger, Ce11,61:203 (1990). Additional diversity in this receptor family is generated by alternative RNA splicing within the extracellular domain (Jaye, et al., Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1135:185, 1992; Johnson and Williams, Adv. Cancer Res. 60:1, 1993).
Fibroblast growth factors and their receptors, the FGFRs, play an important role in angiogenesis, wound healing, embryonic development, and malignant transformation (Basilic and Moscatelli, Adv. Cancer Res. 59:115, 1992). For instance, FGFRs have been implicated in the induction of angiogensis (Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442, 1987; Klagsbrun and D'Amore, Annu. Rev. Physiol. 53:217, 1991), suggesting that inappropriate FGFR activity may contribute to human disorders such as diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration, rheumatoid arthritis, atherosclerosis and tumor neovascularization. In fact, several members of the FGFR family were originally isolated as oncogenes (Delli Bovi, et al., Cell 50:729, 1987) suggesting a close relationship between FGFRs and malignant transformations. FGFRs have been directly associated with a number of cancers including oral and salivary gland cancer (Myoken, et al., Int. J. Cancer 65(5):650, 1996) prostate cancer (Nakahara, et al., Nishinihon J. Urology 58(4):310, 1996; Nakamoto, et al., Cancer Res. 52(3):571, 1992), breast cancer (Penault-Llorca, et al., Int. J. Cancer 61(2):170, 1995;
Adnane, et al., Oncogene 6(4):659, 1991; Wellstein and Lippman, Molecular Foundations of Oncology, Broder, S. ed., pgs 403 -418, 1991), pancreatic cancer (Ohta, et al., Br. J. Cancer 72(4):824, 1995; Yamanaka, et al., Cancer Res. 53:5292, 1993;
Friess, et al., Chiru~ 65(7):604, 1994), ovarian cancer SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
(Crickard, et al., Gynecol. Oncol. 55(2):277, 1994), brain cancer (Yamaguchi, et al., PNAS 91(2):484, 1994; Takahashi, et al., FEBS Letts. 28891):65, 1992), kidney cancer (Nanus, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am. Assoc. Cancer Res. 32:A428, 1991),
5 bladder cancer (Allen and Maher, J Cell. Physiol. 155(2):368, 1993), Kaposi's sarcoma (Jian, et al., Cancer 72(7):2253, 1993), and colon cancer (New and Yoeman, J. Cell. Physiol.
150(2):320, 1992). Moreover several groups have reported an association between abnormal expression of an FGFR with tumor aggression, invasiveness and metastasis.
Mutations in human FGFR genes have been also implicated in a variety of human skeletal disorders. For example, mutations resulting in the constitutive (ligand-independent) activity of FGFR3 play a role in long bone disorders and cause several clinically related forms of dwarfism including achondroplasia, hypochondroplasia and the neonatal-lethal thanatophoric dysplasia (Shiang, et al., Cell 78:3,35, 1994;
Rousseau et al., Nature 371:252, 1994; Bellus et al., Nature Genet. 10:357, 1995; Tavormina, et al., Nature Genet. 9:321, 1995; Webster and Donoghue, EMBO J. 15:520, 1996; Webster, et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 16:4081, 1996; Naski, et al., Nature Genet. 13:233, 1996).
A more complete listing of the known RTK subfamilies is described in Plowman et al., DN&P, 7(6):339-339 (1999) which is incorporated by reference, including any drawings, as if fully set forth herein.
At present, over 24 CTKs in 11 subfamilies (Src, Frk, Btk, Csk, Abl, Zap70, Fes, Fps, Fak, Jak and Ack) have been identified. The Src subfamily appear so far to be the largest group of CTKs and includes Src, Yes, Fyn, Lyn, Lck, Blk, Hck, Fgr and Yrk. For a more detailed discussion of CTKs, see Bolen, Oncogene, 8:2025-2031 (1993), which is incorporated by reference, including any drawings, as if fully set forth - herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
150(2):320, 1992). Moreover several groups have reported an association between abnormal expression of an FGFR with tumor aggression, invasiveness and metastasis.
Mutations in human FGFR genes have been also implicated in a variety of human skeletal disorders. For example, mutations resulting in the constitutive (ligand-independent) activity of FGFR3 play a role in long bone disorders and cause several clinically related forms of dwarfism including achondroplasia, hypochondroplasia and the neonatal-lethal thanatophoric dysplasia (Shiang, et al., Cell 78:3,35, 1994;
Rousseau et al., Nature 371:252, 1994; Bellus et al., Nature Genet. 10:357, 1995; Tavormina, et al., Nature Genet. 9:321, 1995; Webster and Donoghue, EMBO J. 15:520, 1996; Webster, et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 16:4081, 1996; Naski, et al., Nature Genet. 13:233, 1996).
A more complete listing of the known RTK subfamilies is described in Plowman et al., DN&P, 7(6):339-339 (1999) which is incorporated by reference, including any drawings, as if fully set forth herein.
At present, over 24 CTKs in 11 subfamilies (Src, Frk, Btk, Csk, Abl, Zap70, Fes, Fps, Fak, Jak and Ack) have been identified. The Src subfamily appear so far to be the largest group of CTKs and includes Src, Yes, Fyn, Lyn, Lck, Blk, Hck, Fgr and Yrk. For a more detailed discussion of CTKs, see Bolen, Oncogene, 8:2025-2031 (1993), which is incorporated by reference, including any drawings, as if fully set forth - herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
6 Both RTKs and CTKs have been implicated in a host of pathogenic conditions including, significantly, cancer.
Others pathogenic conditions to which RTKs and CTKs have been linked include, without limitation, psoriasis, hepatic cirrhosis, diabetes, atherosclerosis, arterial restenosis, wound scarring, kidney sclerosis and a variety of other renal disorders.
With regard to cancer, two of the major hypotheses advanced to explain the excessive cellular proliferation that drives tumor development relate to functions known to be PTK
regulated. That is, it has been suggested that malignant cell growth results from a breakdown in the mechanisms that control cell division and/or differentiation. It has been shown that the protein products of a number of proto-oncogenes are involved in the signal transduction pathways that regulate cell growth and differentiation. These protein products of proto-oncogenes include the extracellular growth factors, transmembrane growth factor PTK receptors (RTKs) and cytoplasmic PTKs (CTKs), discussed above.
In view of the apparent link between PTK-related cellular activities and a number of virulent human disorders, it is no surprise that a great deal of effort is being directed at finding ways to modulate PTK activity. Some of these have involved biomimetic approaches using large molecules patterned on those involved in the actual cellular processes (e. g., mutant ligands (U.S. App. No. 4,966,849); soluble receptors and antibodies (App. No. WO 94/10202, Kendall and Thomas, Proc.
Nat'1 Acad. Sci., 90:10705-09 (1994), Kim, et al., Nature, 362:841-844 (1993)); RNA ligands (Jelinek, et al., Biochemistry, 33:10450-56); Takano, et al., Mol. Bio. Cell 4:358A (1993); Kinsella, et al., Exp. Cell Res. 199:56-62 (1992); Wright, et al., J. Cellular Phys., 152:948-57) and tyrosine kinase inhibitors (WO 94/03427; WO 92/21660; WO
91/15495; WO 94/14808; U.S. Pat. No. 5,330,992; Mariani, et al., Proc. Am. Assoc. Cancer Res., 35:2268 (1994)).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/101'74 -
Others pathogenic conditions to which RTKs and CTKs have been linked include, without limitation, psoriasis, hepatic cirrhosis, diabetes, atherosclerosis, arterial restenosis, wound scarring, kidney sclerosis and a variety of other renal disorders.
With regard to cancer, two of the major hypotheses advanced to explain the excessive cellular proliferation that drives tumor development relate to functions known to be PTK
regulated. That is, it has been suggested that malignant cell growth results from a breakdown in the mechanisms that control cell division and/or differentiation. It has been shown that the protein products of a number of proto-oncogenes are involved in the signal transduction pathways that regulate cell growth and differentiation. These protein products of proto-oncogenes include the extracellular growth factors, transmembrane growth factor PTK receptors (RTKs) and cytoplasmic PTKs (CTKs), discussed above.
In view of the apparent link between PTK-related cellular activities and a number of virulent human disorders, it is no surprise that a great deal of effort is being directed at finding ways to modulate PTK activity. Some of these have involved biomimetic approaches using large molecules patterned on those involved in the actual cellular processes (e. g., mutant ligands (U.S. App. No. 4,966,849); soluble receptors and antibodies (App. No. WO 94/10202, Kendall and Thomas, Proc.
Nat'1 Acad. Sci., 90:10705-09 (1994), Kim, et al., Nature, 362:841-844 (1993)); RNA ligands (Jelinek, et al., Biochemistry, 33:10450-56); Takano, et al., Mol. Bio. Cell 4:358A (1993); Kinsella, et al., Exp. Cell Res. 199:56-62 (1992); Wright, et al., J. Cellular Phys., 152:948-57) and tyrosine kinase inhibitors (WO 94/03427; WO 92/21660; WO
91/15495; WO 94/14808; U.S. Pat. No. 5,330,992; Mariani, et al., Proc. Am. Assoc. Cancer Res., 35:2268 (1994)).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/101'74 -
7 More recently, attempts have been made to identify small molecules which act as PTK inhibitors. For example, bis-monocylic, bicyclic and heterocyclic aryl compounds (PCT WO
92/20642), vinylene-azaindole derivatives (PCT WO 99/14808) and 1-cyclopropyl-4-pyridylquinolones (U. S. Pat. No. 5,330,992) have been described as tyrosine kinase inhibitors. Styryl compounds (U. S. Pat. No. 5,217,999), styryl-substituted pyridyl compounds (U. S. Pat. No. 5,302,606), quinazoline derivatives (EP App. No. 0 566 266 A1), selenaindoles and selenides (PCT
WO 94/03427), tricyclic polyhydroxylic compounds (PCT WO
92/21660) and benzylphosphonic acid compounds (PCT WO 91/15495) have all been described as compounds which are PTK inhibitors and therefore should be useful in the treatment of cancer.
The broad range of human disorders which appear to implicate PKs has clearly attracted the attention of the pharmaceutical/bio-technical research community; in particular the increasingly apparent nexus of PKs to cancer and the possibility of specific, directed treatments of cancer, perhaps even the prevention of the disease through prophylactic treatment of abnormal PK activity, has generated a great deal of interest. This is not surprising in that cancer continues to be one of the leading causes of death in human beings. The majority of cancers are solid tumor cancers such as ovarian cancer, colon cancer, brain cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and skin cancer. Among the most virulent of the solid tumor cancers are the brain cancers, in particular primary intra-axial brain cancers such as glioblastoma multiforme, astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma, ependymoma, oligodendroglioma, medulloblastoma, meningioma, sarcoma, hemangioblastoma and pineal parenchymal cancer.
The primary modes of treatment of brain cancers, as with all solid tumor cancers, are surgery, radiation therapy and chemotherapy, separately and in combination. Despite advances - in all three approaches, the survival rate of patients diagnosed with primary malignant brain tumors remains SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
92/20642), vinylene-azaindole derivatives (PCT WO 99/14808) and 1-cyclopropyl-4-pyridylquinolones (U. S. Pat. No. 5,330,992) have been described as tyrosine kinase inhibitors. Styryl compounds (U. S. Pat. No. 5,217,999), styryl-substituted pyridyl compounds (U. S. Pat. No. 5,302,606), quinazoline derivatives (EP App. No. 0 566 266 A1), selenaindoles and selenides (PCT
WO 94/03427), tricyclic polyhydroxylic compounds (PCT WO
92/21660) and benzylphosphonic acid compounds (PCT WO 91/15495) have all been described as compounds which are PTK inhibitors and therefore should be useful in the treatment of cancer.
The broad range of human disorders which appear to implicate PKs has clearly attracted the attention of the pharmaceutical/bio-technical research community; in particular the increasingly apparent nexus of PKs to cancer and the possibility of specific, directed treatments of cancer, perhaps even the prevention of the disease through prophylactic treatment of abnormal PK activity, has generated a great deal of interest. This is not surprising in that cancer continues to be one of the leading causes of death in human beings. The majority of cancers are solid tumor cancers such as ovarian cancer, colon cancer, brain cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and skin cancer. Among the most virulent of the solid tumor cancers are the brain cancers, in particular primary intra-axial brain cancers such as glioblastoma multiforme, astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma, ependymoma, oligodendroglioma, medulloblastoma, meningioma, sarcoma, hemangioblastoma and pineal parenchymal cancer.
The primary modes of treatment of brain cancers, as with all solid tumor cancers, are surgery, radiation therapy and chemotherapy, separately and in combination. Despite advances - in all three approaches, the survival rate of patients diagnosed with primary malignant brain tumors remains SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
8 _ depressingly stagnant; i.e., significant changes in long-term survival have not been realized. Charette, J. L., Neuro-ncology, 7(1):135 (1995).
A malignancy within the brain presents particular difficulties not associated with other cancers. That is, the "blood-brain barrier" prevents penetration of many types of molecules into the brain parenchyma. Other complications involve the lack of lymphatic drainage within the brain to effect the removal of cellular wastes and toxins and the fixed space (the cranium) within which the tumor is located, which can give rise to increased intracranial pressure due to the fact that some tumors swell when they are subjected to chemotherapy. Charette, ibid.
At present, the drugs generally regarded as having the best activity against brain tumors are alkylating agents which have been shown to display a directly proportional dose response relationship. The alkylating agents are cytotoxic;
that is, they kill cancer cells, usually by affecting DNA
synthesis or function.
Within the realm of alkylating agents, the nitrosoureas are the agents of choice for treatment of brain tumors due to their ability to cross the blood-brain barrier. N,N'-bis(2-chloroethyl)-N-nitrosourea or BCNU is the most active of the nitrosoureas against malignant gliomas, especially at high dosages. However, BCNU at high dosage; e.g., in excess of 800 mg/mz (cancer drug dosages are generally reported in either mg/kg (milligrams of drug per kilogram body weight) or mg/m2 (milligrams of drug per square meter of body surface area), the latter being the predominant format for most cancer chemotherapeutic applications), even with marrow rescue, results in unacceptably high morbidity and mortality, often associated with pulmonary and/or neurologic toxicities.
Finlay, J. L., Bone Marrow Transplantation, 18 (suppl. 3):S1-S5 (1996). Multi-drug combination therapy at lower dosages, which might ameliorate this situation has been explored by numerous SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _
A malignancy within the brain presents particular difficulties not associated with other cancers. That is, the "blood-brain barrier" prevents penetration of many types of molecules into the brain parenchyma. Other complications involve the lack of lymphatic drainage within the brain to effect the removal of cellular wastes and toxins and the fixed space (the cranium) within which the tumor is located, which can give rise to increased intracranial pressure due to the fact that some tumors swell when they are subjected to chemotherapy. Charette, ibid.
At present, the drugs generally regarded as having the best activity against brain tumors are alkylating agents which have been shown to display a directly proportional dose response relationship. The alkylating agents are cytotoxic;
that is, they kill cancer cells, usually by affecting DNA
synthesis or function.
Within the realm of alkylating agents, the nitrosoureas are the agents of choice for treatment of brain tumors due to their ability to cross the blood-brain barrier. N,N'-bis(2-chloroethyl)-N-nitrosourea or BCNU is the most active of the nitrosoureas against malignant gliomas, especially at high dosages. However, BCNU at high dosage; e.g., in excess of 800 mg/mz (cancer drug dosages are generally reported in either mg/kg (milligrams of drug per kilogram body weight) or mg/m2 (milligrams of drug per square meter of body surface area), the latter being the predominant format for most cancer chemotherapeutic applications), even with marrow rescue, results in unacceptably high morbidity and mortality, often associated with pulmonary and/or neurologic toxicities.
Finlay, J. L., Bone Marrow Transplantation, 18 (suppl. 3):S1-S5 (1996). Multi-drug combination therapy at lower dosages, which might ameliorate this situation has been explored by numerous SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _
9 groups. See, e.g, Kiu, M. C., et al., Neuro-Oncology, 25(3):215-20 (1995); Aas, A. T., et al., British Journal of Neurosurgery, 8(2):187-92 (1994); Plowman, J., et al., Cancer Research, 54(14):3793-9 (1994); Wedge, S. R., et al., British Journal of Cancer, 73(9):1049-52 (1996); Kurpad, S. N., et al., Cancer Chemotherapy and Pharmacology, 39(4):307-16 (1997); and Hochberg, F., et al., Neuro-Oncology, 32(1):45-55 (1997).
However, these studies have focused on combinations of cytotoxic drugs and no such combination has yet proven entirely satisfactory. Nevertheless, chemotherapy remains one of the foundations of cancer treatment and the search for new and better drugs and combinations thereof continues unabated.
Summary of the Invention Our own efforts to identify small organic molecules which modulate PTK activity and which, therefore, should be useful in the treatment and/or prevention of disorders driven by abnormal PTK activity, has led us to the discovery, which comprises one aspect of this invention, that the compound N-(4 trifluoromethylanilino)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide, a heteroarylcarboxamide described initially by Hirth, et al., WO
95/19169, published July 20, 1995 and Bartlett, et al., WO
91/17748, published November 28, 1991, both of which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, and known commonly as leflunomide, HWA 486 or A10 (and which shall be referred to herein as MCTA), is an effective modulator of select PK, notably the RTKs PDGFR and FGFR, activity. This, in turn, led us to a family of novel heteroarylcarboxamide compounds which likewise modulate PK activity and which comprise another aspect of this invention.
We have further discovered a surprisingly effective ~ chemotherapeutic combination of MCTA with known chemotherapeutic agents, primarily the nitrosoureas such as - BCNU, in the treatment of solid tumor cancers, especially the extremely virulent brain cancer, glioblastoma.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Thus, in one aspect, the present invention relates to a method for the treatment of diseases related to inappropriate FGFR activity by administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of the 5 heteroarylcarboxamide, N-(4-trifluoromethylanilino)-5-methylisoxazole-9-carboxamide ("MCTA") in a pharmacological composition. In particular, the FGFR-related disease is cancer.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to novel
However, these studies have focused on combinations of cytotoxic drugs and no such combination has yet proven entirely satisfactory. Nevertheless, chemotherapy remains one of the foundations of cancer treatment and the search for new and better drugs and combinations thereof continues unabated.
Summary of the Invention Our own efforts to identify small organic molecules which modulate PTK activity and which, therefore, should be useful in the treatment and/or prevention of disorders driven by abnormal PTK activity, has led us to the discovery, which comprises one aspect of this invention, that the compound N-(4 trifluoromethylanilino)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide, a heteroarylcarboxamide described initially by Hirth, et al., WO
95/19169, published July 20, 1995 and Bartlett, et al., WO
91/17748, published November 28, 1991, both of which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, and known commonly as leflunomide, HWA 486 or A10 (and which shall be referred to herein as MCTA), is an effective modulator of select PK, notably the RTKs PDGFR and FGFR, activity. This, in turn, led us to a family of novel heteroarylcarboxamide compounds which likewise modulate PK activity and which comprise another aspect of this invention.
We have further discovered a surprisingly effective ~ chemotherapeutic combination of MCTA with known chemotherapeutic agents, primarily the nitrosoureas such as - BCNU, in the treatment of solid tumor cancers, especially the extremely virulent brain cancer, glioblastoma.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Thus, in one aspect, the present invention relates to a method for the treatment of diseases related to inappropriate FGFR activity by administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of the 5 heteroarylcarboxamide, N-(4-trifluoromethylanilino)-5-methylisoxazole-9-carboxamide ("MCTA") in a pharmacological composition. In particular, the FGFR-related disease is cancer.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to novel
10 heteroarylcarboxamides which modulate the activity of PKs, in particular RTKs, especially PDGFR and FGFR. In addition, the present invention relates to the preparation and use of pharmacological compositions of the disclosed compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts in the treatment and prevention of PTK driven disorders such as, significantly, cancer.
Finally, the present invention relates to the treatment of solid tumor cancers, especially glioblastomas, using combinations of MCTA with known chemotherapeutic agents such as the nitrosoureas, exemplified herein by BCNU.
As used herein, a "heteroarylcarboxamide" refers to a compound having the general structure shown in Formula 3.
A "pharmacological composition" refers to a mixture of one or more of the compounds described herein, or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof, with other chemical components, such as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients. The purpose of a pharmacological composition is to facilitate administration of a compound to an organism.
As used herein, "physiologically acceptable carrier" or "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" are used interchangeably to refer to a carrier or diluent that does not cause significant irritation to an organism and does not abrogate the biological activity and properties of the administered compound.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/IJS98/10174.
Finally, the present invention relates to the treatment of solid tumor cancers, especially glioblastomas, using combinations of MCTA with known chemotherapeutic agents such as the nitrosoureas, exemplified herein by BCNU.
As used herein, a "heteroarylcarboxamide" refers to a compound having the general structure shown in Formula 3.
A "pharmacological composition" refers to a mixture of one or more of the compounds described herein, or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof, with other chemical components, such as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients. The purpose of a pharmacological composition is to facilitate administration of a compound to an organism.
As used herein, "physiologically acceptable carrier" or "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" are used interchangeably to refer to a carrier or diluent that does not cause significant irritation to an organism and does not abrogate the biological activity and properties of the administered compound.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/IJS98/10174.
11 An "excipient" refers to an inert substance added to a pharmacological composition to further facilitate administration of a compound. Examples, without limitation, of excipients include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars and types of starch, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, vegetable oils and polyethylene glycols.
Detailed Description of the Invention The Compounds 4-(N-(9'-trifluoromethylphenyl)carboxamido)-5-methyl-isoxazole ("MCTA,"Formula 1), to which the compounds of the present invention are structurally related, is a compound currently in clinical testing, based on its ability to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation, both as an immunosuppressive and a cancer drug. MCTA is believed to be metabolized in serum such that the isoxazole ring is converted to an open form called in the literature A771726 and having the chemical structure shown in Formula 2.
H N
N
N
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
Detailed Description of the Invention The Compounds 4-(N-(9'-trifluoromethylphenyl)carboxamido)-5-methyl-isoxazole ("MCTA,"Formula 1), to which the compounds of the present invention are structurally related, is a compound currently in clinical testing, based on its ability to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation, both as an immunosuppressive and a cancer drug. MCTA is believed to be metabolized in serum such that the isoxazole ring is converted to an open form called in the literature A771726 and having the chemical structure shown in Formula 2.
H N
N
N
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
12 Several early reports suggested that MCTA was capable of inhibiting tyrosine kinase signaling (Bartlett, et al., Agents and Actions,32:10 (1991), Mattar, et al., FEBS Lett., 334:161 (1993), Xu, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 270:12398 (1995)). More recently Cherwinski, et al. reported that MCTA has no effect on tyrosine kinase signaling but inhibits proliferation by inhibiting DNA replication and entry of cells into the M-phase of the cell cycle (J. Pharma. and Exp. Thera., 272:460 (1995)).
Subsequent reports have suggested that the activity of MCTA is solely due to the ability of A77I726 to inhibit pyrimidine biosynthesis by inhibiting a key enzyme in that process, dihydroorotate dehydrogenase (DHOD) (Nair, et al., Imm. Lett., 47:171 (1995), Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharma., 50:861 (1995), Cherwinski, et al., Inflamm. Res., 44:317 (1995), Davis et al., Biochem., 35:1270 (1996)). Thus it has been widely accepted in the art that MCTA acts only as a prodrug; i.e., a compound which is inactive in and of itself but is biochemically converted to an active specie in vivo.
Contrary to the preceding accepted theory that MCTA is but a prodrug, we have found that, when MCTA is administered in such a manner that biochemical conversion to A771726 is either eliminated or at least drastically curtailed, MCTA
itself is an extremely effective modulator of PDGFR and FGFR
activity and is an effective chemotherapeutic agent, especially against solid tumor cancers, both alone and in combination with known chemotherapeutic agents such as BCNU. In addition, the novel analogs of MCTA which are described herein demonstrate activity which is similar to that of unmetabolized MCTA and, like unmetabolized MCTA, is different from that of A771726.
That is, the ability of A771726 to inhibit pyrimidine biosynthesis is overcome by the addition of uridine which is characteristic of pyrimide biosynthesis inhibitors. On the other hand, the compounds of the present invention, while structurally similar to MCTA, are capable of inhibiting cellular growth by a mechanism not affected by the addition of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rute 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Subsequent reports have suggested that the activity of MCTA is solely due to the ability of A77I726 to inhibit pyrimidine biosynthesis by inhibiting a key enzyme in that process, dihydroorotate dehydrogenase (DHOD) (Nair, et al., Imm. Lett., 47:171 (1995), Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharma., 50:861 (1995), Cherwinski, et al., Inflamm. Res., 44:317 (1995), Davis et al., Biochem., 35:1270 (1996)). Thus it has been widely accepted in the art that MCTA acts only as a prodrug; i.e., a compound which is inactive in and of itself but is biochemically converted to an active specie in vivo.
Contrary to the preceding accepted theory that MCTA is but a prodrug, we have found that, when MCTA is administered in such a manner that biochemical conversion to A771726 is either eliminated or at least drastically curtailed, MCTA
itself is an extremely effective modulator of PDGFR and FGFR
activity and is an effective chemotherapeutic agent, especially against solid tumor cancers, both alone and in combination with known chemotherapeutic agents such as BCNU. In addition, the novel analogs of MCTA which are described herein demonstrate activity which is similar to that of unmetabolized MCTA and, like unmetabolized MCTA, is different from that of A771726.
That is, the ability of A771726 to inhibit pyrimidine biosynthesis is overcome by the addition of uridine which is characteristic of pyrimide biosynthesis inhibitors. On the other hand, the compounds of the present invention, while structurally similar to MCTA, are capable of inhibiting cellular growth by a mechanism not affected by the addition of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rute 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
13 uridine. While not being bound to any particular theory, applicants believe that is due either to the fact that the heteroaryl group of the claimed compounds do not metabolize to an open form at all and therefore exhibit their activity in their native configuation, or, if they do metabolize to an open form, the chemical composition of the open form to which they are converted is either inactive or active, but not as an inhibitor of pyrimidine biosynthesis (as evinced by the fact that uridine addition has no effect).
Thus, it appears that, while chemically similar to MCTA, the compounds of the present invention comprise a new family of compounds capable of modulating protein tyrosine kinase activity. While, again, not being bound to a particular theory, it appears that the compounds of this invention affect cell proliferation by modulating PTK signaling. The signaling related to the PTKs, FGFR and PDGFR, appear to be particularly susceptible to modulation by the compounds of the present invention.
As used herein, the terms "modulate", "modulation" or "modulating" refer to the alteration of the catalytic activity of PTKs. In particular, modulating refers to the activation of the catalytic activity of PTKs, more preferably the activation or inhibition of the catalytic activity of PTKs, depending on the concentration of the compound administered or, more preferably still, the inhibition of the catalytic activity of PTKs. Modulation may be effected by direct interaction with a PTK or through intervention at some other point in the biochemical process controlled by the particular PTK, the observable result of which appears as a modulation of PTK
catalytic activity.
The term "catalytic activity" as used herein refers to the rate of phosphorylation of tyrosine under the influence, direct or indirect of PTKs.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Thus, it appears that, while chemically similar to MCTA, the compounds of the present invention comprise a new family of compounds capable of modulating protein tyrosine kinase activity. While, again, not being bound to a particular theory, it appears that the compounds of this invention affect cell proliferation by modulating PTK signaling. The signaling related to the PTKs, FGFR and PDGFR, appear to be particularly susceptible to modulation by the compounds of the present invention.
As used herein, the terms "modulate", "modulation" or "modulating" refer to the alteration of the catalytic activity of PTKs. In particular, modulating refers to the activation of the catalytic activity of PTKs, more preferably the activation or inhibition of the catalytic activity of PTKs, depending on the concentration of the compound administered or, more preferably still, the inhibition of the catalytic activity of PTKs. Modulation may be effected by direct interaction with a PTK or through intervention at some other point in the biochemical process controlled by the particular PTK, the observable result of which appears as a modulation of PTK
catalytic activity.
The term "catalytic activity" as used herein refers to the rate of phosphorylation of tyrosine under the influence, direct or indirect of PTKs.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
14 A. General Structural Features Thus, in one aspect, the present invention relates to heteroarylcarboxamide compounds having the chemical structure shown in Formula 3:
Rz B
R ~E/
RW F
a A is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
B is selected from the group consisting of nitrogen and sulfur and it is understood that when B is sulfur and A is nitrogen, the nitrogen is participating in both a single bond and a double bond within the ring so that it cannot be bonded to any atom outside the ring; that is, when B is sulfur, Rz cannot exist.
D, E, F, G, and J are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon and nitrogen such that the six member monocylic heteroaryl ring formed is one known in the chemical arts and, furthermore, when D, E, F, G or J is nitrogen, RS, R6, R', Re or R9, respectively, does not exist.
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic.
RZ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, carbonyl, C-carboxy, S-sulfonamide, sulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, trihalomethanesulfonyl, halo, guanyl, C-amide and C-thioamido.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) W098/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic.
Z is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and 5 sulfur.
Rq is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy and C-carboxy.
10 R5, R6, R', Ra and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicycloxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkyoxy, thiocycloalkoxy,
Rz B
R ~E/
RW F
a A is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
B is selected from the group consisting of nitrogen and sulfur and it is understood that when B is sulfur and A is nitrogen, the nitrogen is participating in both a single bond and a double bond within the ring so that it cannot be bonded to any atom outside the ring; that is, when B is sulfur, Rz cannot exist.
D, E, F, G, and J are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon and nitrogen such that the six member monocylic heteroaryl ring formed is one known in the chemical arts and, furthermore, when D, E, F, G or J is nitrogen, RS, R6, R', Re or R9, respectively, does not exist.
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic.
RZ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, carbonyl, C-carboxy, S-sulfonamide, sulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, trihalomethanesulfonyl, halo, guanyl, C-amide and C-thioamido.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) W098/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic.
Z is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and 5 sulfur.
Rq is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy and C-carboxy.
10 R5, R6, R', Ra and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicycloxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkyoxy, thiocycloalkoxy,
15 thioheteraryloxy, thioheteralicycloxy, halo, nitro, cyano, 0 carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, silyl, phosphonyl, C-carboxy, 0-carboxy, N-amido, C-amido, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, S-sulfonamido, N-sulfonamido, trihalomethane sulfonyl, guanyl, guanidino, trihalomethanesulfonamido, amino and -NR13R1q .
R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C
carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl and, combined, a five- or six-member heteroalicyclic ring containing at least one nitrogen.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon including straight chain and branched chain groups. Preferably, the alkyl group has 1 to 20 carbon atoms (whenever a numerical range; e.g. "1-20", is stated herein, it means that the group, in this case the alkyl group, may contain 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc.
- up to and including 20 carbon atoms). More preferably, it is a medium size alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Most preferably, it is a lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98I10174.
R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C
carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl and, combined, a five- or six-member heteroalicyclic ring containing at least one nitrogen.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon including straight chain and branched chain groups. Preferably, the alkyl group has 1 to 20 carbon atoms (whenever a numerical range; e.g. "1-20", is stated herein, it means that the group, in this case the alkyl group, may contain 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc.
- up to and including 20 carbon atoms). More preferably, it is a medium size alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Most preferably, it is a lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98I10174.
16 substituted, the substituent groups) is preferably one or more individually selected from trihaloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroalicyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, 0-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitro, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidino, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NRl3Ria.
Rl3 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C-carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethysulfonyl and, combined, a five-or six-member heteroalicyclic ring.
A "cycloalkyl" group refers to an all-carbon monocyclic or fused ring (i.e., rings which share an adjacent pair of carbon atoms) group wherein one of more of the rings does not have a completely conjugated pi-electron system. Examples, without limitation, of cycloalkyl groups are cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclopentene, cyclohexane, cyclohexadiene, cycloheptane and, cycloheptatriene. A
cycloalkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituent groups) is preferably one or more individually selected from alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroalicyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitro, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidino, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13Ri4 with R13 and R1q as defined above.
An "alkenyl" group refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
Rl3 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C-carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethysulfonyl and, combined, a five-or six-member heteroalicyclic ring.
A "cycloalkyl" group refers to an all-carbon monocyclic or fused ring (i.e., rings which share an adjacent pair of carbon atoms) group wherein one of more of the rings does not have a completely conjugated pi-electron system. Examples, without limitation, of cycloalkyl groups are cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclopentene, cyclohexane, cyclohexadiene, cycloheptane and, cycloheptatriene. A
cycloalkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituent groups) is preferably one or more individually selected from alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroalicyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitro, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidino, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13Ri4 with R13 and R1q as defined above.
An "alkenyl" group refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
17 An "alkynyl" group refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, consisting of at least two carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
An "aryl" group refers to an all-carbon monocyclic or fused-ring polycyclic (i.e., rings which share adjacent pairs of carbon atoms) groups having a completely conjugated pi electron system. Examples, without limitation, of aryl groups are phenyl, naphthalenyl and anthracenyl. The aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroali-cyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitro, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidino, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13R14 with R13 and R19 as defined above.
As used herein, a "heteroaryl" group refers to a monocyclic or fused ring (i.e., rings which share an adjacent pair of atoms) group having in the rings) one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and, in addition, having a completely conjugated pi-electron system. Examples, without limitation, of heteroaryl groups are pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrimidine, quinoline, isoquinoline, purine and carbazole. The heteroaryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, - alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroali cyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N
carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
An "aryl" group refers to an all-carbon monocyclic or fused-ring polycyclic (i.e., rings which share adjacent pairs of carbon atoms) groups having a completely conjugated pi electron system. Examples, without limitation, of aryl groups are phenyl, naphthalenyl and anthracenyl. The aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroali-cyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitro, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidino, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13R14 with R13 and R19 as defined above.
As used herein, a "heteroaryl" group refers to a monocyclic or fused ring (i.e., rings which share an adjacent pair of atoms) group having in the rings) one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and, in addition, having a completely conjugated pi-electron system. Examples, without limitation, of heteroaryl groups are pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrimidine, quinoline, isoquinoline, purine and carbazole. The heteroaryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, - alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroali cyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N
carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amido, N-amido, C
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
18 carboxy, O-carboxy, nitre, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamide, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidine, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NRl3Ria with R13 and R19 as defined above.
A "heteroalicyclic" group refers to a monocyclic or fused ring group having in the -rings) one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The rings may also have one or more double bonds. However, the rings do not have a completely conjugated pi-electron system.
The heteroalicyclic ring may be substituted or unsubstituted.
When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroalicyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amide, N-amide, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitre, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamide, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidine, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13R1q with R13 and R1q as defined above.
A "hydroxy" group refers to an -OH group.
An "alkoxy" group refers to both an -O-alkyl and an -0-cycloalkyl group, as defined herein.
An "aryloxy" group refers to both an -O-aryl and an -O-- 25 heteroaryl group, as defined herein.
A "heteroaryloxy" group refers to a heteroaryl-O- group with heteroaryl as defined herein.
A "heteroalicycloxy" group refers to a heteroalicyclic-O-group with heteroalicyclic as defined herein.
A "thiohydroxy" group refers to an -SH group.
A "thioalkoxy" group refers to both an S-alkyl and an -S-cycloalkyl group, as defined herein.
A "thioaryloxy" group refers to both an -S-aryl and an -S-heteroaryl group, as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
A "heteroalicyclic" group refers to a monocyclic or fused ring group having in the -rings) one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The rings may also have one or more double bonds. However, the rings do not have a completely conjugated pi-electron system.
The heteroalicyclic ring may be substituted or unsubstituted.
When substituted, the substituted groups) is preferably one or more selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicylcoxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheteroalicyloxy, cyano, halo, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, C-amide, N-amide, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, nitre, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamide, trihalomethanesulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, silyl, guanyl, guanidine, ureido, phosphonyl, amino and NR13R1q with R13 and R1q as defined above.
A "hydroxy" group refers to an -OH group.
An "alkoxy" group refers to both an -O-alkyl and an -0-cycloalkyl group, as defined herein.
An "aryloxy" group refers to both an -O-aryl and an -O-- 25 heteroaryl group, as defined herein.
A "heteroaryloxy" group refers to a heteroaryl-O- group with heteroaryl as defined herein.
A "heteroalicycloxy" group refers to a heteroalicyclic-O-group with heteroalicyclic as defined herein.
A "thiohydroxy" group refers to an -SH group.
A "thioalkoxy" group refers to both an S-alkyl and an -S-cycloalkyl group, as defined herein.
A "thioaryloxy" group refers to both an -S-aryl and an -S-heteroaryl group, as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
19 A "thioheteroaryloxy" group refers to a heteroaryl-S-group with heteroaryl as defined herein.
A "thioheteroalicycloxy" group refers to a heteroalicyclic-S- group with heteroalicyclic as defined herein.
A "carbonyl" group refers to a -C(=O)-R" group, where R"
is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon), as each is defined herein.
An "aldehyde" group refers to a carbonyl group where R"
is hydrogen.
A "thiocarbonyl" group refers to a -C(=S)-R" group, with R" as defined herein.
A "trihalomethanecarbonyl" group refers to a X3CC(=O)-group with X as defined herein.
A "C-carboxy" group refers to a -C(=O)O-R" groups, with R" as defined herein.
An "O-carboxy" group refers to a R"C(=0)O- group, with R"
as defined herein.
A "carboxylic acid" group refers to a C-carboxyl group in which R" is hydrogen.
A "halo" group refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
A "trihalomethyl" group refers to a -CX3 group wherein X
is a halo group as defined herein.
A "trihalomethanesulfonyl" group refers to a X3CS(=O)2-groups with X as defined above.
A "trihalomethanesulfonamido" group refers to a X3CS (=O) ZNR13- group with X and R13 as defined herein.
A "cyano" group refers to a -C=N group.
A "sulfinyl" group refers to a -S(=0)-R" group, with R"
as defined herein.
A "sulfonyl" group refers to a -S(=O)2R" group, with R" as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) An "S-sulfonamido" group refers to a -S (=O) ZNR13R14, with R13 and R1' as defined herein.
An "N-Sulfonamido" group refers to a R13S(=O)2NR14- group, with R13 and R1q as defined herein.
5 An "0-carbamyl" group refers to a -OC(=O)NRl3Ria group with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "N-carbamyl" group refers to a R130C (=0) NRlq group, with R13 and R19 as defined herein.
An "O-thiocarbamyl" group refers to a -OC(=S)NR13R14 group 10 with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "N-thiocarbamyl" group refers to a R130C (=S) NRl9- group, with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "amino" group refers to an -NRl3Ria group in which both R13 and R19 are hydrogen .
15 A "C-amido" group refers to a -C (=O) NRl3Ria group with Rls and R19 as defined herein.
An "N-amido" group refers to a R13C (=O) NR19- group, with R13 and R1' as defined herein.
A "C-thioamido" group refers to a -C(=S)NR13R19 group with
A "thioheteroalicycloxy" group refers to a heteroalicyclic-S- group with heteroalicyclic as defined herein.
A "carbonyl" group refers to a -C(=O)-R" group, where R"
is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl (bonded through a ring carbon) and heteroalicyclic (bonded through a ring carbon), as each is defined herein.
An "aldehyde" group refers to a carbonyl group where R"
is hydrogen.
A "thiocarbonyl" group refers to a -C(=S)-R" group, with R" as defined herein.
A "trihalomethanecarbonyl" group refers to a X3CC(=O)-group with X as defined herein.
A "C-carboxy" group refers to a -C(=O)O-R" groups, with R" as defined herein.
An "O-carboxy" group refers to a R"C(=0)O- group, with R"
as defined herein.
A "carboxylic acid" group refers to a C-carboxyl group in which R" is hydrogen.
A "halo" group refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
A "trihalomethyl" group refers to a -CX3 group wherein X
is a halo group as defined herein.
A "trihalomethanesulfonyl" group refers to a X3CS(=O)2-groups with X as defined above.
A "trihalomethanesulfonamido" group refers to a X3CS (=O) ZNR13- group with X and R13 as defined herein.
A "cyano" group refers to a -C=N group.
A "sulfinyl" group refers to a -S(=0)-R" group, with R"
as defined herein.
A "sulfonyl" group refers to a -S(=O)2R" group, with R" as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) An "S-sulfonamido" group refers to a -S (=O) ZNR13R14, with R13 and R1' as defined herein.
An "N-Sulfonamido" group refers to a R13S(=O)2NR14- group, with R13 and R1q as defined herein.
5 An "0-carbamyl" group refers to a -OC(=O)NRl3Ria group with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "N-carbamyl" group refers to a R130C (=0) NRlq group, with R13 and R19 as defined herein.
An "O-thiocarbamyl" group refers to a -OC(=S)NR13R14 group 10 with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "N-thiocarbamyl" group refers to a R130C (=S) NRl9- group, with R13 and R14 as defined herein.
An "amino" group refers to an -NRl3Ria group in which both R13 and R19 are hydrogen .
15 A "C-amido" group refers to a -C (=O) NRl3Ria group with Rls and R19 as defined herein.
An "N-amido" group refers to a R13C (=O) NR19- group, with R13 and R1' as defined herein.
A "C-thioamido" group refers to a -C(=S)NR13R19 group with
20 R13 and R19 and defined herein.
A "ureidyl" group refers to a -NR12C(=0)NR13R19 group, with R13 and R14 as defined herein and R12 defined the same as R13 and R14 .
A "guanidinyl" group refers to a -R12NC (=N) NR13R1q group, with R12, Ri3 and R19 as defined herein.
A "guanyl" group refers to a R13R19NC (=N) - group, with Rls and R14 as defined herein.
A "nitro" group refers to a -NOZ group.
A "silyl" group refers to a -Si(R")3, with R" as defined herein.
A "methylenedioxy" group refers to a -OCH20- group where the two oxygens are covalently bonded to two adjacent carbon atoms of an aryl or heteroaryl ring with aryl and heteroaryl as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _
A "ureidyl" group refers to a -NR12C(=0)NR13R19 group, with R13 and R14 as defined herein and R12 defined the same as R13 and R14 .
A "guanidinyl" group refers to a -R12NC (=N) NR13R1q group, with R12, Ri3 and R19 as defined herein.
A "guanyl" group refers to a R13R19NC (=N) - group, with Rls and R14 as defined herein.
A "nitro" group refers to a -NOZ group.
A "silyl" group refers to a -Si(R")3, with R" as defined herein.
A "methylenedioxy" group refers to a -OCH20- group where the two oxygens are covalently bonded to two adjacent carbon atoms of an aryl or heteroaryl ring with aryl and heteroaryl as defined herein.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _
21 A "1,3-dioxano" group refers to a -CHZOCH20- group where the -CHZ and the oxygen are covalently bonded to two adjacent carbon atoms of an aryl or heteroaryl ring with aryl and heteroaryl as defined herein.
Examples of six-member monocyclic heteroaryl rings known in the chemical arts include, but are not limited to the ,. following:
~" ~,~~JC"~~~J
B. Preferred Structural Features.
Preferred structural features for the claimed compounds are those in which:
A is oxygen and B is nitrogen;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl; and, R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; and, R9 is hydrogen.
Further preferred structures for the claimed compounds are those in which:
A and B are nitrogen;
RZ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and cycloalkyl;
Z is oxygen;
R5, Re and Rg are hydrogen;
R6 is selected from the group consisting or hydrogen and alkyl; and, R' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl.
Other preferred embodiments of the present invention are those in which:
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
Examples of six-member monocyclic heteroaryl rings known in the chemical arts include, but are not limited to the ,. following:
~" ~,~~JC"~~~J
B. Preferred Structural Features.
Preferred structural features for the claimed compounds are those in which:
A is oxygen and B is nitrogen;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl; and, R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; and, R9 is hydrogen.
Further preferred structures for the claimed compounds are those in which:
A and B are nitrogen;
RZ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and cycloalkyl;
Z is oxygen;
R5, Re and Rg are hydrogen;
R6 is selected from the group consisting or hydrogen and alkyl; and, R' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl.
Other preferred embodiments of the present invention are those in which:
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
22 R6 and R7, combined, form a methylenedioxy or a 1,3-dioxano group.
And, finally, a preferred structure for the claimed compounds is that in which J is nitrogen.
The Biochemistry A. Modulation of Protein Kinase Catalytic Activity Generally In another aspect, this invention relates to a method for the treatment or prevention of a disorder characterized by inappropriate PK activity comprising administering to a patient afflicted with such a disorder a therapeutically effective amount of one or more of the disclosed compounds, or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof, alone or in a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
The term "method" refers to manners, means, techniques and procedures for accomplishing a given task including, but not limited to, those manners, means, techniques and procedures either known to, or readily developed from known manners, means, techniques and procedures by, practitioners of the chemical, pharmacological, biological, biochemical and medical arts.
As used herein, the terms "prevent", "preventing" and "prevention" refer to a method for barring an organism from acquiring a PTK mediated cellular disorder in the first place.
As used herein, the terms "treat", "treating" and "treatment" refer to a method of alleviating or abrogating a PTK mediated cellular disorder and/or its attendant symptoms.
With regard particularly to cancer, these terms simply mean that the life expectancy or an individual afflicted with a cancer will be increased or that one or more of the symptoms of the disease will be reduced.
A "disorder characterized by inappropriate PTK activity"
includes, but is not limited to, cell proliferative disorders, cell differentiation disorders, cell growth disorders and SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
And, finally, a preferred structure for the claimed compounds is that in which J is nitrogen.
The Biochemistry A. Modulation of Protein Kinase Catalytic Activity Generally In another aspect, this invention relates to a method for the treatment or prevention of a disorder characterized by inappropriate PK activity comprising administering to a patient afflicted with such a disorder a therapeutically effective amount of one or more of the disclosed compounds, or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof, alone or in a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
The term "method" refers to manners, means, techniques and procedures for accomplishing a given task including, but not limited to, those manners, means, techniques and procedures either known to, or readily developed from known manners, means, techniques and procedures by, practitioners of the chemical, pharmacological, biological, biochemical and medical arts.
As used herein, the terms "prevent", "preventing" and "prevention" refer to a method for barring an organism from acquiring a PTK mediated cellular disorder in the first place.
As used herein, the terms "treat", "treating" and "treatment" refer to a method of alleviating or abrogating a PTK mediated cellular disorder and/or its attendant symptoms.
With regard particularly to cancer, these terms simply mean that the life expectancy or an individual afflicted with a cancer will be increased or that one or more of the symptoms of the disease will be reduced.
A "disorder characterized by inappropriate PTK activity"
includes, but is not limited to, cell proliferative disorders, cell differentiation disorders, cell growth disorders and SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
23 metastatic disorders. Such disorders include, but are not limited to, cancer, as described below and, in addition, the development of neoplasia such as carcinoma, sarcoma, glioblastoma and hemangioma, leukemia, psoriasis, arteriosclerosis, arthritis and diabetic retinopathy (or other disorders related to uncontrolled angiogenesis and/or vasculogenesis), fibrotic disorders and metabolic disorders.
As used herein, the term "cancer" refers to various types of malignant neoplasms, most of which can invade surrounding tissues, and may metastasize to different sites, as defined by Stedman's Medical Dictionary 25th edition (Hensyl ed. 1990).
Examples of cancers which may be treated by the present invention include, but are not limited to, brain, ovarian, colon, prostate, kidney, bladder, breast, lung, oral and skin cancers which exhibit inappropriate PTK activity. These types of cancers can be further characterized. For example, brain cancers include glioblastoma multiforme, anaplastic astrocytoma, astrocytoma, ependymoma, oligodendroglioma, medulloblastoma, meningioma, sarcoma, hemangioblastoma, and pineal parenchymal. Skin cancers include melanoma and Kaposi's sarcoma.
Unwanted cell proliferation can result from inappropriate PTK activity occurring in different types of cells including cancer cells, cells surrounding a cancer cell (stromal cells), 2~ endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells. For example, and without limitation, an increase in FGFR and/or PDGFR activity of endothelial cells surrounding cancer cells may lead to an increased vascularization (angiogenesis) of the tumor, thereby facilitating growth of the cancer cells. Inappropriate PTK
activity may also contribute to the proliferation of cancer cells by direct mitogenic stimulation.
"Cell proliferative disorders" refer to disorders wherein unwanted cell proliferation of one or more subset of cells in I
a multicellular organism occurs resulting in harm (e. g., discomfort or decreased life expectancy) to the multicellular SUBSTITUTE SHEET { rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/IOi74
As used herein, the term "cancer" refers to various types of malignant neoplasms, most of which can invade surrounding tissues, and may metastasize to different sites, as defined by Stedman's Medical Dictionary 25th edition (Hensyl ed. 1990).
Examples of cancers which may be treated by the present invention include, but are not limited to, brain, ovarian, colon, prostate, kidney, bladder, breast, lung, oral and skin cancers which exhibit inappropriate PTK activity. These types of cancers can be further characterized. For example, brain cancers include glioblastoma multiforme, anaplastic astrocytoma, astrocytoma, ependymoma, oligodendroglioma, medulloblastoma, meningioma, sarcoma, hemangioblastoma, and pineal parenchymal. Skin cancers include melanoma and Kaposi's sarcoma.
Unwanted cell proliferation can result from inappropriate PTK activity occurring in different types of cells including cancer cells, cells surrounding a cancer cell (stromal cells), 2~ endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells. For example, and without limitation, an increase in FGFR and/or PDGFR activity of endothelial cells surrounding cancer cells may lead to an increased vascularization (angiogenesis) of the tumor, thereby facilitating growth of the cancer cells. Inappropriate PTK
activity may also contribute to the proliferation of cancer cells by direct mitogenic stimulation.
"Cell proliferative disorders" refer to disorders wherein unwanted cell proliferation of one or more subset of cells in I
a multicellular organism occurs resulting in harm (e. g., discomfort or decreased life expectancy) to the multicellular SUBSTITUTE SHEET { rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/IOi74
24 organism. Cell proliferative disorders can occur in different types of animals and in humans. Cell proliferative disorders include cancers, skeletal disorders, angiogenic or blood vessel proliferative disorders, fibrotic disorders and mesangial cell proliferative disorders.
Blood vessel proliferative disorders refer to angiogenic and vasculogenic disorders generally resulting in abnormal proliferation of blood vessels. The formation and spreading of blood vessels, or vasculogenesis and angiogenesis, respectively, play important roles in a variety of physiological processes such as embryonic development, corpus luteum formation, wound healing and organ regeneration.
However, they also play a pivotal role in cancer development.
Other examples of blood vessel proliferation disorders include arthritis, where new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and destroy cartilage, and ocular diseases, like diabetic retinopathy, where new capillaries in the retina invade the vitreous, bleed and cause blindness. Conversely, disorders related to the shrinkage, contraction or closing of blood vessels, such as restenosis, are also implicated.
Fibrotic disorders refer to the abnormal formation of extracellular matrices. Examples of fibrotic disorders include hepatic cirrhosis and mesangial cell proliferative disorders.
Hepatic cirrhosis is characterized by the increase in extracellular matrix constituents resulting in the formation of a hepatic scar. An increased extracellular matrix resulting in a hepatic scar can also be caused by viral infection such as hepatitis. Lipocytes appear to play a major role in hepatic cirrhosis. Other fibrotic disorders implicated include atherosclerosis.
Mesangial cell proliferative disorders refer to disorders brought about by abnormal proliferation of mesangial cells.
Mesangial proliferative disorders include various human renal diseases, such as glomerulonephritis, diabetic nephropathy and malignant nephrosclerosis as well as disorders such as SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ thrombotic microangiopathy syndromes, transplant rejection, and glomerulopathies. PDGF-R has been implicated in the maintenance of mesangial cell proliferation. Floege et al., 1993, Kidney International 43:475-545.
5 Other examples of cell proliferative disorders are disclosed in the following references which are incorporated as if fully set forth herein. The EGFR (Tuzi et al., 1991, Br.
J. Cancer 63:227-233; Torp et al., 1992, APMIS 100:714-719) HER2/neu (Slamon et al., 1989, Science 244:707-712) and the 10 PDGF-R (Kumabe et al., 1992, Oncogene, 7:627-633) are over-expressed in many tumors and/or persistently activated by autocrine loops. In fact, in the most common and severe cancers these receptor over-expressions (Akbasak and Suner-Akbasak et al., 1992, J. Neurol. Sci., 111:119-143; Dickson 15 et al., 1992, Cancer Treatment Res. 61:249-273; Korc et al., 1992, J. Clin. Invest. 90:1452-1460) and autocrine loops (Lee and Donoghue, 1992, J. Cell. Biol., 118:1057-1070; Korc et al., su ra; Akbasak and Suner-Akbasak et al., su ra) have been demonstrated. For example, EGFR has been associated with 20 squamous cell carcinoma, astrocytoma, glioblastoma, head and neck cancer, lung cancer and bladder cancer. HER2 has been associated with breast, ovarian, gastric, lung, pancreatic and bladder cancer. PDGFR has been associated with glioblastoma, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, and melanoma. The
Blood vessel proliferative disorders refer to angiogenic and vasculogenic disorders generally resulting in abnormal proliferation of blood vessels. The formation and spreading of blood vessels, or vasculogenesis and angiogenesis, respectively, play important roles in a variety of physiological processes such as embryonic development, corpus luteum formation, wound healing and organ regeneration.
However, they also play a pivotal role in cancer development.
Other examples of blood vessel proliferation disorders include arthritis, where new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and destroy cartilage, and ocular diseases, like diabetic retinopathy, where new capillaries in the retina invade the vitreous, bleed and cause blindness. Conversely, disorders related to the shrinkage, contraction or closing of blood vessels, such as restenosis, are also implicated.
Fibrotic disorders refer to the abnormal formation of extracellular matrices. Examples of fibrotic disorders include hepatic cirrhosis and mesangial cell proliferative disorders.
Hepatic cirrhosis is characterized by the increase in extracellular matrix constituents resulting in the formation of a hepatic scar. An increased extracellular matrix resulting in a hepatic scar can also be caused by viral infection such as hepatitis. Lipocytes appear to play a major role in hepatic cirrhosis. Other fibrotic disorders implicated include atherosclerosis.
Mesangial cell proliferative disorders refer to disorders brought about by abnormal proliferation of mesangial cells.
Mesangial proliferative disorders include various human renal diseases, such as glomerulonephritis, diabetic nephropathy and malignant nephrosclerosis as well as disorders such as SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ thrombotic microangiopathy syndromes, transplant rejection, and glomerulopathies. PDGF-R has been implicated in the maintenance of mesangial cell proliferation. Floege et al., 1993, Kidney International 43:475-545.
5 Other examples of cell proliferative disorders are disclosed in the following references which are incorporated as if fully set forth herein. The EGFR (Tuzi et al., 1991, Br.
J. Cancer 63:227-233; Torp et al., 1992, APMIS 100:714-719) HER2/neu (Slamon et al., 1989, Science 244:707-712) and the 10 PDGF-R (Kumabe et al., 1992, Oncogene, 7:627-633) are over-expressed in many tumors and/or persistently activated by autocrine loops. In fact, in the most common and severe cancers these receptor over-expressions (Akbasak and Suner-Akbasak et al., 1992, J. Neurol. Sci., 111:119-143; Dickson 15 et al., 1992, Cancer Treatment Res. 61:249-273; Korc et al., 1992, J. Clin. Invest. 90:1452-1460) and autocrine loops (Lee and Donoghue, 1992, J. Cell. Biol., 118:1057-1070; Korc et al., su ra; Akbasak and Suner-Akbasak et al., su ra) have been demonstrated. For example, EGFR has been associated with 20 squamous cell carcinoma, astrocytoma, glioblastoma, head and neck cancer, lung cancer and bladder cancer. HER2 has been associated with breast, ovarian, gastric, lung, pancreatic and bladder cancer. PDGFR has been associated with glioblastoma, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, and melanoma. The
25 RTK c-met has been associated with hepatocarcinogenesis.
Additionally, c-met has been linked to other malignant tumor formations. More specifically, c-met has been associated with, among other cancers, colorectal, thyroid, pancreatic and gastric carcinoma, leukemia and lymphoma. Additionally, over-expression of the c-met gene has been detected in patients with Hodgkins disease and Burkitts disease.
- IGF-IR, in addition to being implicated in nutritional support and in type-II diabetes, has also been associated with _ several types of cancers. For example, IGF-I has been implicated as an autocrine growth stimulator for several tumor SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCTNS98/10174 .
Additionally, c-met has been linked to other malignant tumor formations. More specifically, c-met has been associated with, among other cancers, colorectal, thyroid, pancreatic and gastric carcinoma, leukemia and lymphoma. Additionally, over-expression of the c-met gene has been detected in patients with Hodgkins disease and Burkitts disease.
- IGF-IR, in addition to being implicated in nutritional support and in type-II diabetes, has also been associated with _ several types of cancers. For example, IGF-I has been implicated as an autocrine growth stimulator for several tumor SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCTNS98/10174 .
26 types, e.g. human breast cancer carcinoma cells (Arteaga et al., 1989, J. Clin. Invest. 84:1418-1423) and small lung tumor cells (Macauley et al., 1990, Cancer Res., 50:2511-2517). In addition, IGF-I, while integrally involved in the normal growth and differentiation of the nervous system, also appears to be an autocrine stimulator of human gliomas. Sandberg-Nordqvist et al., 1993, Cancer Res. 53:2475-2478. The importance of the IGF-IR and its ligands in cell proliferation is further supported by the fact that many cell types in culture (fibroblasts, epithelial cells, smooth muscle cells, T-lymphocytes, myeloid cells, chondrocytes, osteoblasts (the stem cells of the bone marrow)) are stimulated to grow by IGF-I.
Goldring and Goldring, 1991, Eukaryotic Gene Expression,1:301 326. In a series of recent publications, Baserga suggests that IGF-IR plays a central role in the mechanisms of transformation and, as such, could be a preferred target for therapeutic interventions for a broad spectrum of human malignancies.
Baserga, 1995, Cancer Res., 55:249-252; Baserga, 1994, Cell 79:927-930; Coppola et al., 1994, Mol. Cell. Biol., 14:4588-4595.
The term "organism" refers to any living entity comprised of at least one cell. A living organism can be as simple as, for example, a single eukariotic cell or as complex as a mammal, including a human being.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein refers to that amount of the compound being administered which will relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of the disorder being treated. in reference to the treatment of cancer, a therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount which has the effect of (1) reducing the size of the tumor; (2) inhibiting (that is, slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) tumor metastasis; (3) inhibiting to some extent (that is slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) tumor growth; and/or, (4) relieving to some extent (or SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Goldring and Goldring, 1991, Eukaryotic Gene Expression,1:301 326. In a series of recent publications, Baserga suggests that IGF-IR plays a central role in the mechanisms of transformation and, as such, could be a preferred target for therapeutic interventions for a broad spectrum of human malignancies.
Baserga, 1995, Cancer Res., 55:249-252; Baserga, 1994, Cell 79:927-930; Coppola et al., 1994, Mol. Cell. Biol., 14:4588-4595.
The term "organism" refers to any living entity comprised of at least one cell. A living organism can be as simple as, for example, a single eukariotic cell or as complex as a mammal, including a human being.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein refers to that amount of the compound being administered which will relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of the disorder being treated. in reference to the treatment of cancer, a therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount which has the effect of (1) reducing the size of the tumor; (2) inhibiting (that is, slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) tumor metastasis; (3) inhibiting to some extent (that is slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) tumor growth; and/or, (4) relieving to some extent (or SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
27 preferably eliminating) one or more symptoms associated with the cancer.
A "therapeutically effective amount", in reference to the treatment of a cell proliferative disorder other than a cancer refers to an amount sufficient to bring about one or more of the following results: inhibit the growth of cells causing the disorder, relieve discomfort due to the disorder, or prolong the life of a patient suffering from the disorder.
The association between abnormal PTK activity and disease is not restricted to cancer. For example, RTKs have been associated with metabolic diseases like psoriasis, diabetes mellitus, wound healing, inflammation, and neurodegenerative diseases. For example, EGF-R is indicated in corneal and dermal wound healing. Defects in the Insulin-R and the IGF-1R
are indicated in type-II diabetes mellitus. A more complete correlation between specific RTKs and their therapeutic indications is set forth in Plowman et al., DN&P 7:334-339 ( 1994 ) .
As noted previously, not only RTKs but CTKs as well including, but not limited to, src, abl, fps, yes, fyn, lyn, lck, blk, hck, fgr and yrk (reviewed by Bolen et al., FASEB J., 6:3403-3409 (1992)) are involved in the proliferative and metabolic signal transduction pathway and thus were expected, and have been shown, to be involved in many PTK-mediated disorders to which the present invention is directed. For example, mutated src (v-src) has been demonstrated as an oncoprotein (pp60°-sr°) in chicken. Moreover, its cellular homolog, the proto-oncogene pp60'-sr~ transmits oncogenic signals of many receptors. For example, over-expression of EGFR or HER2/neu in tumors leads to the constitutive activation of pp60~'src~ which is characteristic of malignant cells but - absent from normal cells. On the other hand, mice deficient in the expression of c-src exhibit an osteopetrotic phenotype, - indicating a key participation of c-src in osteoclast function SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10I74 .
A "therapeutically effective amount", in reference to the treatment of a cell proliferative disorder other than a cancer refers to an amount sufficient to bring about one or more of the following results: inhibit the growth of cells causing the disorder, relieve discomfort due to the disorder, or prolong the life of a patient suffering from the disorder.
The association between abnormal PTK activity and disease is not restricted to cancer. For example, RTKs have been associated with metabolic diseases like psoriasis, diabetes mellitus, wound healing, inflammation, and neurodegenerative diseases. For example, EGF-R is indicated in corneal and dermal wound healing. Defects in the Insulin-R and the IGF-1R
are indicated in type-II diabetes mellitus. A more complete correlation between specific RTKs and their therapeutic indications is set forth in Plowman et al., DN&P 7:334-339 ( 1994 ) .
As noted previously, not only RTKs but CTKs as well including, but not limited to, src, abl, fps, yes, fyn, lyn, lck, blk, hck, fgr and yrk (reviewed by Bolen et al., FASEB J., 6:3403-3409 (1992)) are involved in the proliferative and metabolic signal transduction pathway and thus were expected, and have been shown, to be involved in many PTK-mediated disorders to which the present invention is directed. For example, mutated src (v-src) has been demonstrated as an oncoprotein (pp60°-sr°) in chicken. Moreover, its cellular homolog, the proto-oncogene pp60'-sr~ transmits oncogenic signals of many receptors. For example, over-expression of EGFR or HER2/neu in tumors leads to the constitutive activation of pp60~'src~ which is characteristic of malignant cells but - absent from normal cells. On the other hand, mice deficient in the expression of c-src exhibit an osteopetrotic phenotype, - indicating a key participation of c-src in osteoclast function SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10I74 .
28 and a possible involvement in related disorders. Similarly, Zap70 is implicated in T-cell signaling.
B. Modulation of FGFR and PDGFR Catalytic Activity A further feature of this invention is a method for treating a disorder characterized by inappropriate FGFR
activity comprising administering MCTA in a pharmaceutical composition to a patient in need of such treatment. In particular the disorder comprises cancer.
Still another feature of this invention is a method for treating a disorder characterized by inappropriate PDGFR
activity likewise comprising administering MCTA or a compound of this invention in a pharmaceutical composition to a patient in need of such treatment. In particular, the disorder comprises cancer.
Unwanted cell proliferation can result from inappropriate FGFR activity occurring in different types of cells including cancer cells, cells surrounding a cancer cell (stromal cells), endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells. For example, an increase in FGFR activity of endothelial cells surrounding cancer cells may lead to an increased vascularization (angiogenesis) of the tumor, thereby facilitating growth of the cancer cells. Inappropriate FGFR activity may also contribute to the proliferation of cancer cells by direct mitogenic stimulation.
"Inappropriate FGFR activity" refers to either 1) FGFR
expression in cells which normally do not express FGFR; 2) FGF
ligand expression by cells which normally do not express FGF;
3) increased FGFR expression leading to a disorder; 4) increased FGF expression leading to a disorder; or 5) mutations leading to constitutive activation of FGFR. The existence of inappropriate or abnormal FGF and FGFR levels or activities is determined by procedures well known in the art and are discussed in greater detail below.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
B. Modulation of FGFR and PDGFR Catalytic Activity A further feature of this invention is a method for treating a disorder characterized by inappropriate FGFR
activity comprising administering MCTA in a pharmaceutical composition to a patient in need of such treatment. In particular the disorder comprises cancer.
Still another feature of this invention is a method for treating a disorder characterized by inappropriate PDGFR
activity likewise comprising administering MCTA or a compound of this invention in a pharmaceutical composition to a patient in need of such treatment. In particular, the disorder comprises cancer.
Unwanted cell proliferation can result from inappropriate FGFR activity occurring in different types of cells including cancer cells, cells surrounding a cancer cell (stromal cells), endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells. For example, an increase in FGFR activity of endothelial cells surrounding cancer cells may lead to an increased vascularization (angiogenesis) of the tumor, thereby facilitating growth of the cancer cells. Inappropriate FGFR activity may also contribute to the proliferation of cancer cells by direct mitogenic stimulation.
"Inappropriate FGFR activity" refers to either 1) FGFR
expression in cells which normally do not express FGFR; 2) FGF
ligand expression by cells which normally do not express FGF;
3) increased FGFR expression leading to a disorder; 4) increased FGF expression leading to a disorder; or 5) mutations leading to constitutive activation of FGFR. The existence of inappropriate or abnormal FGF and FGFR levels or activities is determined by procedures well known in the art and are discussed in greater detail below.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2b ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
29 Inappropriate FGFR activity can also result in metastatic disorders. Metastasis is the term used to describe the process by which a primary tumor spreads to distant sites in the body, forming secondary tumors. Metastatic disease is often more deadly than a primary cancer. The process and consequences of metastasis are described more fully below.
The methods of the invention are designed to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation or metastasis by altering the activity of FGFR. Without being bound to any theory, inhibition of the activity of FGFR may occur by inhibiting tyrosine phosphorylation of FGFR, by inhibiting substrate or adaptor protein binding to the receptor, or by inhibiting other downstream signaling events, thereby inhibiting the activity of FGFR. However, unless otherwise stated, the use of the claimed methods and compositions are not limited to this particular theory. When used herein the term "compositions"
refers to pharmaceutical compositions of MCTA or any of the other compounds of this invention useful in the claimed method.
The compositions can be used to treat a disorder characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity by administering a therapeutically effective amount of the composition to a patient (i.e. a human or an animal) having a disorder. MCTA
and the other heteroarylcarboxamides of this invention may also be used in in vitro studies of the mechanism of action of FGFR
or FGF itself.
"Significant" inhibition of receptor tyrosine kinase activity refers to an IC50 of less than or equal to 100 ~,M
using one or more of the assays described in the Examples infra. Preferably, the compound can inhibit FGFR activity with an IC50 of less than or equal to 85 ~M. A lower IC50 is preferred because the IC50 provides an indication of the in vivo effectiveness of the compound. Other factors known in art, such as compound half-life, biodistribution, and toxicity - should also be considered for therapeutic uses. Such factors may enable a compound with a higher IC50 to have greater in SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
vivo efficacy than a compound having a lower IC50. The term "significant" can also refer to comparisons between tumor growth in animals treated with a compound of the invention and a control animal wherein the reduction in growth is found to 5 be statistically different.
Another useful feature of MCTA and the compounds of this invention is receptor specificity. This is not to say that the compounds will have absolute specificity, however they show selective inhibition of a limited number of RTKs and, 10 therefore, will be useful only in disorders characterized by inappropriate activity of that limited set of RTKs, i.e. FGFR.
Selective inhibition of the FGFR family is achieved by significantly inhibiting FGFR activity, while having an insignificant effect on PTK activity from a disparate family 15 (e. g., an IC50 greater than 100 ~M on EGFR).
The downstream signaling cascade of events from ligand binding to biological response has not been fully elucidated for any RTK. The intracellular environment is highly complex.
While it can be demonstrated that particular signaling 20 molecules play roles in many pathways, it cannot be assumed that signaling from any two RTKs is the same. It is known in the art, for example, that two highly related RTKS, EGFR and Her2, signal, at least in part, through different pathways.
(See Fazioli, et al., J. Bio. Chem. 267(8):5155, 1992; Di 25 Fiore, et al., Cell 51:1063, 1987; Segatto, et al., Mol. Cell.
Bio. 11:3191, 1991; and Dougall, et al., Oncogene 9:2109, 1994.) Thus, although it has been previously demonstrated that MCTA inhibits signaling by PDGFR (See WO 95/19169, published July 20, 1995) it would not be assumed that it would also be
The methods of the invention are designed to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation or metastasis by altering the activity of FGFR. Without being bound to any theory, inhibition of the activity of FGFR may occur by inhibiting tyrosine phosphorylation of FGFR, by inhibiting substrate or adaptor protein binding to the receptor, or by inhibiting other downstream signaling events, thereby inhibiting the activity of FGFR. However, unless otherwise stated, the use of the claimed methods and compositions are not limited to this particular theory. When used herein the term "compositions"
refers to pharmaceutical compositions of MCTA or any of the other compounds of this invention useful in the claimed method.
The compositions can be used to treat a disorder characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity by administering a therapeutically effective amount of the composition to a patient (i.e. a human or an animal) having a disorder. MCTA
and the other heteroarylcarboxamides of this invention may also be used in in vitro studies of the mechanism of action of FGFR
or FGF itself.
"Significant" inhibition of receptor tyrosine kinase activity refers to an IC50 of less than or equal to 100 ~,M
using one or more of the assays described in the Examples infra. Preferably, the compound can inhibit FGFR activity with an IC50 of less than or equal to 85 ~M. A lower IC50 is preferred because the IC50 provides an indication of the in vivo effectiveness of the compound. Other factors known in art, such as compound half-life, biodistribution, and toxicity - should also be considered for therapeutic uses. Such factors may enable a compound with a higher IC50 to have greater in SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
vivo efficacy than a compound having a lower IC50. The term "significant" can also refer to comparisons between tumor growth in animals treated with a compound of the invention and a control animal wherein the reduction in growth is found to 5 be statistically different.
Another useful feature of MCTA and the compounds of this invention is receptor specificity. This is not to say that the compounds will have absolute specificity, however they show selective inhibition of a limited number of RTKs and, 10 therefore, will be useful only in disorders characterized by inappropriate activity of that limited set of RTKs, i.e. FGFR.
Selective inhibition of the FGFR family is achieved by significantly inhibiting FGFR activity, while having an insignificant effect on PTK activity from a disparate family 15 (e. g., an IC50 greater than 100 ~M on EGFR).
The downstream signaling cascade of events from ligand binding to biological response has not been fully elucidated for any RTK. The intracellular environment is highly complex.
While it can be demonstrated that particular signaling 20 molecules play roles in many pathways, it cannot be assumed that signaling from any two RTKs is the same. It is known in the art, for example, that two highly related RTKS, EGFR and Her2, signal, at least in part, through different pathways.
(See Fazioli, et al., J. Bio. Chem. 267(8):5155, 1992; Di 25 Fiore, et al., Cell 51:1063, 1987; Segatto, et al., Mol. Cell.
Bio. 11:3191, 1991; and Dougall, et al., Oncogene 9:2109, 1994.) Thus, although it has been previously demonstrated that MCTA inhibits signaling by PDGFR (See WO 95/19169, published July 20, 1995) it would not be assumed that it would also be
30 effective at inhibiting the activity of FGFR, which belongs to a distinct family of receptors. And, of course, it follows that MCTA would therefore not be expected to be useful in treating a distinct set of disorders, i.e., those characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98110174 _
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98110174 _
31 MCTA, as is the case with the other compounds of this invention, is preferably administered in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a formulation to which the compound can be added to dissolve or otherwise facilitate administration of the compound.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include water, saline, physiologically buffered saline, cyclodextrins and VPD:DSW (discussed further below). Hydrophobic compounds such as MCTA are preferably administered using a carrier such as VPD:DSW. An important factor in choosing an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is choosing a carrier in which the compound remains active or the combination of the carrier and the compound produces an active compound. The compound may also be administered in a continuous fashion using a slow release formulation or a pump to maintain a constant or varying drug level in a patient.
As discussed above, the FGFR family contains at least four distinct members: FGFRl (also called Flg and Cekl), FGFR2 (also called Bek, Ksam, KsamI and Cek3), FGFR3 (also called Cek2) and FGFR4. They share a common structure consisting of, in the mature protein, one or more immunoglobulin-like (IgG-like) loops flanked by characteristic cysteines, a hydrophobic transmembrane domain and a intracellular domain containing a catalytic region that is split by a short insert.
(See Ullrich and Schlessinger, Cell 61:203, 1990.) The degree of homology varies between them, with the highest homology found in the catalytic domain. Additional diversity in the family is created through splice variants that vary the number and character of the IgG-like regions in the extracellular domain. At least nine FGFR ligands have been identified including FGF1 (acidic FGF) , FGF2 (basic FGF) , FGF3 (int-2) , FGF4 (Kaposi FGF), FGFS, FGF6, FGF7 (keratinocyte growth factor (KGF)), FGF8 (androgen-induced growth factor) and FGF9.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98152944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include water, saline, physiologically buffered saline, cyclodextrins and VPD:DSW (discussed further below). Hydrophobic compounds such as MCTA are preferably administered using a carrier such as VPD:DSW. An important factor in choosing an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is choosing a carrier in which the compound remains active or the combination of the carrier and the compound produces an active compound. The compound may also be administered in a continuous fashion using a slow release formulation or a pump to maintain a constant or varying drug level in a patient.
As discussed above, the FGFR family contains at least four distinct members: FGFRl (also called Flg and Cekl), FGFR2 (also called Bek, Ksam, KsamI and Cek3), FGFR3 (also called Cek2) and FGFR4. They share a common structure consisting of, in the mature protein, one or more immunoglobulin-like (IgG-like) loops flanked by characteristic cysteines, a hydrophobic transmembrane domain and a intracellular domain containing a catalytic region that is split by a short insert.
(See Ullrich and Schlessinger, Cell 61:203, 1990.) The degree of homology varies between them, with the highest homology found in the catalytic domain. Additional diversity in the family is created through splice variants that vary the number and character of the IgG-like regions in the extracellular domain. At least nine FGFR ligands have been identified including FGF1 (acidic FGF) , FGF2 (basic FGF) , FGF3 (int-2) , FGF4 (Kaposi FGF), FGFS, FGF6, FGF7 (keratinocyte growth factor (KGF)), FGF8 (androgen-induced growth factor) and FGF9.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98152944 PCT/US98/10174 .
32 Multiple members of the FGF ligand family can bind to the same receptor species. For a general review of FGFs and FGFRs see Johnson and Williams, Adv. in Cancer Res. 60:1, 1993.
The PDGF receptor family contains only the two isoforms PDGFR-a and PDGFR-f3, which are known to heterodimerize. PDGF
ligand is a pleiotropic factor that exists as a homo- or heterodimer of two polypeptides, the A- and B- chains (Habenicht, et al, Klin. Wochen-Schrift 68:53, 1990; Heldin, EMBO J. 11:4251, 1992).
Other tyrosine kinase receptors structurally and functionally related to FGFR and PDGFR include Flt (de Vries, et al, Science 255:989, 1992) and KDR (Terman, et al, BBRC
187;1579, 1992), both of which are activated by the ligand VEGF
(Rosenthal, et al., Growth Factors, 4:53-59, 1990; Conn, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA), 87:1423-1427, 1990; Houck, et al., Mol. Endocrinol., 5:1806-1814, 1991). VEGF expression is known to be increased by hypoxia (such as would be found in growing tumors) and is known to stimulate endothelial cells and to be involved in angiogenesis (Plate et al., Nature, 359:845-848, 1992; Shweike, et al., Nature 359:843-845, 1992).
PDGF- and FGF-dependent signaling is initiated immediately following binding of ligand to a receptor. Ligand binding induces receptor dimerization, either homodimers or heterodimers, leading to activation of receptor tyrosine kinase activity and autophosphorylation. Activation of the receptor leads to increased tyrosine phosphorylation on a number of cellular proteins, although many of their identities and functions are still largely unknown. Depending on the cell type, PDGFR and/or FGFR activation ultimately leads to proliferation, differentiation, inhibition of differentiation, motility, etc.
The use of the present invention is facilitated by first determining whether a disorder is related to inappropriate PDGFR and/or FGFR activity. Once such disorders are identified as such, patients suffering from the disorder can be identified SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
The PDGF receptor family contains only the two isoforms PDGFR-a and PDGFR-f3, which are known to heterodimerize. PDGF
ligand is a pleiotropic factor that exists as a homo- or heterodimer of two polypeptides, the A- and B- chains (Habenicht, et al, Klin. Wochen-Schrift 68:53, 1990; Heldin, EMBO J. 11:4251, 1992).
Other tyrosine kinase receptors structurally and functionally related to FGFR and PDGFR include Flt (de Vries, et al, Science 255:989, 1992) and KDR (Terman, et al, BBRC
187;1579, 1992), both of which are activated by the ligand VEGF
(Rosenthal, et al., Growth Factors, 4:53-59, 1990; Conn, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA), 87:1423-1427, 1990; Houck, et al., Mol. Endocrinol., 5:1806-1814, 1991). VEGF expression is known to be increased by hypoxia (such as would be found in growing tumors) and is known to stimulate endothelial cells and to be involved in angiogenesis (Plate et al., Nature, 359:845-848, 1992; Shweike, et al., Nature 359:843-845, 1992).
PDGF- and FGF-dependent signaling is initiated immediately following binding of ligand to a receptor. Ligand binding induces receptor dimerization, either homodimers or heterodimers, leading to activation of receptor tyrosine kinase activity and autophosphorylation. Activation of the receptor leads to increased tyrosine phosphorylation on a number of cellular proteins, although many of their identities and functions are still largely unknown. Depending on the cell type, PDGFR and/or FGFR activation ultimately leads to proliferation, differentiation, inhibition of differentiation, motility, etc.
The use of the present invention is facilitated by first determining whether a disorder is related to inappropriate PDGFR and/or FGFR activity. Once such disorders are identified as such, patients suffering from the disorder can be identified SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
33 by analysis of their symptoms by procedures well known in the medical arts. Such patients can then be treated as described herein. Many well known techniques exist for determining whether a disorder is related to inappropriate PDGFR and/or FGFR activity. For example, comparisons can be made in the level of expression of either FGF and/or PDGF ligand or FGFR
and/or PDGFR, in a tumor biopsy with levels in similar normal tissues or tumor cells known to be unrelated to FGFR and/or PDGFR activity (such as A431 cells, Yaish, et al, Science 242:933, 1988). Such comparisons can be done by immunostaining with FGFR and/or PDGFR specific antibodies or binding and detection of FGF and/or PDGF ligand using techniques well known in the art, by Northern blot analysis for the presence of ligand or receptor RNA, or by transcript imaging (Plowman, W096/34985, published 7 November 1996, and incorporated by reference herein). Alternatively samples can be analyzed for level of receptor phosphorylation, which is indicative of activity, compared to normal tissues. Receptor phosphorylation is readily detected by means well known in the art such as by using anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies. If the cancer cells have a higher level of FGFR and/or PDGFR activity or expression than non-FGFR and/or PDGFR driven cancers or normal tissues, preferably equal to or greater than previously identified FGFR
and/or PDGFR driven cancers, then they are candidates for 2~ treatment using the described inhibitors.
In the case of cell proliferative disorders arising due to unwanted proliferation of non-cancer cells, the level of receptor activity is compared to that level occurring in the general population (e.g., the average level occurring in the general population of people or animals excluding those people or animals suffering from a cell proliferative disorder). If - the unwanted cell proliferation disorder is characterized by a higher receptor level then occurring in the general population then the disorder is a candidate for treatment using the described inhibitors.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
and/or PDGFR, in a tumor biopsy with levels in similar normal tissues or tumor cells known to be unrelated to FGFR and/or PDGFR activity (such as A431 cells, Yaish, et al, Science 242:933, 1988). Such comparisons can be done by immunostaining with FGFR and/or PDGFR specific antibodies or binding and detection of FGF and/or PDGF ligand using techniques well known in the art, by Northern blot analysis for the presence of ligand or receptor RNA, or by transcript imaging (Plowman, W096/34985, published 7 November 1996, and incorporated by reference herein). Alternatively samples can be analyzed for level of receptor phosphorylation, which is indicative of activity, compared to normal tissues. Receptor phosphorylation is readily detected by means well known in the art such as by using anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies. If the cancer cells have a higher level of FGFR and/or PDGFR activity or expression than non-FGFR and/or PDGFR driven cancers or normal tissues, preferably equal to or greater than previously identified FGFR
and/or PDGFR driven cancers, then they are candidates for 2~ treatment using the described inhibitors.
In the case of cell proliferative disorders arising due to unwanted proliferation of non-cancer cells, the level of receptor activity is compared to that level occurring in the general population (e.g., the average level occurring in the general population of people or animals excluding those people or animals suffering from a cell proliferative disorder). If - the unwanted cell proliferation disorder is characterized by a higher receptor level then occurring in the general population then the disorder is a candidate for treatment using the described inhibitors.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
34 C. FGFR- and PDGFR-related Disorders One class of PTK disorders which involve FGFR and/or PDGFR are cell proliferative disorders. As discussed above, all proliferative disorders result in unwanted cell proliferation of one or more subsets of cells in a multicellular organism resulting in harm to the organism. Two ways in which inappropriate PTK/FGFR/PDGFR activity can stimulate unwanted cell proliferation of a particular type of cell are by directly stimulating growth of the particular cell, or by increasing vascularization of a particular area (angiogenesis), such as tumor tissue, thereby facilitating growth of the tissue. Angiogenesis also plays a significant role in metastasis, a complex disorder which is discussed in more detail below.
Cell proliferative disorders include cancers, blood vessel proliferation disorders, skeletal malformations and fibrotic disorders. These disorders are not necessarily independent. For example, fibrotic disorders may be related to, or overlap with, blood vessel disorders. For example, Moyamoya disease (which is characterized herein as a blood vessel disorder) results in the abnormal formation of fibrous tissue in the intracranial arteries.
Not all cancers found in a particular location within the body will be treatable by the method of the invention, only those characterized by inappropriate FGFR, PDGFR or related receptor activity. For example, only 30~ of bladder carcinomas are characterized as highly invasive and prone to metastasis (Raghavan, et al, NEJM 322:1129, 1990; Allen and Maher, J.
Cell. Physiol. 155:368, 1993), and these have been associated with FGFR activity (Allen and Maher, supra). Breast cancers are associated with inappropriate FGFR activity in 120 - 32%
of cases (Adnane, et al, Oncogene 6:659, 1991; Penault-Llorca, et al, Int. J. Cancer 61:170, 1995). Friess, et al., (Chirug 65:604, 1994) report that approximately 500 of primary pancreatic cancers surveyed express FGFR, and expression was SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
associated with tumor aggressiveness as measured by significantly shorter post-operative survival. Holm, et al.
(Int. J. Oncology 9:1077, 1996) found expression of PDGFR in only 30% of non-small cell lung cancer cell lines examined, and 5 only loo expressed KDR. Seymour, et al (supra) found expression of PDGF in 430 of tumors from breast cancer patients. Expression of PDGF correlated with a reduced chance of survival. One can determine which cancers are treatable by the compounds and methods of the invention by employing the 10 techniques described above for determining inappropriate FGFR
and/or PDGFR activity.
The formation and spreading of blood vessels, or vasculogenesis and angiogenesis respectively, play important roles in a variety of physiological processes such as embryonic 15 development, wound healing and organ regeneration. They also play a role in cancer development. Blood vessel proliferation disorders refer to angiogenic and vasculogenic disorders generally resulting in abnormal proliferation of blood vessels.
Examples of such disorders besides cancer include Moyamoya 20 disease and macular degeneration. FGFR and KDR have been recognized has having a regulatory role in angiogensis, along with other factors, due to their role in both endothelial cell proliferation and migration (Friesel and Maciag, FASEB J.
9:919, 1995; Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442, 1987:
25 Mullins and Rifkin, J. Cell. Physiol. 119:247, 1984;
Gualandris, et al., Cell Growth & Diff. 7:147, 1996). FGFR
activity has been suggested to play a role specifically in the angiogenesis associated with macular degeneration (Amin, et al, Invest. Ophthal. and Vis. Sci. 35(8):3178, 1994). PDGF and 30 VEGF expression is associated with angiogeneis and metastasis in breast cancer (Anan, et al., Surgery:119:333, 1996). PDGF
- expression has been correlated with increased blood vessel count in colon cancers (Hsu, et al, J. Cell. Physol. 165:239, 1995). PDGF and FGF have been shown to induce secretion of
Cell proliferative disorders include cancers, blood vessel proliferation disorders, skeletal malformations and fibrotic disorders. These disorders are not necessarily independent. For example, fibrotic disorders may be related to, or overlap with, blood vessel disorders. For example, Moyamoya disease (which is characterized herein as a blood vessel disorder) results in the abnormal formation of fibrous tissue in the intracranial arteries.
Not all cancers found in a particular location within the body will be treatable by the method of the invention, only those characterized by inappropriate FGFR, PDGFR or related receptor activity. For example, only 30~ of bladder carcinomas are characterized as highly invasive and prone to metastasis (Raghavan, et al, NEJM 322:1129, 1990; Allen and Maher, J.
Cell. Physiol. 155:368, 1993), and these have been associated with FGFR activity (Allen and Maher, supra). Breast cancers are associated with inappropriate FGFR activity in 120 - 32%
of cases (Adnane, et al, Oncogene 6:659, 1991; Penault-Llorca, et al, Int. J. Cancer 61:170, 1995). Friess, et al., (Chirug 65:604, 1994) report that approximately 500 of primary pancreatic cancers surveyed express FGFR, and expression was SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
associated with tumor aggressiveness as measured by significantly shorter post-operative survival. Holm, et al.
(Int. J. Oncology 9:1077, 1996) found expression of PDGFR in only 30% of non-small cell lung cancer cell lines examined, and 5 only loo expressed KDR. Seymour, et al (supra) found expression of PDGF in 430 of tumors from breast cancer patients. Expression of PDGF correlated with a reduced chance of survival. One can determine which cancers are treatable by the compounds and methods of the invention by employing the 10 techniques described above for determining inappropriate FGFR
and/or PDGFR activity.
The formation and spreading of blood vessels, or vasculogenesis and angiogenesis respectively, play important roles in a variety of physiological processes such as embryonic 15 development, wound healing and organ regeneration. They also play a role in cancer development. Blood vessel proliferation disorders refer to angiogenic and vasculogenic disorders generally resulting in abnormal proliferation of blood vessels.
Examples of such disorders besides cancer include Moyamoya 20 disease and macular degeneration. FGFR and KDR have been recognized has having a regulatory role in angiogensis, along with other factors, due to their role in both endothelial cell proliferation and migration (Friesel and Maciag, FASEB J.
9:919, 1995; Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442, 1987:
25 Mullins and Rifkin, J. Cell. Physiol. 119:247, 1984;
Gualandris, et al., Cell Growth & Diff. 7:147, 1996). FGFR
activity has been suggested to play a role specifically in the angiogenesis associated with macular degeneration (Amin, et al, Invest. Ophthal. and Vis. Sci. 35(8):3178, 1994). PDGF and 30 VEGF expression is associated with angiogeneis and metastasis in breast cancer (Anan, et al., Surgery:119:333, 1996). PDGF
- expression has been correlated with increased blood vessel count in colon cancers (Hsu, et al, J. Cell. Physol. 165:239, 1995). PDGF and FGF have been shown to induce secretion of
35 VEGF by glioma cells (Tsai, et al, J. Neurosurg. 82:864, 1995).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
36 Moyamoya disease is characterized by intracranial carotid artery stenosis and occlusions and a fine network of vessels at the base of the brain and may be described as both an angiogenic and fibrotic disorder (Suzuki and Kodama, Stroke 14:104, 1983; Suzuki and Takaku, Arch Neurol 20:288, 1969).
Suzui, et al, (Neurosurgery 35(1):20, 1994) have found that both FGF ligand and FGFR are increased in the superficial temporal artery of patients with Moyamoya disease.
Fibrotic disorders refer to the abnormal formation of extracellular matrix. Examples of fibrotic disorders include those found in the liver (hepatic cirrhosis), kidney (glomerular sclerosis, interstitial nephritis), lung (interstitial pulmonary fibrosis), arteries (restenosis, atherosclerosis) and skin (wound scarring, scleroderma).
Hepatic cirrhosis is characterized by the increase in extracellular matrix constituents resulting in the formation of a hepatic scar. An increased extracellular matrix resulting in a hepatic scar can also be caused by viral infection such as hepatitis. Lipocytes appear to play a major role in hepatic cirrhosis. Inappropriate FGFR activity can stimulate lipocyte proliferation.
As noted above, other proliferative disorders involving FGFR, PDGFR and other PTKs can be identified by standard techniques, and by determination of the efficacy of action of the compound described herein.
D. Metastatic Disorders Liotta, et al describe invasion and metastasis as "the most life-threatening aspects of the oncogenic process" (See review in Liotta, et al, Cell 64:327, 1991). Invasion and metastasis are complex events mediated by a group of coordinated cellular processes. They are facilitated by proteins that stimulate tumor cell attachment to extracelluiar matrix, proteolysis of barriers such as the basement membrane, migration into the circulatory system and attachment to and SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
Suzui, et al, (Neurosurgery 35(1):20, 1994) have found that both FGF ligand and FGFR are increased in the superficial temporal artery of patients with Moyamoya disease.
Fibrotic disorders refer to the abnormal formation of extracellular matrix. Examples of fibrotic disorders include those found in the liver (hepatic cirrhosis), kidney (glomerular sclerosis, interstitial nephritis), lung (interstitial pulmonary fibrosis), arteries (restenosis, atherosclerosis) and skin (wound scarring, scleroderma).
Hepatic cirrhosis is characterized by the increase in extracellular matrix constituents resulting in the formation of a hepatic scar. An increased extracellular matrix resulting in a hepatic scar can also be caused by viral infection such as hepatitis. Lipocytes appear to play a major role in hepatic cirrhosis. Inappropriate FGFR activity can stimulate lipocyte proliferation.
As noted above, other proliferative disorders involving FGFR, PDGFR and other PTKs can be identified by standard techniques, and by determination of the efficacy of action of the compound described herein.
D. Metastatic Disorders Liotta, et al describe invasion and metastasis as "the most life-threatening aspects of the oncogenic process" (See review in Liotta, et al, Cell 64:327, 1991). Invasion and metastasis are complex events mediated by a group of coordinated cellular processes. They are facilitated by proteins that stimulate tumor cell attachment to extracelluiar matrix, proteolysis of barriers such as the basement membrane, migration into the circulatory system and attachment to and SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
37 colony formation in distant organs. There is also a significant correlation between metastatic potential and angiogeneic potential, and the two processes may have many factors in common. (See Claffey, et al, Cancer Res. 56:172, 1996; Takahashi, et al., Cancer Res. 55:3964, 1995.) The cellular responses induced by FGF, PDGF and VEGF
ligands include those necessary for metastasis: proliferation, migration, production of proteases, and neovascularization.
FGFR and PDGFR expression has been associated with increased aggressiveness and metastasis of a number of cancers.
Nakamoto, et al (Cancer Research 52:571, 1992) compared FGF and FGFR expression and responsiveness in several human prostate cancer cell lines. The degree of metastasis in murine models shown by each of the cell lines LNCaP, DU145 and PC3 correlated directly with FGFR expression (with LNCaP the lowest and PC3 the highest), although the biological consequences of FGFR
expression were not studied in depth. Allen and Maher, J.
Cell. Phys. 155:368, 1993) report a similar study with bladder carcinoma cell lines. In a comparison of invasive and non-invasive tumors the invasive tumor (EJ) showed a significant increase in FGFR at both the protein and RNA level, with the non-invasive tumor (RT4) showing almost no FGFR
present. The FGFR was also shown to be biologically active by receptor phosphorylation in response to ligand. Anan, et al.
(supra) found PDGF mRNA was expressed more frequently in breast tumors with lymph node metastases that in those without metastases.
Several groups have shown not only a correlation of invasion/metastasis with FGFR but have demonstrated that inhibition of FGFR activity can inhibit this process.
Morrison, et al. (J. Neuro-Oncol. 18:207, 1994) showed a strong - association between aggressive gliobastomas and increased expression of FGFRI, while Takahashi, et al. (FEES 288:65, 1991) demonstrated that a neutralizing antibody against basic FGF ligand was able to inhibit the growth of two human SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
ligands include those necessary for metastasis: proliferation, migration, production of proteases, and neovascularization.
FGFR and PDGFR expression has been associated with increased aggressiveness and metastasis of a number of cancers.
Nakamoto, et al (Cancer Research 52:571, 1992) compared FGF and FGFR expression and responsiveness in several human prostate cancer cell lines. The degree of metastasis in murine models shown by each of the cell lines LNCaP, DU145 and PC3 correlated directly with FGFR expression (with LNCaP the lowest and PC3 the highest), although the biological consequences of FGFR
expression were not studied in depth. Allen and Maher, J.
Cell. Phys. 155:368, 1993) report a similar study with bladder carcinoma cell lines. In a comparison of invasive and non-invasive tumors the invasive tumor (EJ) showed a significant increase in FGFR at both the protein and RNA level, with the non-invasive tumor (RT4) showing almost no FGFR
present. The FGFR was also shown to be biologically active by receptor phosphorylation in response to ligand. Anan, et al.
(supra) found PDGF mRNA was expressed more frequently in breast tumors with lymph node metastases that in those without metastases.
Several groups have shown not only a correlation of invasion/metastasis with FGFR but have demonstrated that inhibition of FGFR activity can inhibit this process.
Morrison, et al. (J. Neuro-Oncol. 18:207, 1994) showed a strong - association between aggressive gliobastomas and increased expression of FGFRI, while Takahashi, et al. (FEES 288:65, 1991) demonstrated that a neutralizing antibody against basic FGF ligand was able to inhibit the growth of two human SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_
38 glioblastomas (U87MG and T98G} that express both FGF ligand and FGFR. Ohata et al. (Br. J. Cancer 72:824, 1995) examined the expression of FGF ligand and FGFR in primary pancreatic carcinomas. A significant correlation was found between FGFR
expression level and the presence of retroperitoneal invasion, metastasis to the lymph nodes and tumor stage. High FGFR
expression was significantly associated with shorter post-operative survival and extent of malignancy. Hasegawa, et al. (BBRC 200(3):1435, 1994) showed that FGF ligand stimulated basement membrane invasion by human pancreatic cancer cells in an in vitro model compared to other growth factors (EGF, PDGF) and that invasion could be significantly inhibited by the addition of an anti-FGFR antibody.
In addition to the above, both RTKs and CTKs are currently suspected as being involved in hyperimmune disorders.
Thus, in one aspect, this invention is directed to compounds which modulate PTK signal transduction by affecting the enzymatic activity of the PTKs and thereby interfering with the signals transduced by such proteins. More particularly, an aspect of the present invention is directed to compounds which modulate the PTK-mediated signal transduction pathways as a therapeutic approach to treat many kinds of solid tumors, including but not limited to carcinoma, sarcoma, erythroblastoma, glioblastoma, meningioma, astrocytoma, melanoma and myoblastoma. Leukemias may also be susceptible to treatment using the compounds of this invention. Indications may include, but are not limited to brain cancers, bladder cancers, ovarian cancers, gastric cancers, pancreatic cancers, colon cancers, blood cancers, lung cancers, bone cancers and leukemias.
The term "administering" as used herein refers to a method of contacting a compound of this invention with a PTK
both in vitro, i.e. in a test tube, and in vivo, i.e. in cells or tissues of a living organism. Thus, the PTK mediated disorders which are the object of this invention can be SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
expression level and the presence of retroperitoneal invasion, metastasis to the lymph nodes and tumor stage. High FGFR
expression was significantly associated with shorter post-operative survival and extent of malignancy. Hasegawa, et al. (BBRC 200(3):1435, 1994) showed that FGF ligand stimulated basement membrane invasion by human pancreatic cancer cells in an in vitro model compared to other growth factors (EGF, PDGF) and that invasion could be significantly inhibited by the addition of an anti-FGFR antibody.
In addition to the above, both RTKs and CTKs are currently suspected as being involved in hyperimmune disorders.
Thus, in one aspect, this invention is directed to compounds which modulate PTK signal transduction by affecting the enzymatic activity of the PTKs and thereby interfering with the signals transduced by such proteins. More particularly, an aspect of the present invention is directed to compounds which modulate the PTK-mediated signal transduction pathways as a therapeutic approach to treat many kinds of solid tumors, including but not limited to carcinoma, sarcoma, erythroblastoma, glioblastoma, meningioma, astrocytoma, melanoma and myoblastoma. Leukemias may also be susceptible to treatment using the compounds of this invention. Indications may include, but are not limited to brain cancers, bladder cancers, ovarian cancers, gastric cancers, pancreatic cancers, colon cancers, blood cancers, lung cancers, bone cancers and leukemias.
The term "administering" as used herein refers to a method of contacting a compound of this invention with a PTK
both in vitro, i.e. in a test tube, and in vivo, i.e. in cells or tissues of a living organism. Thus, the PTK mediated disorders which are the object of this invention can be SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
39 studied, prevented or treated by the methods set forth herein whether the cells or tissues of the organism exist within the organism or outside the organism. Cells existing outside the organism can be maintained or grown in cell culture dishes. In this context, the ability of a particular compound to affect a PTK related disorder can be determined; i.e., the IC50 of the compound, defined below, before the use of the compounds in more complex living organisms is attempted. For cells outside the organism, multiple methods exist, and are well-known to those skilled in the arts, to administer compounds including, but not limited to, cell micro-injection and numerous carrier techniques. For cells harbored within a living organism, myriad methods also exist, and are likewise well-known to those skilled in the art, to administer compounds including, but not limited to, oral, parenteral, and aerosol applications.
As used herein, "PTK related disorder," "PTK driven disorder", "abnormal PTK activity" and "inappropriate PTK
activity" all refer to a disorder characterized by inappropriate or over-activity of PTKs, which can be either RTKs or CTKs. Inappropriate activity refers to either: (1) PTK
expression in cells which normally do not express PTKs; (2) increased PTK expression leading to unwanted cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth; or, (3) decreased PTK expression leading to unwanted reductions in cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth. Overactivity of PTKs refers to either amplification of the gene encoding a particular PTK or production of a level of PTK activity which can correlate with a cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth disorder (that is, as the level of the PTK increases, the severity of one or more of the symptoms of the cellular disorder increases).
- The methods and compositions of the invention are designed to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation or metastasis by altering the activity of PTKs. Without being bound to any theory, inhibition of the activity of PTKs may occur by SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
inhibiting tyrosine phosphorylation of a RTK, by inhibiting substrate or adaptor protein binding to the receptor, or by inhibiting other downstream signaling events, thereby inhibiting the activity of the RTK. However, unless otherwise 5 stated, the use of the claimed methods and compositions are not limited to this particular theory.
E. MCTA
MCTA, also known as leflunomide and HWA 486, has been 10 previously discussed in various publications as having a variety of uses including as an antirheumatic, antiphlogistic, antipyretic or analgesic and in the treatment of multiple sclerosis (Kommerer F-J, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,284,786 (1981) and Kommerer F-J, et al . , U . S . Pat . No . 4 , 351, 841 ( 1982 ) . It 15 has been suggested as an anti-inflammatory agent (Bartlett, et al., Agents and Actions 32:10-21, 1991; EP 607 775, EP 607 776, EP 607 777). European Application 0 414 329 A2 suggests the use of MCTA for the treatment of ocular disorders associated with an inflammatory response, and (EP 665 014, US 5,519,042) 20 suggests its use in treating vascular disorders.
Hirth, et al., (PCT/US95/00363) assert that MCTA can be used to treat cell proliferative disorders that are related to inappropriate activity of the Platelet Derived Growth Factor Receptor (PDGFR) including PDGFR driven cancer. Bartlett, et 25 al. (PCT/EP90/01800, US 5,532,259 issued July 2, 1996) assert that MCTA can be used to treat cancers, in particular cancers associated with inappropriate activity of the Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGFR). In Bartlett, et al., Agents and Actions 32:10, 1991, the authors state:
30 we could show that tyrosine phosphorylation of the RR-SRC peptide substrate and the autophosphorylation of the epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor were, dose dependently, inhibited by 35 leflunomide.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
Mattar et al., FEBS 339:161, 1993 (not admitted to be prior art) describes the use of a metabolite of leflunomide to inhibit EGF-dependent cell growth, including A431 cells. Mattar also asserts that platelet-derived growth factor-dependent tyrosine phosphorylation was also inhibited by A77 1726 in intact cells at concentrations similar to EGF-dependent phosphorylation.
The inventors herein have discovered that the teachings of Bartlett and Mattar may be in error. As illustrated in the examples described below, MCTA inhibits FGFR activity while having little if any effect on EGF-receptor activity in cells.
In addition, while MCTA inhibited growth of tumors characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity, it did not significantly inhibit the growth of cells shown in PCT/EP90/01800 (A431 and KB) when tested in in vivo models.
This data is surprising in view of the results described by Bartlett et al., supra, (Agents and Actions) in which MCTA was ostensibly shown to inhibit EGF induced EGF receptor autophosphorylation and cell proliferation, and Mattar et al., supra, in which a metabolite of MCTA inhibited the in vitro growth of A431 cells. Furthermore, neither Bartlett or Mattar suggest that MCTA can be used to inhibit metastasis.
The present disclosure demonstrates the ability of MCTA
to inhibit the cellular response to FGFR activity and unwanted cell proliferation in vivo, such as that found in cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity. Moreover, the present invention demonstrates that MCTA is useful for inhibiting metastasis.
F. Treatment of Solid Tumor Cancers In yet another aspect, the present invention relates to - a method for inhibiting tumorigenic activity in a cell comprising administering to the cell a combination of drugs - including a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea and a cytostatic signal transduction inhibitor. The cytostatic signal SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ transduction inhibitor may be MCTA or one or more of the novel compounds described herein; preferably, it is MCTA. It is understood, however, that reference to MCTA in the description that follows applies also to the novel compounds of this invention. While MCTA might perform effectively with any nitrosourea; e.g., chlorozoticin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine and ranimustine, at present BCNU, also known as carmustine or, formally, N,N'-bis(2-chloroethyl)-N-nitrosourea, is considered the most active of the group; thus, this invention is directed in particular toward the combination of MCTA with BCNU.
"Comprising" as used herein in connection with "administering" is intended to mean that drugs being administered pursuant to the present invention may be administered as simply a combination of MCTA and BCNU only or may be expanded to include additional drugs which are known or expected to offer additional beneficial characteristics to the combination.
As used herein, "combination" refers to two or more compounds or drugs which are administered simultaneously, sequentially, continuously, intermittently, etc. in accordance with a regimen calculated to take maximum advantage of the characteristics of each of the component drugs. In a preferred embodiment of this invention, the combination comprises MCTA
and BCNU. However, combinations of BCNU with two, three and more additional compounds are well known to those skilled in the art and it would be within the spirit and scope of this invention to include one or more of these additional compounds together with the BCNU and MCTA.
"Tumorigenic" activity, as it relates to a cell, refers to both intracellular and extracellular biochemical activity which contributes to the formation of a neoplasm.
A "neoplasm" is an abnormal tissue that grows by cellular proliferation more rapidly than normal and continues to grow even after the stimuli that initiated the new growth cease. A
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
neoplasm partially or completely lacks structural organization and functional coordination with the normal tissue and usually forms a distinct mass of tissue. Such masses may be benign (benign tumors) or malignant (solid tumor cancer). Malignant neoplasms are locally invasive and destructive and in many cases metastasize (spread to and invade and destroy tissues in areas of the affected organism remote from the site of origin). The process of neoplasm formation is generally referred to as "neoplasia"; i.e., neoplasia is the biochemical process by which a neoplasm forms and grows.
In another aspect of this invention, MCTA and BCNU are used together to inhibit the, formation of malignant neoplasms;
i.e., to inhibit neoplasia.
With regard to malignant neoplasms, "inhibit" or "inhibiting" refers to eliminating, reducing, containing, impeding, preventing, slowing, retarding and/or restricting neoplasia.
"Statistically significant" means that data obtained from experiments is analyzed using the Student's T Test and "P", the calculated probability that the results obtained are random and not indicative of a true trend, is less than or equal to 0.05 or 5 0 .
The terms "malignant neoplasm", "cancer", "tumor" and "solid tumor cancer" are used interchangeably herein to refer to the condition well known to those skilled in the art as the life-threatening disease commonly referred to simply as "cancer." Among the most virulent and difficult to treat of the malignant neoplasms are brain tumors. Brain tumors are classified as primary, originating in cells found in the brain itself; secondary, metastatic from sites outside the central nervous system; or developmental, arising from displaced - midline epithelium or germ cells. Such tumors are further described as intra-axial or extra-axial. Intra-axial brain tumors are those which originate within the brain parenchyma;
that is, the interstitial tissues of the brain itself or SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ closely associated tissues such as the pineal gland, the posterior pituitary gland, the spinal cord and the retina.
Extra-axial tumors, on the other hand, originate in tissues not directly associated with the brain but still within its vicinity; e.g., in the skull, the cranial nerves or in brain appendages such as the pituitary gland. About half of primary intra-axial brain tumors are gliomas which include astrocytoma, particularly anaplastic astrocytoma, glioblastoma multiforme and oligodendroglioma. Both glioblastoma and astrocytoma are expected to be particularly vulnerable to the combination of drugs claimed herein.
About half of the gliomas are glioblastoma multiforme, which will be referred to herein simply as "glioblastoma" and which are generally regarded as the most virulent of all the brain tumors. Glioblastoma consist chiefly of undifferentiated anaplastic cells of glial origin that show marked nuclear pleomorphism, necrosis and vascular endothelial proliferation.
They grow extremely rapidly and invade extensively. They occur most frequently in the cerebrum of adults. While survival depends on numerous factors, generally speaking, most patients survive less than 9 months after diagnosis of glioblastoma.
In yet another aspect of this invention, a method is claimed for treating solid tumors (malignant neoplasms) in a patient by administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of MCTA and a therapeutically effective amount of a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea, in particular, BCNU.
Individual pharmacological compositions of both MCTA and of BCNU, which compositions facilitate the administration of each of the drugs, are an additional feature of this invention. The use of the pharmacological compositions of MCTA and BCNU for the treatment of brain tumors, especially glioblastoma and astrocytoma, is a particularly preferred aspect of this invention.
A "patient" refers to any higher organism which is susceptible to the formation of neoplasms. In particular, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCTlUS98/10174.
"patient" refers to mammals, especially, of course, human beings.
A "chemotherapeutic" refers to a chemical substance or drug used to treat a disease; the term is most often applied 5 to such substances or drugs which are used primarily for the treatment of cancer.
(1) Biochemistry/Pharmacology of BCNU and MCTA
At present, many chemotherapy agents act by affecting DNA
10 synthesis or function. For example, the alkylating agents, such as cyclophosphamide, directly attack DNA, damaging the molecule so that it cannot perform its cellular function resulting in the death of the cell. The antimetabolites, such as 6 mercaptopurine and 5-fluorouracil interfere with DNA synthesis.
15 Certain antitumor antibiotics such as doxorubicin and bleomycin bind to DNA and thereby prevent the synthesis of RNA. The nitrosoureas, of which BCNU is currently considered the most potent, act similarly to the alkylating agents. BCNU has been postulated to participate in cross-linking both DNA and DNA-20 protein. In addition, the nitrosoureas appear to inhibit changes necessary for repair of damaged DNA, perhaps by virtue of the fact that, as well as being alkylating agents, the nitrosoureas are carbamoylating agents since isocyanates are formed during their decomposition at physiological pHs;
25 proteins are known to be carbamoylated by isocyanates derived from BCNU.
BCNU has been used to treat a number of different solid tumor cancers; e.g., lymphomas, malignant melanoma, breast cancer and multiple myeloma. It has been employed in 30 combination with other drugs such as cyclophosphamide, cisplatin, vincristine, melphalan, dexamethasone, vinblastine, ° methotrexate, daunorubicin, etoposide, procarbazine, prednisone, cytarabine, thioguanine and hydroxyurea. In - addition, because of its ability to cross the blood-brain 35 barrier, BCNU is presently the chemotherapeutic of choice for SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) the treatment of brain cancers, including glioblastoma.
Although combinations of BCNU with other chemotherapeutic agents are used in the treatment of gliomas as well as other neoplasms, the number of such combinations is fewer than for non-brain tumors due to the inability of many other chemotherapeutic agents to cross the blood-brain barrier. For example, for the treatment of gliomas, BCNU has been combined with cyclophosphamide, cisplatin, thiotepa, procarbazine, vincristine, etoposide and taxol.
A limiting factor for the use of BCNU, alone or in combination with other drugs, is the inherent toxicity of the known chemotherapeutic agents. BCNU is known to cause myelosuppresion (resulting in leukopenia and thrombocytopenia), pulmonary fibrosis (lung disease), hepatotoxicity (liver damage) and nephrotoxicity (kidney damage). The effects of BCNU are dose dependent, progressive and cumulative. In addition, BCNU itself has been shown to cause tumors in rats and mice at doses approximating those clinically employed (Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products, FDA disclosure enclosure accompanying commercial BCNU packaging).
Reducing the incidence of drug-related adverse reactions from BCNU by reducing the dose through combination therapy with existing chemotherapeutic agents is only marginally effective.
At stated previously, the most commonly used drugs in combination with BCNU for the treatment of gliomas are other alklyating agents; for the most part they exhibit toxicities similar to that of BCNU. For example, a complication associated with cisplatin is the possibility of renal (kidney) failure. Cyclophosphamide has been associated with mucositis (van der Wall, et al., Cancer Treatment Reviews, 21(2):105-142 (1995)). In one study, treatment with thiotepa and etoposide in combination with BCNU (total dosage BCNU: 600 mg/mz over three days) has been reported to result in high mortality due to multiorgan failure (Finlay, Bone Marrow Transplantation, 18 (Suppl. 3): S1 - S5 (1996)).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
Thus, what is needed is a compound (or compounds) whose anti-tumor activity coordinates with that of BCNU but which does not concomitantly increase overall toxicity to the patient. We have found that MCTA is such a compound.
MCTA has been shown to be well-tolerated in human studies. For instance, there were few side effects among 500 rheumatoid arthritis patients treated with MCTA in a Phase II
clinical study (Bartlett, et al., Non-steroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs: Mechanisms and Clinical Uses, Lewis, AJ, Furst, DE, eds., New York:Dekker ,1994:349). In two studies of the effect of MCTA against a variety of solid tumors including ovarian, prostate and non-small cell lung cancer, MCTA was reported to be only mildly to moderately toxic at the highest doses employed (Rosen, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am.
Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A739 (1997); VanUmmersen, et al., Proc.
Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A740 (1997)).
Furthermore, in a clinical trial in which the effect of MCTA
against malignant gliomas, which cell lines were found to be the most sensitive to the compound in pre-clinical trials, was studied, no dose-limiting toxicities were observed (Malkin, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A1971 (1997)).
MCTA, however, affects tumors by a mode of action which to the inventors' knowledge is completely different from that of the known chemotherapeutic agents and, therefore, it was unknown whether it would have any beneficial effect in conjunction with BCNU. That is, as stated previously, BCNU
acts primarily as an alkylating agent, attacking and damaging a number of key enzymatic reactions involved in DNA synthesis and DNA itself. Virtually all of the reported chemotherapeutic combinations with BCNU likewise interfere directly in one way or another with DNA synthesis or activity. MCTA, on the other ' hand, does not interact directly with DNA synthesis/activity.
Rather, MCTA intervenes at an earlier stage of the cell cycle.
That is, MCTA has been shown to inhibit signaling events which are necessary for a cell to initially enter into the active SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
stage of DNA synthesis and cell proliferation where BCNU and the other alkylating agents exhibit their predominant activity.
Specifically, MCTA inhibits platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) mediated cell signaling events which are necessary for the inception of cell growth, cell cycle progression and cell proliferation. When treated with MCTA, cells become essentially quiescent, at least with regard to DNA synthesis and cell division (mitosis), and remain so until treatment with MCTA is withdrawn at which time cell activity resumes. The fact that a cell will return to normal activity once treatment with MCTA is terminated demonstrates that MCTA, unlike BCNU and other alkylating agents, is cytostatic rather than cytotoxic.
That is, MCTA inhibits cell activity but does not kill cells.
Many types of tumor cells have been shown to over-express PDGF receptors and to be particularly dependent on the abnormally high PDGF signaling events arising from this over expression for their continued proliferation. For example, PDGF ligands and receptors have been detected in many cell lines or tissues derived from, without limitation, glioma, melanoma, esophageal tumors, gastric tumors, colorectal adenocarcinoma, basal cell cancer, choriocarcinoma, breast cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma, ovarian cancer, non-small cell lung carcinoma and prostate adenocarcinoma. Some cancer cells have even been shown to co-express PDGF itself as well as the receptor for it. This suggests that these tumor cells may be self-stimulating; i.e., employ an autocrine as well as a paracrine growth mechanism which could account for the previously noted propensity for neoplasms to continue growing and proliferating even when the external stimuli are removed.
MCTA, however, is a blocker of PDGF-mediated activity and thereby is capable of inhibiting the uncontrolled growth and proliferation of tumors.
Given the lack of any information regarding a combination of BCNU, a DNA synthesis inhibitor, with a compound such as MCTA which effectively prevents a cell from entering the stage SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
of cell cycle where DNA synthesis occurs, the excellent resuits obtained from the combination of the two compounds was truly surprising. MCTA alone was efficacious at concentrations of 20, 10 and 5 mg/kg/day. BCNU alone was effective at 27 and 18 = 5 mg/kg. BCNU alone at 12 mg/kg was ineffective. However, the combination of 5 mg/kg of MCTA and 12 mg/kg BCNU showed a statistically significant percentage inhibition as high as 63.40 on day 18. In addition, 5 mg MCTA with 18 mg/kg BCNU
also exhibited a greater percentage inhibition than the corresponding amount of MCTA or BCNU alone, as did 10 mg/kg of MCTA with both 12 and 18 mg/kg BCNU. Furthermore, the increased effect was of longer duration than that afforded by BCNU alone as indicated by the increased number of days of statistically significant percentage inhibition.
Finally, there was no observed change in the mortality of the mice when the combination of BCNU and MCTA was used, indicating that there was no additive general toxicity even though there was a distinct therapeutic advantage from the concentration. This suggests that the therapeutic index, that is, the ratio of the LDso (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) to the EDSO (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population), of the MCTA/BCNU combination is higher that for either drug alone which translates into a substantial benefit to patients in need of as much chemotherapy as possible without a concomitant increase in intolerable side effects requiring cessation of treatment.
It should be noted that MCTA is known to metabolize in mammals to N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxy-crotonamide. Generally speaking, MCTA tends to metabolize most readily when subjected to acid conditions such as those encountered in the stomach when a drug is administered orally.
However, the preferred mode of administration of the combination claimed herein is more direct; e.g., without - limitation, intravenously or intraarterially. Nevertheless, a portion of the MCTA administered to a patient may metabolize SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) W098/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ to N-(4-trifluoro- methylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxy- crotonamide prior to reaching the target tumor. Therefore, some of the activity of the claimed combination may in fact be due to a combination which includes not only MCTA and BCNU but N-(4-5 trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide as well.
The mode of action of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide has been determined to be inhibition of pyrimidine biosynthesis and therefore subsequent cell growth and/or survival which may in fact provide additional synergy 10 of the claimed combination. Thus, it is understood that the scope and spirit of this invention encompasses not only MCTA
and BCNU in the claimed combination but N-(4trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide, the metabolite of MCTA, as well.
G. Pharmacological Compositions and Therapeutic Applications.
(1) General MCTA as well as the compounds disclosed herein are preferably administered to a patient in a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds of this invention together with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers) and/or excipients. The compound can be prepared as a physiologically acceptable salt (i.e., non-toxic salts which do not prevent the compound from exerting its effect).
Physiologically acceptable salts can be acid addition salts such as those containing hydrochloride, sulfate, phosphate, sulfamate, acetate, citrate, lactate, tartrate, methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, cyclohexylsulfamate and quinate. Such salts can be derived using acids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid and sulfamic acid, acetic acid, citric acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, cyclohexylsulfamic acid, and quinic acid.
Physiologically acceptable salts can be prepared by standard techniques. For example, the free base form of the . 5 compound is first dissolved in a suitable solvent such as an aqueous or aqueous-alcohol solution, containing the appropriate _ acid. The salt is then isolated by evaporating the solution.
In a another example, the salt is prepared by reacting the free base and acid in an organic solvent.
Carriers or excipient can be used to facilitate administration of the compound, for example, to increase the solubility of the compound. Examples of carriers and excipient include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars or starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, vegetable oils, polyethylene glycols and physiologically compatible solvents.
The compositions or pharmaceutical composition can be administered by different routes including intravenously, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, and intramuscular, orally, topically, or transmuccosally.
The specific delivery route of any selected agent depends on the use of the agent. Generally, a specific delivery program for each agent focuses on agent uptake with regard to intracellular localization, followed by demonstration of efficacy. Alternatively, delivery to these same cells in an organ or tissue of an animal can be pursued. Uptake studies include uptake assays to evaluate, e.g., cellular nucleic acid or protein uptake, regardless of the delivery vehicle or strategy. Such assays also determine the intracellular localization of the agent following uptake, ultimately establishing the requirements for maintenance of steady-state concentrations within the cellular compartment containing the ' target sequence (nucleus and/or cytoplasm). Efficacy and cytotoxicity can then be tested. Toxicity not only includes cell viability but also cell function. Generally, the dosages SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
of the mutated protein and nucleic acid is as described above for the featured compounds.
Drug delivery vehicles are effective for both systemic and topical administration. They can be designed to serve as a slow release reservoir, or to deliver their contents directly to the target cell. An advantage of using direct delivery drug vehicles is that multiple molecules are delivered per uptake.
Such vehicles increase the circulation half-life of drugs which would otherwise be rapidly cleared from the blood stream. Some examples of such specialized drug delivery vehicles falling into this category are liposomes, hydrogels, cyclodextrins, biodegradable nanocapsules, and bioadhesive microspheres.
Pumps can also be used for this purpose.
From the above group of delivery systems, liposomes are preferred. Liposomes increase intracellular stability, increase uptake efficiency and improve biological activity.
Liposomes are hollow spherical vesicles composed of lipids arranged in a similar fashion to those lipids making up the cell membrane. They have an internal aqueous space for entrapping water soluble compounds and range in size from 0.05 to several microns in diameter. Antibodies can be attached to liposomes to target particular cells.
Topical administration of the featured compound is advantageous, particularly when treating skin disorders such as Kaposi's sarcoma, since it allows localized concentration at the site of administration with minimal systemic adsorption.
This simplifies the delivery strategy of the agent to the disease site and reduces the extent of toxicological characterization. Furthermore, the amount of material applied is far less than that required for other administration routes.
Many compounds, MCTA for example, are preferably absorbed systemically when used to treat disorders such as cancer.
Systemic absorption refers to the accumulation of drugs in the blood stream followed by distribution throughout the entire body. Administration routes which lead to systemic absorption SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
include: intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal and intrathecal. Each of these administration routes expose the drug to an accessible diseased tissue.
Subcutaneous administration drains into a localized lymph node which proceeds through the lymphatic network into the circulation. The rate of entry into the circulation has been shown to be a function of molecular weight or size.
MCTA is hydrophobic and thus not very soluble in water.
It is expected that the novel compounds of this invention may also be hydrophobic. Effective doses of hydrophobic compounds for systemic administration can be obtained using the pharmaceutical formulations described in US Patent No.
5,610,173, issued March 11, 1997. A particularly preferred formulation is obtained using a combination of the compound and VPD:DSW. VPD consists of a solution of 12% w/v polysorbate 80, 0.55% citric acid (anhydrous), 35% w/v polyenthlene glycol (MW
- 300 daltons) and 26.3% v/v 190 proof ethanol. VPD is diluted 1:22 in a diluent. Preferred diluents are 0.45% saline, and 0.9% saline. A particularly preferred diluent is 5% dextrose in water (D5W).
Another way of overcoming the hydrophobicity problem includes the use of frequent small daily doses rather than a few large daily doses. For example, the composition can be administered at short time intervals, preferably the 2.5 composition can be administered using a pump to control the time interval or achieve continuously administration. Suitable pumps are commercially available (e. g., the ALZET~ pump sold by Alza corporation, and the BARD ambulatory PCA pump sold by Bard MedSystems).
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compounds with solid excipient, - optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if . desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are, in particular, fillers such as sugars, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98!52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulose preparations such as, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). If desired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.
Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added.
The proper dosage depends on various factors such as the type of disease being treated, the particular composition being used, the dosing regimen and the size and physiological condition of the patient. For the treatment of cancers it is prefered that the minimal plasma concentration in a patient be greater than 5 ug/ml, more preferably greater than 25 ug/ml, most preferably greater than 50 ug/ml. The compound can be delivered daily or less frequently provided plasma levels of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) ~WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
the active moiety are sufficient to maintain therapeutic effectiveness. Plasma levels may be reduced if pharmacological effective concentrations of the drug are achieved at the site of interest.
. 5 Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. For example, for determining the LDso (the dose lethal to 500 of the population) and the EDso (the dose therapeutically effective in 50~ of the population).
10 The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LDso/EDso. Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range 15 of dosage for use in human. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the EDso with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
20 For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. For example, a dose can be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the ICSO as determined in cell culture 25 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal disruption of the protein complex, or a half-maximal inhibition of the cellular level and/or activity of a complex component). Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma 30 may be measured, for example, by HPLC.
The exact formulation, route of administration and dosage can be chosen by the individual physician in view of the patient's condition. (See e-g. Fingl et al., 1975, in "The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", Ch. 1 pl).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
It should be noted that the attending physician would know how to and when to terminate, interrupt, or adjust administration due to toxicity, or to organ dysfunctions.
Conversely, the attending physician would also know to adjust treatment to higher levels if the clinical response were not adequate (precluding toxicity). The magnitude of an administrated dose in the management of the oncogenic disorder of interest will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and to the route of administration. The severity of the condition may, for example, be evaluated, in part, by standard prognostic evaluation methods. Further, the dose and perhaps dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient. A program comparable to that discussed above may be used in veterinary medicine.
(2) MCTA/BCNU
MCTA and BCNU can be administered to a human patient her se, or in pharmacological compositions wherein they are mixed with suitable carriers or excipient(s). In general, techniques for formulation and administration of drugs may be found in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences," Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition.
(i) Routes Of Administration.
Suitable routes of administration may, for example, include transmucosal, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intra-medullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, intravenous, intra-arterial or intraperitoneal.
Alternately, one may administer MCTA and BCNU in a local rather than systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compound directly into a solid tumor, often in a depot or sustained release formulation.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ Other means of administering the drugs of this invention which are well within the knowledge of those skilled in the art are within the scope and spirit of this invention.
(ii) Composition/Formulation.
Pharmacological compositions of MCTA and BCNU are preferred embodiments of this invention. Pharmacological compositions of the present invention may be manufactured by processes well known in the art; e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilizing processes.
Pharmacological compositions for use in accordance with the present invention may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.
For injection, preferred formulation for BCNU are provided with the commercial compound. In one instance this includes Dehydrated Alcohol injection USP in which the BCNU is dissolved and then the alcoholic solution is diluted aseptically with sterile water to a final concentration of 3.3 mg/ml of BCNU in 10% ethanol, pH 5.6 to 6.0 (BCiNU~ from Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products).
For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2G ) vehicles, and may contain formulating agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
For MCTA, a preferred formulation for injection comprises ethanol/water containing a surfactant. The specifics of such formulation are disclosed in Schwartz, et al., U. S. Patent No.
5,610,173, issued March 11, 1997, which patent is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.
In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
The pharmacological compositions herein also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include but are not limited to calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
(iii) Dosage.
Pharmacological compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an amount effective to achieve its intended purpose. More specifically, a therapeutically effective amount means an amount of compound effective to prevent, alleviate or ameliorate symptoms of disease or prolong the survival of the subject being treated. Determination of a therapeutically effective amount is well within the capability of those skilled in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein and, with regard to BCNU, existing literature.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
For MCTA, the dosage and interval should be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the compound at or above the amount necessary to maintain the PDGF-mediated signal transduction inhibiting effects of the compound. HPLC assays _ 5 or bioassays can be used to determine plasma concentrations.
Dosage intervals for MCTA can also be determined using plasma concentrations. MCTA should be administered using a regimen which maintains plasma levels above, preferably well above, the level necessary to elicit its therapeutic effect for 10-90~ of the time, preferably between 50-90o and most preferably between 70-900.
In cases of local administration or selective uptake, the effective local concentration of the drug may not be related to plasma concentration.
The amount of both MCTA and BCNU administered will, of course, be dependent on the subject being treated, on the subject's weight (from which body surface area is calculated), the severity of the cancer, the manner of administration and the judgment of the prescribing physician.
Since MCTA is cytostatic rather than cytotoxic, it is a feature of this invention that MCTA be administered to a patient throughout all or a substantial portion of a course of treatment with the combination of MCTA and BCNU. A "course of treatment" is defined as a time period over which a complete cycle of a pre-determined regimen of administration of MCTA
and BCNU is performed.
With regard to the pre-determined regime of a course of treatment, such regime may entail simultaneous administration of MCTA and BCNU or sequential administration of the drugs in such order, dosages and intervals as are deemed most appropriate with regard to a particular patient by the treating physician. Or, MCTA may be administered prior to administration of BCNU. Conversely, BCNU can be administered before treatment with MCTA begins. Preferable, however, MCTA
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/iJS98/10174_ is administered to the patient in a "loading dose" prior to administration of BCNU.
As used herein, a "loading dose" refers to an initial dose or doses of a drug given to create an initial level of the 5 drug in the body of the patient prior to the administration of another drug. The loading dose may be administered as a single dose, as a continuous infusion over time or as several discrete administrations of equal or unequal doses at discrete intervals. The time period over which the loading dose is 10 administered may vary as seen fit by the prescribing physician.
Preferable, however, the loading dose is administered over a period of 3 to 6 days either as a continuous infusion or as equal doses given on each day of the loading dose period. The loading dose may be from 100 to 550 mg/mz/day. Preferable, the 15 loading dose is 200 to 500 mg/mZ/day. Most preferably, it is from 350 - 950 mg/m2/day. The exact amount of the loading dose would, of course, be determined by the treating physician on a case-by-case basis.
In a preferred embodiment of this invention BCNU is 20 administered on the day immediately following completion of the loading dose. The BCNU may be administered in a single dose or in smaller doses given over a period of several days. The amount of BCNU administered may be from 75 to 200 mg/m2.
Actual choice of dosage is likewise within the province of the 25 treating physician. Preferable, however, the BCNU is administered in a single dose of from 150 to 200 mg/m2.
The overall course of treatment may vary extensively depending on the judgment of the treating physician.
Preferable it is from 6 to 8 weeks. During the course of 30 treatment, maintenance doses of MCTA are administered either for the entire duration of the course of treatment or for any portion thereof. Such maintenance doses may be administered at intervals of from 2 to 10 days apart. Preferable, the maintenance doses are administered 6-7 days apart and the 35 number of such maintenance doses is from 5 to 10, preferable SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98110174_ at a rate of one maintenance dose per week for the entire course of treatment; e.g., if an 8 week course of treatment is selected, a maintenance dose of MCTA is administered during each of those weeks at approximately one-week intervals. The amount of the maintenance dose would be selected by the treating physician but is preferably in the range of 100 to 555 _ mg/m2/week, more preferable 200 to 450 mg/m2/week and most preferably, from 350 to 450 mg/m2/week.
A "maintenance dose" refers to an additional dose or doses of the drug given initially as a loading dose, the purpose being to maintain the level of the drug or its metabolite achieved by the loading dose for an extended period of time.
At the conclusion of a course of treatment, the patient is evaluated and, if the indications, including but not limited to, positive response to the therapy and no signs of serious side effects, are appropriate in the eyes of the treating physician, the course of treatment may be repeated. The number of repeat courses of treatment is left to the discretion of the treating physician and should be limited only by the determination by the treating physician that continued treatment could be detrimental to the patient.
It is of course to be understood that dosages different from those described above may be administered and still be within the scope and spirit of this invention. For instance, different routes of administration, such as direct injection into a tumor or interstitial implantation would be expected to permit even lower doses than those discussed herein due to less likelihood of dilution and metabolic decomposition when the target is more directly addressed. It would be most beneficial to be able to lower the dosage of the more individually toxic of the two drugs of the combination, BCNU, with 50 - 100 mg/m2 below the dosage usually recommended by the commercial suppliers of the drug as a reasonable target. In addition, as discussed previously herein, employing other known SUBSTITUTE SHEET { rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10i74 chemotherapeutic agents along with the core duo of MCTA and BCNU could permit lower dosages of BCNU concomitant with equally low doses of the added drug. Again, so long as the unique combination of MCTA with a nitrosourea is part of the combination therapy, the combination is within the scope and spirit of this invention.
The unexpected synergistic activity of the combination of MCTA with BCNU without apparent increase in overall toxicity suggests that MCTA might also work in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents as well. For instance, the combination of MCTA with other alkylating agents might likewise afford synergistic activity without concomitant increased toxicity.
Such alkylating agents could include, without limitation, the alkyl sulfonates; e.g., busulfan (used for treatment of chronic granulocytic leukemia), improsulfan and piposulfan; the aziridines; e.g., benzodepa, carboquone, meturedepa, and uredepa; the ethyleneimines and methylmelamines; e.g., altretamine, triethylenemelamine, triethylenephosphoramide, triethylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolmelamine and the nitrogen mustards; e.g., chlorambucil (used in treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, primary macroglobulinemia and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma), cyclophosphamide (used in treatment of Hodgkin's disease, multiple myeloma, neuroblastoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, lung cancer, Wilm's tumor and rhabdomyosarcoma), estramustine, ifosfamide, novembrichin, prednimustine and uracil mustard (for primary thrombocytosis, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, Hodgkin's disease and ovarian cancer);
and the triazines; e.g., dacarbazine (used for soft-tissue sarcoma).
Likewise, MCTA could have a beneficial effect in combination with the antimetabolite chemotherapeutic agents such as, without limitation, the folic acid analogs (e. g., methotrexate (used in treating acute lymphocytic leukemia, choriocarcinoma, mycosis fungoides, breast, neck and head and lung cancer, osteogenic sarcoma) and pteropterin); the SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ pyrimidine analogs (fluorouracil (5-FU) used in treatment of breast, colon, stomach, pancreatic, ovarian, head and neck, and urinary cancers as well as topically for premalignant skin lesions and cytarabine (acute granulocytic and acute lymphocytic leukemias) and the purine analogs such at mercaptopurine and thioguanine which find use in the treatment of acute granulocytic, acute lymphocytic and chronic granulocytic ieukemias).
MCTA could also prove effective in combination with natural product chemotherapeutic agents such as, without limitation, the vinca alkaloids (vinblastine (used for breast and testicular cancer), vincristine and vindesine), the epipodophylotoxins (etoposide, teniposide (both used in the treatment of testicular cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma)), the antibiotic chemotherapeutic agents (daunorubicin, doxorubicin, bleomycin mitomycin (used for stomach, cervix, colon, breast, bladder and pancreatic cancer)), dactinomycin, plicamycin, bleomycin (used for skin, esophagus and genitourinary tract cancer) and the enzymatic chemotherapeutic agents such as L
Asparaginase.
Based on the disclosures of this invention, MCTA might also benefit the activity of chemotherapeutic agents such as platinum coordination complexes (cisplatin, etc.), substituted ureas (hyroxyurea), methylhydrazine derivatives (procarbazine), adrenocortical suppressants (mitotane, aminoglutethimide) as well as hormones and antagonists such as adrenocorticosteroids (prednisone), progestins (hydroxyprogesterone caproate), estrogens (diethylstilbestrol), antiestrogens (tamoxifen) and androgens (testosterone propionate).
Finally, the combination of MCTA with mitoxantrone or paclitaxel might be expected to display especially beneficial . results in the treatment of solid tumors.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) H. Measurement Of Cell Toxicity Therapeutic compounds should be more potent in inhibiting receptor tyrosine kinase activity than in exerting a cytotoxic effect. A measure of the effectiveness and cell toxicity of a compound can be obtained by determining the therapeutic index: ICso/LDSO. ICSO, the dose required to achieve 50%
inhibition, can be measured using standard techniques such as those described herein. LDSO, the dosage which results in 500 toxicity, can also be measured by standard techniques (Mossman, 1983, J. Immunol. Methods, 65:55-53), by measuring the amount of LDH released (Korzeniewski and Callewaert, 1983, J. Immunol.
Methods, 64:314; Decker and Lohmann-Matthes, 1988, J. Immunol.
Methods, 115:61), or by measuring the lethal dose in animal models. Compounds with a large therapeutic index are preferred. The therapeutic index should be greater than 2, preferably at least 10, more preferably at least 50.
Synthesis The compounds of this invention may be readily synthesized using techniques well known in the chemical arts.
The following syntheses are shown by way of example only and are not to be construed as limiting in any way. In fact, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that other synthetic pathways for forming the compounds of the invention are available and that the following are but a few of the possible routes to the claimed compounds.
a. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
_ _______, _ Ethyl propiolate (2.8 g) and pyrrolidine (1.4 g) in 5 ml of acetonitrile are mixed at room temperature for 1 hour, the solvent evaporated and the ethyl 3-pyrrolidin-1-acrylate used as isolated or distilled under vacuum. Triethylamine (0.25 ml) is added to a mixture of 1.8 g of ethyl 3-pyrrolidin-1-acrylate, 0.9 g of nitroethane and 2.5 g of phenyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) isothiocyanate in 10 ml of toluene at room temperature and stirred overnight. The mixture is then refluxed for 0.5 hour, cooled, and the diphenylurea removed by filtration. The mixture is washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous _ 5 sodium sulfate, and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to give 1.4 g of ethyl 3-methyl-9-isoxazolecarboxylate. ( Stork, G., McMurry, J. C., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 89, 5461,1967).
Ethyl 3-methyl-4-isoxazolecarboxylate (1.3 g) is stirred at room temperature overnight in 5 ml of ethanol and 10 ml of 10 2.5 N sodium hydroxide. Dilution with water, cooling in ice, and acidification to pH 2 with 6 N hydrochloric acid precipitates an off-white solid which is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol/water, and dried under vacuum to give 1.0 g of 3-methyl-4-isoxazolecarboxylic acid.
15 3-Methyl-9-isoxazolecarboxylic acid (0.9 g) is stirred with 5 ml of thionyl chloride at room temperature for one hour .and the mixture evaporated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in 5 ml tetrahydrofuran and 1 ml of pyridine containing 1.2 g of 4-trifluoromethylaniline and stirred 20 overnight. The mixture is refluxed for one hour, cooled and diluted with water to give an off-white precipitate. The solid is collected by vacuum filtation, washed with ethanol/water and dried under vacuum to give 1.2 g of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
25 b. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
isoxazole A solution of 5.5 g of 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in 6 ml of toluene at i20 °C is treated with 5.4 g of 2,2,5-trimethyl-4H-1,3-dioxin-4-one. The mixture is refluxed for four hours 30 and cooled. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, - washed with toluene and dried to give 6 g of N-[4 (trifluoromethyl)phenylacetoacetamide.
N-[9-(Trifluoromethyl)phenylacetoacetamide (6 g), 4 g of triethylorthoformate and 8 g of acetic anhydride is cautiously SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) heated to reflux for 2 hours. The reaction is cooled to room temperature and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration and dried to give 4 g of N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide.
N-[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)-acetoacetamide (9 g) is suspended in 10 ml of ethanol treated with 1.5 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 10 ml of water which has been adjusted to pH 5 with sodium hydroxide. The mixture is stirred and warmed to 40 °C for 2 hours, then cooled to room temperature and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration. Sodium hydroxide (1 g) is added to the filtrate which is stirred for 30 minutes. The mixture is acidified to pH 2 with 6 N hydrochloric acid and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration. The filtrate is then diluted with 100 ml of water and allowed to stand at 4 °C overnight. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol:water 2:1 and dried to give 300 mg of crude 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole. The crude is purified on a column of silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane 1:4 to give 100 mg of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, an off-white solid.
c. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole N-[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene) acetoacetamide (1 g) in 3 ml of ethanol is stirred overnight with 0.3 g of hydrazine hydrate. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol: water 2:1 and dried to give 0.3 g of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole as an off-white solid.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
d 3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole By substituting 2-aminopyridine for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in a, the identical process gives 1 g of 3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole as an off-white solid.
_e 3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole By substituting 2-aminopyridine for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in the first two steps of the process of b, the identical process gives 2.5 g of N-(pyrid-2-yl)-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide. By substituting N-(pyrid-2-yl)-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide for N-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenyl]-2-ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide in c, the identical process gives 0.3 g of 3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole as an off-white solid.
f. 3-Cvclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole By substituting cyclopropylnitromethane (Williams et al (1965) J. O~. Chem. 30: 2674-2675) for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 1.2 g of 3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole as an off white solid.
g. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole Methyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate (1.9 g) and 1.6 g of 4 (trifluoromethyl)aniline are heated to 160 °C overnight. When the crude product (or the product purified by crystallization or silica gel chromatography) is substituted for N-[9-trifluoromethylphenyl]acetoacetamide in the second step of b, the identical process gives N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl]-2-. (ethoxymethylene)-cyclopropylcarbonylacetamide. When N-[4 trifluoromethylphenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)cyclopropylcarbonyl acetamide is substituted for N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2 (ethoxymethylene)-acetoacetamide in c, the identical process SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) gives 3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole.
h. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole When 2-aminopyridine is substituted for 4-(trifluoro methyl)aniline in f, the identical process gives 3-cyclopropyl 4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole.
i. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole When 2-aminopyridine is substituted for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in g, the identical process gives 3-cyciopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole.
j. 3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino carbonyl] isoxazole By substituting 3-methyl-4(trifluoromethyl)aniline (Tordeaux, M., et al {1990) J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. EN 8:
2293-2299) and 4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)aniline (Jagupolski, M. (1954) Zh. Obshch. Khim. 24: 887-893, Engl. Ausg. S. 885-889)for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in the identical process of a, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocar-bonyl]isoxazole and 9-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole are prepared.
k. 3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino carbonyl]pyrazole By substituting the appropriate amine for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in the identical process of ~, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole are prepared.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
1 3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-_ 5 carbonyl]isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-_ carbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting 4-vitro-1-butene (Seebach, D., et al (1978) Angew. Chem. GE 90: 479-480) for nitroethane in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in _a, the identical process gives 3-allyl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 3-allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3-allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoro-methyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole and 3-allyl-4-[9-(tri-fluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
m. 3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-Allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3-Allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole;
3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting methyl 3-butenoate for methyl cyciopropylcarbonylacetate in g, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in q, the identical process gives 3-allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocar-bonyl] pyrazole, 3-allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole), 3-allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole, and 3-allyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenyl-aminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
n 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3,5-Dimethyl-9-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) 70 _ _ .
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]-isoxazole.
By using 3,5-dimethyl-4-chlorocarbonylisoxazole or by substituting ethyl methylpropiolate f or ethyl propiolate in a and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole , 3,5-dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole (Example 25), and 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole.
o. 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) henylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3,5-Dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl-aminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting triethylorthoacetate for triethylortho-formate in the second step of b, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 9-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in b, the identical process gives the corresponding substituted 2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamides. By substituting the corresponding substituted 2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamides for N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)aceto-acetamide in c, the identical process gives 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyrazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyrazole, and 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ p. 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl) isoxazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-chlorophenylpropiolate (Newman, M. (1955) J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 77:5549) for ethyl. propiolate in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
q. 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl) pyrazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-9-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting methyl 2-chlorobenzoylacetate for methylcyclopropylcarbonylacetate in g., and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in g, the identical process with triethylorthoacetate substituted for triethylorthoformate in b, gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]prazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
r. 5-(2-Chloro henyl)-3-cyclopro yl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)isoxazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-chlorophenylpropiolate for ethyl propiolate and cyclopropylnitromethane for nitroethane in _a, and then the appropriate amines for 9-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] isoxa-zole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)isoxazole, and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-9-[3-methyl-9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
s. S-(2-Chloro henyl)-3-cyclopro yl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] yrazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)pyrazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in ~, and then by substituting triethyl-2-chloroorthobenzoate for triethylorthoformate in _b, the identical process of ~ gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyra-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ -zole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl) pyrazole, and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
t. 3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3-(2-carboxy- ethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 4-(t-butoxycarbonylethyl) nitrobutane (from 9-nitrobutyric acid methyl ester, Bissell, E. R. et al., Tetrahedron (1970), p 5737 - 5743) for ethyl propiolate in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4 (trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process followed by removal of the t-butyl group gives 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[9 (trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 3-(2-carboxy ethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, and 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl-aminocarbonyl]isoxazole u. 3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-(t-butoxycarbonyl)priopiono-acetate for ethyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate in g, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) aniline in g, the identical process, followed by removal of the t-butyl group, gives 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole, and 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
v. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-isoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyl-isoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
By substituting 6-amino-1,3-benzodioxane for 4-(trifluoro methyl)aniline in a, and then substituting the appropriate substituted priopiolates for methyl priopiolate and/or the appropriate substituted nitromethanes for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclo-propylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole,4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocar-bonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-isoxazole.
w. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-pyrazole;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) i~VO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyl-pyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole;
5 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
By substituting 6-amino-1, 3-benzodioxane for 4 10 (trifluoromethyl)aniline in q, and then the appropriate substituted acetoacetate for methyl cyclopropylcarbonyl acetoacetate and/or the appropriate substituted orthoester for triethylorthoformate in the second step of b, the identical process of the second step of b and of ~ gives 4-(1,3 15 benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyipyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyra-20 zole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chloro-phenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
x. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxa-zole;
25 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylisoxa-zole;
9-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-30 methylisoxazole;
- 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
. By substituting 5-amino-I,3-benzodioxole for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, and then substituting the SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ -appropriate substituted propiolic ester for ethyl propiolate and/or the appropriate stubstituted nitromethane for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
y- 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methyl-pyrazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-amino-carbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-pyrazole; .
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethyl-pyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
By substituting 5-amino-1,3-benzodioxole for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in ~, and then substituting the appropriate substituted acetoacetate for ethyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate and/or the appropriate substituted orthoformate for triethylorthoformate in the second step of b, the identical process of the second step of b and of ~ gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole, 9-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole, and 9-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) z 3 Methyl 4-[4-(trifluoro- methyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]-3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)thiazole;
3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole;
3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]thiazole.
By substituting 3-methyl-4-thiazole carboxylic acid (Buttimore, D. et al.: J. Chem. Soc. (1963) p 2032 - 2039) for 3-methyl-4-isoxazole carboxylic acid in a, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in _a, the identical process gives 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole, 3-methyl-9-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)thiazole, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole, and 3-methyl-9 [4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole.
_Brief Description of the Tables Table 1 is a comparison of the activity of MCTA, its metabolite and a compound of this invention as inhibitors of FGF induced DNA synthesis alone or with added uridine.
Table 2 shows the results of the ability of several of the compounds of this invention to inhibit DNA synthesis induced by FGF, PDGF and EGF.
Table 3 shows the results of a subcutaneous xenograft experiment testing the ability of Cmpd. 1 to inhibit tumor growth in vivo and, in addition, testing the toxic effects of Cmpd. 1 at the dose used.
Table 4 demonstrates that MCTA inhibits the specific biological response of cells to FGF while having no effect on the response of the cells to EGF. MCTA also inhibits the specific biological responses to PDGF. The results are shown as IC50s, the concentration at which 50~ of the maximal BrdU
- incorporation response is inhibited.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 5 shows the results of subcutaneous xenograft experiments wherein administration of MCTA significantly inhibited the growth of tumors associated with FGFR activity with no significant effect on a non-FGFR expressing tumor thus demonstrating MCTA's effectiveness as a treatment for cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity.
Brief Description of the Figures Figure 1 graphically depicts the effect over time of 20, 10, 5.0 and 2.5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5 methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone on tumor weight compared to that in the untreated controls.
Figure 2 is a graph of the effect over time of 27, 18, 12 and 8.0 mg/kg BCNU alone on tumor weight compared to the untreated control.
Figure 3 is a graphical comparison of the effect over time of 10.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 18 mg/kg BCNU alone and the combination of 10.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 18 mg/kg BCNU, administered as described in Section 4, below, compared to the control.
Figure 4 is a graph of the effect over time on tumor weight of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone and the combination of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU, again, compared to the untreated control.
Figure 5 graphically compares the effect over time on tumor weight of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 18 mg/kg BCNU alone, the combination, in the manner described in Section 9, below, of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 18 mg/kg BCNU and the untreated control.
Figure 6 is a graph depicting the effect over time on tumor weight of 5.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/101?4 methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone, the combination of 5.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU, compared as before with the untreated control.
Biological Evaluation Methods It will be appreciated that, in any given series of compounds, a spectrum of biological activity will be afforded.
In its most preferred embodiments, this invention relates to novel heteroarylcarboxamides demonstrating the ability to modulate PTK activity. The following assays are employed to select those compounds demonstrating the optimal degree of the desired activity.
As used herein, the phrase "optimal degree of the desired activity" refers to the lowest IC50, defined elsewhere herein, against a PTK related to a particular disorder so as to provide an organism, preferably a human, with a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of this invention at the lowest possible dosage.
The following in vitro assays may be used to determine the level of activity and effect of the different compounds of the present invention on one or more of the RTKs. Similar assays can be designed along the same lines for any PTK using techniques well known in the art.
The cellular/catalytic assays described herein are performed in an ELISA format. The general procedure is a follows: a compound is introduced to cells expressing the test kinase, either naturally or recombinantly, for a selected period of time after which, if the test kinase is a receptor, a ligand known to activate the receptor's activity is added.
The cells are lysed and the lysate is transferred to the wells of an ELISA plate previously coated with a specific antibody recognizing the substrate of the enzymatic phosphorylation _ reaction. Non-substrate components of the cell lysate are washed away and the amount of phosphorylation on the substrate SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) is detected with an antibody specifically recognizing phosphotyrosi.ne compared with control cells that were not contacted with a test compound.
The cellular/biologic assays described herein measure the 5 amount of DNA made in response to activation of a test kinase, which is a general measure of a proliferative response. The general procedure for this assay is as follows: a compound is introduced to cells expressing the test kinase, either naturally or recombinantly, for a selected period of time after 10 which, if the test kinase is a receptor, a ligand known to activate the receptor's activity is added. After incubation at least overnight, a DNA labeling reagent such as Bromodeoxy-uridine (BrdU) or 3H-thymidine is added. The amount of labeled DNA is detected with either an anti-BrdU antibody 15 or by measuring radioactivity and is compared to control cells not contacted with a test compound.
1. Cellular/Catalytic Assays Enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISA) may be used to 20 detect and measure the presence of PTK activity. The ELISA may be conducted according to known protocols which are described in, for example, Voller, et al., 1980, "Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay," In: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d ed., edited by Rose and Friedman, pp 359-371 Am. Soc. Of 25 Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
The disclosed protocol may be adapted for determining activity with respect to a specific RTK. For example, the preferred protocols for conducting the ELISA experiments for specific RTKs is provided below. Adaptation of these protocols 30 for determining a compound's activity for other members of the RTK family, as well as for CTKs, is well within the scope of knowledge of those skilled in the art.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) _ WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 81 ' a. FLK-1 An ELISA assay can be conducted to measure the kinase activity of the FLK-1 receptor and more specifically, the inhibition or activation of TK activity on the FLK-1 receptor.
Specifically, the following assay can be conducted to measure kinase activity of the FLK-1 receptor in cells genetically engineered to express Flk-1.
Materials And Methods Materials. The following reagents and supplies are being used:
a. Corning 96-well ELISA plates (Corning Catalog No.
25805-96);
b. Cappel goat anti-rabbit IgG (catalog no. 55641);
c. PBS (Gibco Catalog No. 450-1400EB);
d. TBSW Buffer (50 mM Tris (pH 7.2), 150 mM NaCl and 0.1% Tween-20);
e. Ethanolamine stock (10% ethanolamine (pH 7.0), stored at 4C);
f. HNTG buffer (20mM HEPES buffer (pH 7.5), 150mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton X-100, and 10% glycerol):
g. EDTA (0.5 M (pH 7.0) as a 100X stock);
h. Sodium ortho vanadate (0.5 M as a 100X stock);
i. Sodium pyro phosphate (0.2M as a 100X stock);
j. NUNC 96 well V bottom polypropylene plates (Applied Scientific Catalog No. AS-72092);
k. NIH3T3 C7#3 Cells (FLK-1 expressing cells);
1. DMEM with 1X high glucose L Glutamine (catalog No.
11965-050);
m. FBS, Gibco (catalog no. 16000-028);
n. L-glutamine, Gibco (catalog no. 25030-016);
o. VEGF, PeproTech, Inc. (catalog no. 100-20)(kept as 1 ~g/100~1 stock in Milli-Q dH20 and stored at -20C:
p. Affinity purified anti-FLK-1 antiserum;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) q. UB40 monoclonal antibody specific for phosphotyrosine (see, Fendley, et al., 1990, Cancer Research 50:1550-1558);
r. EIA grade Goat anti-mouse IgG-POD (BioRad catalog no. 172-1011);
s. 2,2-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-6-sulfonic acid (ABTS) solution (100mM citric acid (anhydrous), 250 mM Na2HP04 (pH 4.0), 0.5 mg/ml ABTS (Sigma catalog no. A-1888)), solution should be stored in dark at 4°C until ready for use;
t. H202 (30% solution)(Fisher catalog no. H325);
u. ABTS/H202 (15m1 ABTS solution, 2 ~.1 H202) prepared 5 minutes before use and left at room temperature;
v. 0.2 M HCl stock in H20;
w. dimethylsulfoxide (100%)(Sigma Catalog No. D-8418);
and y. Trypsin-EDTA (Gibco BRL Catalog No. 25200-049).
Protocol. The following protocol is being used for conducting the assay:
1. Coat Corning 96-well elisa plates with 1.O~.g per well Cappel Anti-rabbit IgG antibody in O.1M Na2C03 pH 9.6.
Bring final volume to 150 ul per well. Coat plates overnight at 4°C. Plates can be kept up to two weeks when stored at 4°C.
2. Grow cells in Growth media(DMEM, supplemental with 2.OmM L-Glutamine, 10% FBS) in suitable culture dishes until confluent at 37°C, 5% CO2.
3. Harvest cells by trypsinization and seed in Corning 25850 polystyrene 96-well roundbottom cell plates, 25.000 cells/well in 200u1 of growth media.
4. Grow cells at least one day at 37°C, 5% C02.
5. Wash cells with D-PBS 1X.
6. Add 200u1/well of starvation media (DMEM, 2.OmM 1-Glutamine, 0.1% FBS). Incubate overnight at 37°C, 5% COz.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 7. Dilute Compounds 1:20 in polypropylene 96 well plates using starvation media. Dilute dimethylsulfoxide 1:20 for use in control wells.
8. Remove starvation media from 96 well cell culture _ 5 plates and add 162 ul of fresh starvation media to each well.
9. Add 18u1 of 1:20 diluted Compound dilution (from step 7) to each well plus the 1:20 dimethylsulfoxide dilution to the control wells (+/- VEGF), for a final dilution of 1:200 after cell stimulation. Final dimethylsulfoxide is 0.5%.
Incubate the plate at 37°C, 5% COZ for two hours.
10. Remove unbound antibody from ELISA plates by inverting plate to remove liquid. Wash 3 times with TBSW +
0.5% ethanolamine, pH 7Ø Pat the plate on a paper towel to remove excess liquid and bubbles.
11. Block plates with TBSW + 0.5% Ethanolamine, pH 7.0, 150 ul per well. Incubate plate thirty minutes while shaking on a microtiter plate shaker.
12. Wash plate 3 times as described in step 10.
13. Add 0.5ug/well affinity purified anti-FLU-1 polyclonal rabbit antiserum. Bring final volume to 150u1/well with TBSW + 0.5% ethanolamine pH 7Ø Incubate plate for thirty minutes while shaking.
14. Add 180 ul starvation medium to the cells and stimulate cells with 20u1/well lO.OmM sodium orthovanadate and 500 ng/ml VEGF (resulting in a final concentration of l.OmM
sodium orthovanadate and 50ng/ml VEGF per well) for eight minutes at 37°C, 5% CO2. Negative control wells receive only starvation medium.
15. After eight minutes, media should be removed from the cells and washed one time with 200u1/well PBS.
16. Lyse cells in 150u1/well HNTG while shaking at room temperature for five minutes. HNTG formulation includes sodium orthovanadate, sodium pyrophosphate and EDTA.
17. Wash ELISA plate three times as described in step 10.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
84 , _ 18. Transfer cell lysates from the cell plate to ELISA
plate and incubate while shaking for two hours. To transfer cell lysate pipette up and down while scrapping the wells.
19. Wash plate three times as described in step 10.
20. Incubate ELISA plate with 0.02ug/well UB40 in TBSW
+ 0.5% ethanolamine. Bring final volume to 150u1/well.
Incubate while shaking for 30 minutes.
21. Wash plate three times as described in step 10.
22. Incubate ELISA plate with 1:10,000 diluted EIA grade goat anti-mouse IgG conjugated horseradish peroxidase in TBSW
+ 0.5o ethanolamine, pH 7Ø Bring final volume to 150u1/well.
Incubate while shaking for thirty minutes.
23. Wash plate as described in step 10.
24. Add 100 ul of ABTS/H20z solution to well. Incubate ten minutes while shaking.
25. Add 100 ul of 0.2 M HC1 for 0.1 M HC1 final to stop the color development reaction. Shake 1 minute at room temperature. Remove bubbles with slow stream of air and read the ELISA plate in an ELISA plate reader at 410 nm.
b. HER-2 ELISA
Assay 1: EGF Receptor-HER2 Chimeric Receptor Assay In Whole Cells.
HER2 kinase activity in whole EGFR-NIH3T3 cells are measured as described below:
Materials and Reagents. The following materials and reagents are being used to conduct the assay:
a. EGF: stock concentration - 16.5 ILM; EGF 201, TOYOBO, Co., Ltd. Japan.
b. 05-101 (UBI) (a monoclonal antibody recognizing an EGFR extracellular domain).
c. Anti-phosphotyrosine antibody (anti-Ptyr) (poly-clonal)(see, Fendley, et al., supra).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) d. Detection antibody: Goat anti-rabbit 1gG horse radish peroxidase conjugate, TAGO, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
e. TBST buffer:
5 Tris-HC1, pH 7.2 50 mM
NaCl 150 mM
Triton X-100 0.1 f. HNTG 5X stock:
HEPES 0.1 M
10 NaCl 0.75 M
Glycerol 50~
Triton X-100 l.Oa g. ABTS stock:
Citric Acid 100 mM
15 Na2HP0q 250 mM
HC1, conc. 0.5 pM
ABTS* 0.5mg/ml *2,2'azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazolinesulfonic acid).
Keep solution in dark at 4C until use.
20 h. Stock reagents of:
EDTA 100 mM pH 7.0 Na3V09 0.5 M
Naq ( PZO~ ) 0 . 2 M
Pro cedure. The following protocol is being used:
A. Pre-coat ELISA Plate 1. Coat ELISA plates (Corning, 96 well, Cat. #25805-96) with OS-101 antibody at 0.5 g per well in PBS, 100 ul final volume/well, and store overnight at 4°C. Coated plates are good for up to 10 days when stored at 4°C.
2. On day of use, remove coating buffer and replace - with 100 ul blocking buffer (5$ Carnation Instant Non-Fat Dry Milk in PBS). Incubate the plate, shaking, at room temperature (about 23°C to 25°C) for 30 minutes. Just prior to use, remove 3.5 blocking buffer and wash plate 4 times with TBST buffer.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) B. Seeding Cells 1. An NIH3T3 cell line overexpressing a chimeric receptor containing the EGFR extracellular domain and intracellular HER2 kinase domain can be used for this assay.
2. Choose dishes having 80-90o confluence for the experiment. Trypsinize cells and stop reaction by adding 100 fetal bovine serum. Suspend cells in DMEM medium (10% CS DMEM
medium) and centrifuge once at 1500 rpm, at room temperature for 5 minutes.
3. Resuspend cells in seeding medium (DMEM, 0.5o bovine serum), and count the cells using trypan blue. Viability above 90°s is acceptable. Seed cells in DMEM medium (0.5% bovine serum) at a density of 10,000 cells per well, 100 ul per well, in a 96 well microtiter plate. Incubate seeded cells in 5% COZ
at 37°C for about 40 hours.
C. Assay Procedures 1. Check seeded cells for contamination using an inverted microscope. Dilute drug stock (10 mg/ml in DMSO) 1:10 in DMEM medium, then transfer 5 ~,1 to a TBST well for a final drug dilution of 1:200 and a final DMSO concentration of 10.
Control wells receive DMSO alone. Incubate in 5o COZ at 37°C
for two hours.
2. Prepare EGF ligand: dilute stock EGF in DMEM so that upon transfer of 10 ul dilute EGF (1:12 dilution), 100 nM final concentration is attained.
3. Prepare fresh HNTG* sufficient for 100 ul per well;
and place on ice.
HNTG* (10 ml):
HNTG stock 2.0 ml milli-Q HZO 7.3 ml EDTA, 100 mM, pH 7.0 0.5 ml -Na3V09, 0.5 M 0.1 ml Na9 ( P20~ ) , 0 . 2 M 0 . 1 ml , SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 4. After 120 minutes incubation with drug, add prepared SGF ligand to cells, 10 ul per well, to a final concentration of 100 nM. Control wells receive DMEM alone. Incubate, shaking, at room temperature, for 5 minutes.
5. Remove drug, EGF, and DMEM. Wash cells twice with PBS. Transfer HNTG* to cells, 100 ul per well. Place on ice for 5 minutes. Meanwhile, remove blocking buffer from other ELISA plate and wash with TBST as described above.
6. With a pipette tip securely fitted to a micropipettor, scrape cells from plate and homogenize cell material by repeatedly aspirating and dispensing the HNTG*
lysis buffer. Transfer lysate to a coated, blocked, and washed ELISA plate. Incubate shaking at room temperature for one hour.
7. Remove lysate and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly diluted anti-Ptyr antibody to ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes in the presence of the anti-Ptyr antiserum (1:3000 dilution in TBST).
8. Remove the anti-Ptyr antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer the freshly diluted TAGO anti-rabbit IgG
antibody to the ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes (anti-rabbit IgG
antibody: 1:3000 dilution in TBST).
9. Remove TAGO detection antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly prepared ABTS/H202 solution to ELISA
plate, 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 20 minutes . (ABTS/H20Z solution: 1 . 0 ul 30 o H202 in 10 ml ABTS stock).
10 . Stop reaction by adding 50 ul 5N H2S09 ( optional ) , and determine O.D. at 410 nm.
11. The maximal phosphotyrosine signal is determined by subtracting the value of the negative controls from the positive controls. The percent inhibition of phosphotyrosine content for extract-containing wells is then calculated, after subtraction of the negative controls.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) c. PDGF-R ELISA
All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum can be purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95o air and 5-loo COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for ' mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
For ELISA assays, cells (U1242, obtained from Joseph "
Schlessinger, NYU) are grown to 80-90% confluency in growth medium (MEM with loo FBS, NEAA, 1 mM NaPyr and 2 mM GLN) and seeded in 96-well tissue culture plates in 0.5o serum at 25,000 to 30,000 cells per well. After overnight incubation in 0.5%
serum-containing medium, cells are changed to serum-free medium and treated with test compound for 2 hr in a 5o C02, 37°C
incubator. Cells are then stimulated with ligand for 5-10 minute followed by lysis with HNTG (20 mM Hepes, 150 mM NaCl, loo glycerol, 5 mM EDTA, 5 mM Na3V04, 0.2o Triton X-100, and 2 mM NaPyr). Cell lysates (0.5 mg/well in PBS) are transferred to ELISA plates previously coated with receptor-specific antibody and which had been blocked with 5o milk in TBST (50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.2, 150 mM NaCl and O.lo Triton X-100) at room temperature for 30 min. Lysates are incubated with shaking for 1 hour at room temperature. The plates are washed with TBST
four times and then incubated with polyclonal anti-phosphotyrosine antibody at room temperature for 30 minutes.
Excess anti-phosphotyrosine antibody was removed by rinsing the plate with TBST four times. Goat anti-rabbit IgG antibody was added to the ELISA plate for 30 min at room temperature followed by rinsing with TBST four more times. ABTS (100 mM
citric acid, 250 mM Na2HP09 and 0.5 mg/ml 2,2'-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-6-sulfonic acid)) plus H202 (1.2 ml 30% H202 to 10 ml ABTS) was added to the ELISA plates to start color development. Absorbance at 410 nm with a reference wavelength of 630 nm was recorded about 15 to 30 min after ABTS addition.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) 89 - . -d. IGF-I
Receptor ELISA
The following protocol may be used to measure phosphotyrosine level on IGF-I
receptor, which indicates IGF-I
receptor tyrosine kinase activity.
- 5 Materials And Reagents.
The following materials and reagents are used:
a. The cell line used in this assay is 3T3/IGF-1R, a cell line genetically engineered to overexpresses IGF-1 receptor.
b. NIH3T3/IGF-1R is grown in an incubator with 5o C02 at 37C. The growth media is DMEM + loo FBS (heat inactivated)+ 2mM L-glutamine.
c. Affinity purified anti-IGF-1R antibody 17-69.
d. D-PBS:
KH2P04 0.20 g/1 KZHPO9 2.16 g/1 KC1 0.20 g/1 NaCl 8.00 g/1 (pH 7.2) e. Blocking Buffer: TBST plus 5o Milk (Carnation Instant Non-Fat Dry Milk).
f. TBST buffer:
Tris-HC1 50 mM
NaCl 150mM (pH 7.2/HC1 lON) Triton X-100 0.1%
Stock solution of TBS (10X) is prepared, and Triton X-100 is added to the buffer during dilution.
g. HNTG buffer:
HEPES 20 mM
NaCl 150 mM (pH 7.2/HC1 1N) Glycerol 10~
Triton X-100 0.2%
Stock solution (5X) is prepared and kept at 4C.
h. EDTA/HC1: 0.5 M pH 7.0 (NaOH) as 100X stock.
i. Na3V04: 0.5 M as 100X stock and aliquots are kept in -80C.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) j . NaQP20~: 0.2 M as 100X stock.
k. Insulin-like growth factor-1 from Promega (Cat#
65111 ) .
1. Rabbit polyclonal anti-phosphotyrosine antiserum.
5 m. Goat anti-rabbit IgG, POD conjugate (detection antibody), Tago (Cat. No. 4520, Lot No. 1802): Tago, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
n. ABTS (2.2'-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazolinesulfonic acid)) solution:
10 Citric acid 100 mM
Na2HP0q 250 mM (pH 4.0/1 N HC1) ABTS 0.5 mg/ml ABTS solution should be kept in dark and 4°C. The solution should be discarded when it turns green.
15 0. Hydrogen Peroxide: 30o solution is kept in the dark and at 4°C.
Procedure. All the following steps are conducted at room temperature unless it is specifically indicated. All ELISA
plate washings are performed by rinsing the plate with tap 20 water three times, followed by one TBST rinse. Pat plate dry with paper towels.
A. Cell Seeding:
1. The cells, grown in tissue culture dish (Corning 25 25020-100) to 80-90o confluence, are harvested with Trypsin EDTA (0.250, 0.5 ml/D-100, GIBCO).
2. Resuspend the cells in fresh DMEM + loo FBS + 2mM L-Glutamine, and transfer to 96-well tissue culture plate (Corning, 25806-96) at 20,000 cells/well (100 ~.1/well).
30 Incubate for 1 day then replace medium to serum-free medium (90/~l) and incubate in 5% COZ and 37°C overnight.
B. ELISA Plate Coating and Blocking:
1. Coat the ELISA plate (Corning 25805-96) with Anti-35 IGF-1R Antibody at 0.5 ~,g/well in 100 ~1 PBS at least 2 hours.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
2. Remove the coating solution, and replace with 100 ul Blocking Buffer, and shake for 30 minutes. Remove the blocking buffer and wash the plate just before adding lysate.
C. Assay Procedures:
1. The drugs are tested in serum-free condition.
2. Dilute drug stock (in 100% DMSO) 1:10 with DMEM in 96-well polypropylene plate, and transfer 10 ul/well of this solution to the cells to achieve final drug dilution 1:100, and final DMSO concentration of 1.0%. Incubate the cells in 5% COZ
at 37°C for 2 hours.
3. Prepare fresh cell lysis buffer (HNTG*) HNTG 2 ml EDTA 0.1 ml Na3V04 0.1 ml Naq ( P207 ) 0 . 1 ml H20 7 . 3 ml 4. After drug incubation for two hours, transfer 10 ul/well of 200nM IGF-1 Ligand in PBS to the cells (Final Conc.
- 20 nM), and incubate at 5% COZ at 37°C for 10 minutes.
5. Remove media and add 100u1/well HNTG* and shake for 10 minutes. Look at cells under microscope to see if they are adequately lysed.
6. Use a 12-channel pipette to scrape the cells from the plate, and homogenize the lysate by repeat aspiration and dispense. Transfer all the lysate to the antibody coated ELISA
plate, and shake for 1 hour.
7. Remove the lysate, wash the plate, transfer anti pTyr (1:3,000 with TBST) 100 ul/well, and shake for 30 minutes.
8. Remove anti-pTyr, wash the plate, transfer Tago (1:3,000 with TBST) 100 ul/well, and shake for 30 minutes.
9. Remove detection antibody, wash the plate, and transfer fresh ABTS/H202 (1.2 ul H202 to 10 ml ABTS) 100 ul/well to the plate to start color development.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 10. Measure OD at 910 nm with a reference wavelength of 630 nm in Dynatec MR5000.
e. EGF Receptor ELISA
EGF Receptor kinase activity in cells genetically engineered to express human EGF-R
is measured as described below:
Materials and Reagents.
The following materials and reagentsare used a. EGF Ligand: stock concentration = 16.5 uM; EGF 201, TOYOBO, Co., Ltd. Japan.
b. 05-101 (UBI) (a monoclonal antibody recognizing an EGFR extracellular domain).
c. Anti-phosphotyosine antibody (anti-Ptyr)(polycional).
d. Detection antibody: Goat anti-rabbit 1gG horse radish peroxidase conjugate, TAGO, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
e. TBST buffer:
Tris-HC1, pH 7 50 mM
NaCl 150 mM
Triton X-100 0.1 f. HNTG 5X stock:
HEPES 0.1 M
NaCl 0.75 M
Glycerol 50 Triton X-100 l.Oo g. ABTS stock:
Citric Acid 100 mM
Na2HP04 250 mM
HC1, conc. 9.0 pH
ABTS~ 0.5 mg/ml Keep solution in dark at 4C until used.
h. Stock reagents of:
EDTA 100 mM pH 7.0 Na3V04 0.5 M
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 93 PCT/US98/10174. -Na4 ( P20~ ) 0 . 2 M
Procedure. The following protocol was used:
A. Pre-coat ELISA Plate 1. Coat ELISA plates (Corning, 96 well, Cat. X25805-96) - 5 with 05-101 antibody at 0.5 ug per well in PBS, 150 ul final volume/well, and store overnight at 4°C. Coated plates are good for up to 10 days when stored at 9°C.
2. On day of use, remove coating buffer and replace with blocking buffer (5% Carnation Instant NonFat Dry Milk in PBS). Incubate the plate, shaking, at room temperature (about 23°C to 25°C) for 30 minutes. Just prior to use, remove blocking buffer and wash plate 4 times with TEST buffer.
B. Seeding Cells 1. NIH 3T3/C7 cell line (Honegger, et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987) can be use for this assay.
2. Choose dishes having 80-90% confluence for the experiment. Trypsinize cells and stop reaction by adding 10%
CS DMEM medium. Suspend cells in DMEM medium (10% CS DMEM
medium) and centrifuge once at 1000 rpm, and once at room temperature for 5 minutes.
3. Resuspend cells in seeding medium (DMEM, C.5% bovine serum), and count the cells using trypan blue. Viability above 90% :.s acceptable. Seed cells in DMEM medium (0.5% bovine serum) at a density of 10,000 cells per well, 100 ul per well, in a 96 well microtiter plate. Incubate seeded cells in 5% COz at 37°C for about 40 hours.
C. Assav Procedures.
1. Check seeded cells for contamination using an inverted microscope. Dilute drug stock (10 mg/ml in DMSO) 1:10 in DMEM medium, then transfer 5 ul to a test well for a final drug dilution of 1:200 and a final DMSO concentration of 1%.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Control wells receive DMSO alone. incubate in 5o COZ at 37°C
for one hour.
2. Prepare EGF ligand: dilute stock EGF in DMEM so that upon transfer of 10 ul dilute EGF (1:12 dilution), 25 nM final concentration is attained.
3. Prepare fresh 10 ml HNTG~ sufficient for 100 ui per well wherein HNTG* comprises: HNTG stock (2.0 ml), milli-Q Hz0 (7.3 ml), EDTA, 100 mM, pH 7.0 (0.5 ml), Na3V04 0.5 M (0.1 ml) and Na4(PzO~), 0.2 M (0.1 ml).
4. Place on ice.
5. After two hours incubation with drug, add prepared EGF ligand to cells, 10 ul per well, to yield a final concentration of 25 nM. Contrcl wells receive DMEM alone.
3ncubat~, shaking, at room temperature, for 5 minutes.
6. Remove drug, EGF, and DMEM. Wash cells twice with PBS. Transfer HNTG~ to cells, 100 ul per well. Place on ice for 5 minutes. Meanwhile, remove blocking buffer from other ELISA plate and wash with TBST as described above.
7. With a pipette tip securely fitted to a micropipettor, scrape cells from plate and homogenize cell material by repeatedly aspirating and dispensing the HNTGa lysis buffer. Transfer lysate to a coated, blocked, and washed ELISA plate. Incubate shaking at room temperature for one hour.
8. Remove lysate and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly diluted anti-Ptyr antibody to ELISA plate at 100 ui per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes in the presence of the anti-Ptyr antiserum (/:3000 dilution in TBST ) .
9. Remove the anti-Ptyr antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer the freshly diluted TAGO 30 anti-rabbit IgG
antibody to the ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes (anti-rabbit IgG
antibody: 1:3000 dilution in TBST).
10. Remove detection antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly prepared ABTS/H20z solution to ELISA
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) plate, 100 ul per well. Incubate at room temperature for 20 minutes. ABTS/H202 solution: 1.2 ul 30o H202 in 10 ml ABTS
stock.
11. Stop reaction by adding 50 ul 5N H2S09 (optional) , 5 and determine O.D. at 410 nm.
12. The maximal phosphotyrosine signal is determined by subtracting the value of the negative controls from the positive controls. The percent inhibition of phosphotyrosine content for extract-containing wells is then calculated, after 10 subtraction of the negative controls.
2. Cellular/Biologic Assays Assay 1: PDGF-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents:
(1) PDGF: human PDGF B/B; 1276-956, Boehringer Mannheim, 15 Germany (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
20 (4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetrarnethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer 25 Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.4, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
30 (8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human PDGF-R.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol (1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10%
CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in 5% COZ.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (0%CS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (PDGF=3.8 nM, prepared in DMEM
with 0.1% BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with 0.1% BSA only the positive control cells receive the ligand (PDGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, 0.1% BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 pl/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
2~ (6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5% dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
( 7 ) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1% BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 910 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 990 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 2: EGF-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201: Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.4, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human EGF-R.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - W O 98/529449 8 PCT/US98/10174 _ .
Protocol (1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in loo CS, 2mM
Gln in DMEM, in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in So CO2.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (OoCS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (EGF=2 nM, prepared in DMEM with 0.1~ BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (EGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(9) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 ~M) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1s BSA) is added (100 ~1/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) aatactcatactcttc:ctttttcaatattattgaagcatttatcagggttattgtctcat 4800 gagcggatacatattt:gaatgtatttagaaaaataaacaaat - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98I10174 _ -(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
S (9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes a~ room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(20) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 3: EGF-Induced Her2-Driver. HrdU Incorporation Materials and Reagents:
(1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.9), Cat.
No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. _ 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.9, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line engineered to express a chimeric receptor having the extra-cellular domain of EGF-R
and the intra-cellular domain of Her2.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol:
(1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10%
CS, 2mM Gln in a 96- well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 3~ in 5o COZ.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (OoCS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (EGF=2 nM, prepared in DMEM with O.lo BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (EGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(9) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel . Milk is added ( 5 o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (I:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ (8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
_ 5 (9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 990 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 4: IGF1-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents:
(1) IGF1 Ligand: human, recombinant; 6511, Promega Corp, USA.
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM. in PBS (pH7.9), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehrinaer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution: 1X PBS, pH 7.9, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human IGF-1 receptor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol:
(1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10s CS, 2mM Gln in a 96-well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in 5~ COz.
(2) After 29 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (Oa CS
DMEM with O.lo BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (IGF1=3.3 nM, prepared in DMEM
with O.lo BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with 0.1s BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (IGF1) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 16 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 95 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 _ PCT/US98/1D17~1~
(B) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ~1/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a - plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 910 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
c. HUV-EC-C Assav The following protocol may also be used to measure a compound's activity against PDGF-R, FGF-R or Flk-1/KDR, all of which are naturally expressed by HUV-EC cells.
Day 0 1. Wash and trypsinize HUV-EC-C cells (human umbilical vein endothelial cells, (American Type Culture Collection;
2~ catalogue no. 1730 CRL). Wash with Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (D-PBS; obtained from Gibco BRL; catalogue no.
14190-029) 2 times at about 1 ml/IO cm' of tissue culture flask. Trypsinize with 0.058 trypsin-EDTA in non-enzymatic cell dissociation solution (Sigma Chemical Company; catalogue no. C-1544). The 0.05 trypsin was made by diluting 0.25 trypsin/1 mM EDTA (Gibco; catalogue no. 25200-099) in the cell dissociation solution. Trypsinize with about 1 ml/25-30 cm' of tissue culture flask for about 5 minutes at 37°C. After cells have detached from the flask, add an equal volume of assay medium and transfer to a 50 ml sterile centrifuge tube (Fisher Scientific; catalogue no. 05-539-6).
2. Wash the cells with about 35 ml assay medium in the 50 ml sterile centrifuge tube by adding the assay medium, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) centrifuge for 10 minutes at approximatel.~z ZDOxg, aspirate the supernatant, and resuspend with 35 ml D-PBS. Repeat the wash two more times with D-PBS, resuspend the cells in about 1 ml assay medium/15 cm2 of tissue culture flask. Assay medium consists of F12K medium (Gibco BRL; catalogue no. 21127-014) + 0.5o heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum. Count the cells with a Coulter Counter~v Coulter Electronics, Inc.) and add assay medium to the cells to obtain a concentration of 0.8-1.0x105 cells/ml.
3. Add cells to 96-well flat-bottom plates at 100 ul/well or 0.8-1.0x109 cells/well; incubate ~24h at 37°C, 50 COZ .
Day 1 1. Make up two-fold drug titrations in separate 96-well plates, generally 50 uM on down to 0 uM. Use the same assay medium as mentioned in day 0, step 2 above. Titrations are made by adding 90 ul/well of drug at 200 uM (9X the final well concentration) to the top well of a particular plate column.
Since the stock drug concentration is usually 20 mM in DMSO, the 200 uM drug concentration contains 2% DMSO.
Therefore, diluent made up to 2% DMSO in assay medium (F12K + 0.5o fetal bovine serum) is used as diluent for the drug titrations in order to dilute the drug but keep the DMSO
concentration constant. Add this diluent to the remaining wells in the column at 60 ul/well. Take 60 ul from the 120 ul of 200 uM drug dilution in the top well of the column and mix with the 60 pl in the second well of the column. Take 60 ul from this well and mix with the 60 ul in the third well of the column, and so on until two-fold titrations are completed.
When the next-to-the-last well is mixed, take 60 ul of the 120 ul in this well and discard it. Leave the last well with 60 ul of DMSO/media diluent as a non-drug-containing control.
Make 9 columns of titrated drug, enough for triplicate wells each for 1) VEGF (obtained from Pepro Tech Inc., catalogue no.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 100-200, 2) endothelial cell growth factor (ECGF) (also known as acidic fibroblast growth factor, or aFGF) (obtained from Boehringer Mannheim Biochemica, catalogue no. 1439 600); or, 3) human PDGF B/B (1276-956, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany) and assay media control. ECGF comes as a preparation with sodium heparin.
2. Transfer 50 ul/well of the drug dilutions to the 96 well assay plates containing the 0.8-1.0x104 cells/100 pl/well of the HUV-EC-C cells from day 0 and incubate ~2 h at 37°C, 50 COZ .
3. In triplicate, add 50 ul/well of 80 ug/ml VEGF, 20 ng/ml ECGF, or media control to each drug condition. As with the drugs, the growth factor concentrations are 4X the desired final concentration. Use the assay media from day 0 step 2 to make the concentrations of growth factors. Incubate approximately 24 hours at 37°C, 5o COz. Each well will have 50 ul drug dilution, 50 ul growth factor or media, and 100 ul cells, - 200 ul/well total. Thus the 4X concentrations of drugs and growth factors become 1X once everything has been added to the wells.
Day 2 1. Add 3H-thymidine (Amersham; catalogue no. TRK-686) at 1 uCi/well (10 ul/well of 100 uCi/ml solution made up in RPMI
media + loo heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum) and incubate ~24 h at 37°C, 5o C02. RPMI was obtained from Gibco BRL, catalogue no. 11875-051.
Day 3 2. Freeze plates overnight at -20°C.
D_ay 4 1. Thaw plates and harvest with a 96-well plate harvester (Tomtec Harvester 96~R~) onto filter mats (Wallac;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
catalogue no. 1205-401); read counts on a Wallac Betaplate~TM~
liquid scintillation counter.
C. In Vivo Animal Models 1. Xenograft Animal Models The ability of human tumors to grow as xenografts in athymic mice (e. g., Balb/c, nu/nu) provides a useful in vivo model for studying the biological response to therapies for human tumors. Since the first successful xenotransplantation of human tumors into athymic mice, (Rygaard and Povlsen, 1969, Acta Pathol. Microbial. Scand. 77:758-760), many different human tumor cell lines (e. g., mammary, lung, genitourinary, gastro-intestinal, head and neck, glioblastoma, bone, and malignant melanomas) have been transplanted and successfully grown in nude mice. The following assays may be used to determine the level of activity, specificity and effect of the different compounds of the present invention. Three general types of assays are useful for evaluating compounds:
cellular/catalytic, cellular/biological and in vivo. The object of the cellular/catalytic assays is to determine the effect of a compound on the ability of a TK to phosphorylate tyrosines on a known substrate in a cell. The object of the cellular/biological assays is to determine the effect of a compound on the biological response stimulated by a TK in a cell. The object of the in vivo assay is to determine the 2~ effect of a compound in an animal model of a particular disorder such as cancer.
Suitable cell lines for subcutaneous xenograft experiments include C6 cells (glioma, ATCC # CCL 107), A375 cells (melanoma, ATCC # CRL 1619), A431 cells (epidermoid carcinoma, ATCC # CRL 1555), Calu 6 cells (lung, ATCC # HTB
56), PC3 cells (prostate, ATCC # CRL 1435) and NIH 3T3 fibroblasts genetically engineered to overexpress EGFR, PDGFR, IGF-1R or any other test kinase.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ .
The following protocol can be used to perform xenograft experiments:
Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They receive sterile rodent chow and water _ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in appropriate medium (for example, MEM, DMEM, Ham's F10, or Ham's F12 plus 5% - 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 2 mM glutamine (GLN)). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum are purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95o air and 5-10%
COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.05 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) to a particular concentration and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice ( 8 - 10 mice per group, 2 - 10 x 106 cells/animal). Tumor growth is measured over 3 to 6 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height unless otherwise indicated.
P values are calculated using the Students' t-test. Test compounds in 50 - 100 uL excipient (DMSO, or VPD:DSW) was delivered by IP injection at different concentrations generally starting at day one after implantation.
2. Tumor Invasion Model The following tumor invasion model has been developed and maybe used for the evaluation of therapeutic value and efficacy of the compounds identified to selectively inhibit KDR/FLK-1 receptor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) ___ 8 week old nude mice (female) (Simonsen Inc.) are used as experimental animals. Implantation of tumor cells was performed in a laminar flow hood. For anesthesia, Xylazine/Ketamine Cocktail (100 mg/kg ketamine and 5 mg/kg) are administered intraperitoneally. A midline incision is done to expose the abdominal cavity (approximately 1.5 cm in length) to inject 10' tumor cells in a volume of 100 ul medium. The cells are injected either into the duodenal lobe of the pancreas or under the serosa of the colon. The peritoneum and muscles are closed with a 6-0 silk continuous suture and the skin was closed by using would clips. Animals are observed daily.
Analysis After 2-6 weeks, depending on gross observations of the animals, the mice are sacrificed, and the local tumor metastases to various organs (lung, liver, brain, stomach, spleen, heart, muscle) are excised and analyzed (measurement of tumor size, grade of invasion, immunochemistry and in situ hybridization).
7. EXAMPLES
A. Compounds of this invention.
The following are examples of the results of specific assays used to evaluate the activity of the compounds of this invention. The assays shown are exemplary only and are not to be construed as limiting in any manner.
1. Inhibition of Ligand-Stimulated DNA Synthesis.
The following example illustrates the ability of the compounds of the invention to inhibit FGFR-stimulated and PDGFR-stimulated DNA synthesis in cells. DNA synthesis is required for many of the activities of FGFR and PDGFR
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) including, but not limited to, cell proliferation. Uridine is added in one set of samples to overcome any contribution made by inhibition of DHOD and just evaluate the inhibition of PDGFR
or FGFR signaling. (See Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharmacol., 50(6):861 (1995), Nair, et al., Immunology Letters, 47:171 (1995)).
Materials And Methods (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. 3apan; PDGF, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany; FGF, Gibco.
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4),Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.4 (7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) NIH3T3 clone C7 (3T3/EGFRc7)(Honegger et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987)) engineered to over-express human EGF receptor. These cells natively express FGFR and PDGFR.
Protocol (1) 3T3/EGFRc7 cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10% CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37° C in 5% CO2.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) (2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then serum starved in serum free medium (0%CS DMEM
with 0.1~ BSA) for 24 hours.
3 ) On day 3, ligand ( 2nM EGF or 1. 5 nM FGF or 3 .
8 nM
PDGF) prepared in DMEM with O.lo BSA and 30 uM
(final concentration) uridine) and test compound is added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells received serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA
only; the positive control cells received ligand but no test compound. Test compound is prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate was incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1% BSA) was added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCTlUS98/10174 and the plate dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development was sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Results In a first experiment, the activity of MCTA, its metabolite and a compound of this invention are compared in their ability to inhibit FGF induced DNA synthesis alone or with added uridine. As shown in Table 1 below, the ability of the metabolite to inhibit DNA synthesis is completely abolished by the addition of uridine and that of MCTA reduced, demonstrating that the inhibitory effect is due to inhibition of DHOD, not inhibition of FGFR signaling. In contrast, the inhibitory activity of claimed compound is not decreased, and is even slightly increased, demonstrating that it is inhibiting FGFR signaling. Similar experiments are conducted using PDGF
stimulation with similar results. Also tested was the known DHOD inhibitor brequinar which inhibited DNA synthesis in the absence of uridine (IC50 - 1.6 uM) and was inactive in the presence of uridine (IC50 = >100uM).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 1 Compound IC50 - uridine IC50 - uridine MCTA 20 uM 80 pM
A771726 20 uM >100uM
3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylam-inocarbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 1) In another experiment, several of the compounds of this invention are tested for their ability to inhibit DNA synthesis induced by FGF, PDGF and EGF. The results, shown in Table 2 below, indicate that the compounds of the invention are selective for inhibition of FGF and PDGF induced signaling compared to EGF signaling.
Table 2 Compound PDGF-inducedFGF-induced EGF-induced 3-Methyl-4- [ 4- 95 ~tM >100 ~M >100 GSM
(trifluoromethyl)phenyla-minocarbonyl]pyrazole (cmpd. 2) 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4- >100 ~M >100 ~M >100 ~.M
(trifluoro-methyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 21}
3-Methyl-4-[4- 90 ~tM 65 ~M >100 ~M
(trifluoromethyl)phenyla minocarbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 1) 2. Inhibition of Tumor Growth in vivo The following example demonstrates the ability of Cmpd.
1 to inhibit the in vivo growth of tumors characterized by SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) inappropriate FGFR and/or PDGFR activity. The FGFR expressing cells are from two glioblastomas (C6, ATCC CRL 107, Powell and Klagsbrun, Exp. Cell Res., 209:224 (1993); for PDGFR, see Strawn, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 269:21215 (1995).
Materials And Methods Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They received sterile rodent. chow and water _ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in Ham's F10 plus 5o fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 2 mM glutamine (GLN). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum is purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95a air and 5-10°s COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.050 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice (8 - 10 mice per group, 3 x 106 cells/animal). Tumor growth was measured over 3 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height unless otherwise indicated. P values are calculated using the Students' t-test.
Cmpd. 1 in 50 uL excipient (DMSO) was delivered by IP bolus injection daily.
Results The results of the subcutaneous xenograft experiment, shown in Table 3 below, demonstrates that administration of Cmpd. 1 significantly inhibited the tumor growth in vivo and had no toxic effect at the dose tested.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 3 Treatment Day inhibition of control) mortality p-value DMSO alone 20 -- 0 --30 mg/kg/day (cmpd. 1) 8 34 0 0.0158 10 42 0 0.0034 14 48 0 0.0520 15 47 0 0.0392 17 50 0 0.0188 20 52 0 0.0064 3. Inhibition of Tumor Growth and Metastasis in vivo.
The following example can be used to test the ability of the compounds of the invention to inhibit growth and metastasis of a tumor cell line expressing FGFR and PDGFR (C6 cells).
Materials And Methods Ten to 12 week old athymic Balb/c nu/nu mice are obtained from Simonsen Laboratory (Gilroy, CA) and maintained in a pathogen-free environment throughout the experiments.
C6 cells (ATCC CCL 107) are grown and maintained in F-10 medium (Life Technologies, Inc. Grand Island, NY) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2mM glutamine in a 5o C02 environment. Approximately 80~ confluent cultures are harvested by brief trypsinization (0.06250 trypsin-0.25 mM EDTA
in Cell Dissociation Medium) (Life Technologies) and resuspended at a final concentration of 8 x 10' cells per ml in magnesium and calcium free phosphate buffered saline for implantation. Cell viability is determined by Trypan blue exclusion and found to be >95~.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
On the day of implantation, animals are anesthetized with either isoflurane or Ketaset and Rompun and the abdomen is prepared for sterile surgery. A small abdominal incision is made and the ascending colon identified. The gut is then placed on strips of sterile gauze before injection. Two million viable tumor cells in 0.025 ml PBS are injected under the serosa into the muscularis/submuscularis by means of a sterile tuberculin syringe and a 27 gauge needle. Cells are injected so as to visibly infiltrate between the submucosal and subserosal tissues. The serosal surface at the injection site is dabbed gently with 70o isopropyl alcohol pads to kill tumor cells that may have escaped. The organs are replace in situ.
The abdominal wall is closed with continuous nylon sutures. The outer skin is then closed using wound clips which are removed 1~ seven days post implantation.
To ensure that cell implantation is properly performed, after 7 days, several control animals are euthanized by cerebral dislocation , the abdominal organs and thorax examined for the presence of macroscopic "primary" colonic tumors and metastases. Pilot studies demonstrated that at this time intracolonic tumors of approximately 5 to 7 mm3 are present without peritoneal spread of tumor after injection of C6 cells.
One day following implantation of cells, animals are treated once daily intraperitoneally with either MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day in VPD:DSW or vehicle alone in a 0.1 ml bolus. The health of the animals is monitored daily and if signs of severe discomfort or pain is observed or the animal is deemed to be moribund, animals are sacrificed humanely. Dosing of the animals continued until all surviving animals in the experiment are deemed moribund. When possible, the local tumor growth on the colon is measured and the major organs such as lung, heart, spleen, liver and kidney are resected from moribund animals and submitted for histopathological analysis.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) B. MCTA against FGF/FGFR
The examples below are non-limiting and are merely representative of various aspects and features of the present invention. They demonstrate that the compositions herein described inhibit the activity of FGFR in cells and can be used to reduce tumor growth and inhibit metastasis.
4. Inhibition of FGFR-Stimulated DNA Synthesis The following example illustrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit ligand-stimulated DNA synthesis in cells, specifically when stimulated with FGF or PDGF but not when stimulated with EGF. DNA synthesis is required for many of the activities of FGFR including, but not limited to, cell proliferation.
Uridine is added to remove the effect of a metabolite of MCTA.
(See Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharmacol. 50(6):861, 1995;
Nair, et al., Immunology Letters 97:171, 1995) Materials And Methods (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan, PDGF, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany, FGF, Gibco, USA
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4),Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.9 (7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) (8) NIH3T3 clone C7 (3T3/EGFRc7)(Honegger et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987)) engineered to over-express human EGF receptor. These cells natively express FGFR and PDGFR.
Protocol (1) 3T3/EGFRc7 cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10% CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37 C in 5% CO2.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then serum starved in serum free medium (0% CS DMEM
with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (2nM EGF, 3.8 nM PDGF or 1.5 nM
bFGF) prepared in DMEM with 0.1% BSA and 30 uM
(final concentration) uridine) and test compound was added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells received serum free DMEM with 0.1%
BSA
only; the positive control cells received ligand (EGF, PDGF or FGF) but no test compound. Test compound was prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, 0.1% BSA) was added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium was removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution was added (50 ul/well) and the plates incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution was thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5% dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) was incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution was removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) was added (100 ul/well) and the plate was incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(8) The antibody conjugate was thoroughly removed by -. decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution was added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development was sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples was measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Results The results shown in Table 4 below demonstrate that MCTA
inhibits the specific biological response of cells to FGF while having no effect on the response of the cells to EGF. MCTA
also inhibits the specific biological responses to PDGF. The results are shown as ICSOs, the concentration at which 500 of the maximal BrdL3 incorporation response is inhibited.
Table 4 FGF-induced PDGF-induced EGF-induced DNA synthesis DNA synthesis DNA synthesis (IC50 uM) (IC50 ~.~M) (IC50 uM) Cell Dine/ EGFRC7/FGF EGFRC7/PDGF EGFRC7/EGF
higand MCTA 80 45 >100 SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rute 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ 5. Inhibition of Tumor Growth in vivo The following example demonstrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit the in vivo growth of tumors characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity while having no inhibitory effect on a tumor that does not express FGFR. The FGFR expressing cells are from a prostate cancer (PC3, Nakamoto, et al., Cancer Res. 52:571, 1992). The non-FGFR-expressing cell line was obtained from an epidermoid carcinoma (A431, ATTC CRL 1555, Takahashi, et al., su ra).
Materials And Methods Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They received sterile rodent chow and water ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in appropriate medium (A431 - DMEM
with l0a FBS and 2 mM GLN: PC3 - HAM'S F12 with 7o FBS and 2 mM GLN). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum is purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95% air and 5-10°s C02 at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.05 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) to a particular concentration and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice (8 - 10 mice per group). Tumor growth was measured over 3 to 6 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height . unless otherwise indicated. P values are calculated using the Students' t-test. MCTA in 50 - 100 uL excipient _(DMSO, or VPD:DSW) was delivered by IP injection at different concentrations.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Results The results of the subcutaneous xenograft experiments, shown in Table 5 below, demonstrate that administration of MCTA
significantly inhibited the growth of tumors associated with S FGFR activity with no significant effect on a non-FGFR
expressing tumor demonstrating MCTA's effectiveness as a treatment for cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR
activity.
Table 5 Cell line Dose ~ Inhibition P value PC-3 20mg/kg/day 710 <0.01 A431 l4mg/kg/day 400 not sig.
6. Inhibition of Tumor Growth and Metastasis in vivo The following example illustrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit growth and metastasis of a tumor cell line expressing FGFR (C6 cells).
Materials And Methods Ten to 12 week old athymic Balb/c nu/nu mice are obtained from Simonsen Laboratory (Gilroy, CA) and maintained in a pathogen-free environment throughout the experiments.
C6 cells (ATCC CCL 107) are grown and maintained in F-10 medium (Life Technologies, Inc. Grand Island, NY) supplemented with loo fetal bovine serum, 2mM glutamine in a 5o C02 environment. Approximately 800 confluent cultures are harvested by brief trypsinization (0.06250 trypsin-0.25 mM EDTA
in Cell Dissociation Medium) (Life Technologies) and resuspended at a final concentration of 8 x 10' cells per ml in magnesium and calcium free phosphate buffered saline for SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) implantation. Cell viability was determined by Trypan blue exclusion and found to be >95$.
On the day of implantation, animals are anesthetized with either isoflurane or Ketaset and Rompun and the abdomen was prepared for sterile surgery. A small abdominal incision was made and the ascending colon identified. The gut was then placed on strips of sterile gauze before injection. Two million viable tumor cells in 0.025 ml PBS is injected under the serosa into the muscularis/submuscularis by means of a sterile tuberculin syringe and a 27 gauge needle. Cells are injected so as to visibly infiltrate between the submucosal and subserosal tissues. The serosal surface at the injection site was dabbed gently with 70o isopropyl alcohol pads to kill tumor cells that may have escaped. The organs are replace _in situ.
The abdominal wall was closed with continuous nylon sutures.
The outer skin was then closed using wound clips which are removed seven days post implantation.
To ensure that cell implantation was properly performed, after 7 days, several control animals are euthanized by cerebral dislocation , the abdominal organs and thorax examined for the presence of macroscopic "primary" colonic tumors and metastases. Pilot studies demonstrated that at this time intracolonic tumors of approximately 5 to 7 mm3 are present without peritoneal spread of tumor after injection of C6 cells.
One day following implantation of cells, animals are treated once daily intraperitoneally with either MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day in VPD:DSW or vehicle alone in a 0.1 ml bolus. The health of the animals is monitored daily and if signs of severe discomfort or pain is observed or the animal is deemed to be moribund, animals are sacrificed humanely. Dosing of the animals continued until all surviving animals in the experiment are deemed moribund. When possible, the local tumor growth on the colon is measured and the major organs such as lung, heart, spleen, liver and kidney are resected from moribund animals and submitted for histopathological analysis.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Results In this model, vehicle treated animals are found to be all moribund by day 16 - day 18 with a 50% survival rate at approximately day 12 post implantation. Gross observation of moribund animals in this group showed severe metastasis in the liver, occasional tumor growth in the spleen, occasional carcinomatosis (metastasis in the peritoneal cavity) and the presence of a richly vascularized local tumor.
In two separate experiments, it was found that daily treatment with MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day extended the survival of the animals by >200% with a 50% survival rate at day 30 - day 33 post-implantation. Necropsy of a selected moribund animal showed several nodules of metastasis in the liver and an apparently pale while local tumor, suggesting that treatment with MCTA had an antiangiogenic effect. In comparison to the vehicle treated animals, an >87% inhibition of local tumor growth was observed in animals treated with MCTA.
Histopathology results confirmed the presence of limited liver metastasis with no apparent metastasis to the brain.
C. MCTA/BCNU
Materials: BCNU is commercially available. One source is Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products, Princeton, NJ, under the trade name BiCNU°.
A synthetic procedure amenable to the preparation of N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is described in US Patent No. 9,087,535 which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.
Procedure: SF763T cells, derived from human glioblastoma cells, are used in all of the examples shown below. 1X10' cells per mouse are implanted in 100 ul PBS subcutaneously into the hindflanks of female BALC/c nu/nu mice. Tumors are allowed to establish before dosing was initiated.
N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide was administered IP in VDP:DSW (VDP: 3% benzyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
alcohol (w/v), 8% Tween 80 (v/v), 65% PEG 300 (w/v), QS to 100%
with 100% ethanol; DSW: 5% dextrose (w/v) in water) at 2.5, 5.0, 10 and 20 mg/kg from day 8 to day 29 post implantation.
BCNU was administered IV in 2% ethanol/saline at 8, 12, 18 and 27 mg/kg on days 8, 12 and 16 post implantation. Combinations of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide at 2.5, 5.0 and 20 mg/kg and BCNU at 8, 12 andl8 mg/kg were also administered with the same regimens.
Tumor weight is determined twice per week until day 43 post implantation. In general the size of the tumor is determined by measuring two of its dimensions, length and width, by deducing its depth using procedures well known to those skilled in the art, and calculating its weight based on standard assumptions regarding the density of such tumors.
Example 7 Example 1, the results of which can be seen in graphical form as the CONTROL in each of Figures 1-6 shows tumor growth in untreated mice. All subsequent examples are compared to this control for determination of whether statistically significant inhibition is being shown by either N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide or BCNU
alone or by various combinations of these two drugs.
Example 8 This example, shown graphically in Figure 1, shows the effect of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4 carboxamide alone at 20 mg/kg dose. Analysis of the raw data obtained in this example (not shown) demonstrated that while N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is being administered, statistically significant inhibition of tumor growth is observed. When treatment with N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is stopped, tumor growth resumed. This demonstrates that N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is in SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ fact cytostatic rather than cytotoxic; i.e., N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide temporarily stops cell activity but does not kill the cell.
Example 9 This example, the results of which are also shown graphically in Figure 1, shows the results of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone at 10 mg/kg. Again, statistical analysis of the raw data, not shown, revealed that the percentage inhibition is less than with 20 mg/kg but inhibition continued throughout the time period during which N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is being actively administered and then, when treatment with N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide ceased, tumor growth resumed.
Example 10 This example, the results of which are likewise shown in Fig. 1 shows the effect of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide. Again, the percentage inhibition is less but, when the raw data is statistically analyzed using the Student's T Test, still statistically significant.
Example 11 At 2.5 mg/kg, N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisox azole-4-carboxamide, the raw data did not show statistically significant inhibition of tumor growth. This is graphically depicted in Fig.l where it can be seen that the curve for 2.5 mg/kg essentially tracks that of the control.
Example 12 Here, the effect of 27 mg/kg of BCNU alone is shown. One dose at this rate is effective to maintain a relatively high SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) percentage inhibition of tumor growth for the duration of this test. This is graphically depicted in Fig. 2.
Example 19 At 18 mg/kg, BCNU is already losing some of its potency.
Analysis of the raw data (not shown) revealed statistically significant percentages inhibition only up to day 22 at which time tumor growth began to catch up with the control. Again, this is shown graphically in Fig.2.
Example 14 At 12 mg/kg BCNU is found to be ineffective; i.e., no statistically significant percentage inhibition is observed from the raw data. Graphically, it can be seen in Fig. 2 that the 12 mg/kg curve shows some inhibition in the days immediately post treatment but as the days post-treatment increassed, the curve approached that of the control.
Example 15 At 8 mg/kg, BCNU had no therapeutic effect; i.e. in Fig.
2 the curve for 8 mg/kg essentially tracks that of the control.
Example 16 When N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is administered at 10 mg/kg and BCNU at 18 mg/kg, the result is very positive. Statistical analysis of the raw data (not shown) showed that the overall percentage inhibition is substantially higher than treatment with BCNU alone at 18 mg/kg or N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone at 10 mg/kg. Furthermore, the time period over which statistically significant inhibition occurred is much longer than that observed with either drug alone. Fig. 3 graphically displays this result.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Example 17 In this example the combination of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide and 12 mg/kg BCNU is quite effective; the raw data showed statistically significant inhibition up to day 25 of the trial.
To the contrary, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone showed no statistically significant effect. This is graphically depicted in Fig. 4.
This ability to achieve inhibition as lower doses of BCNU
should be of great benefit to patients.
Example 18 When 18 mg/kg BCNU is augmented with only 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide, not only is a higher percentage inhibition realized over 18 mg/kg of BCNU alone, the duration of statistically significant inhibition is longer, up to day 29 as opposed to only day 22 with BCNU alone indicating that even at very low doses the N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is having a marked positive effect on the efficacy of BCNU. This is shown graphically in Fig. 5.
Example 19 The graphical representation of the combination of 5 mg/kg of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU showed some marginal effectiveness but statistical analysis of the raw data did not attach any statistical significance to the result.
Conclusion Thus, it will be appreciated that the compounds, methods and pharmacological compositions of the present invention modulate PTK activity and therefore are expected to be effective as therapeutic agents against PTK-related disorders.
It will also be appreciated that the heteroaryl-carboxamide, N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) carboxamide ("MCTA"), is particularly useful for the treatment of disorders characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity and is expected to be especially useful in the treatment of invasive cancers noted for their aggressiveness and tendency to metastatize.
Finally, it will be appreciated N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide together with a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea, in particular BCNU, is an effective tumor suppressant for human glioblastoma tumor cells at dosages substantially lower than that necessary when either of the compounds is used alone and that it is therefore expected that this combination will have similarly positive results in human subjects.
Although certain embodiments and examples have been used to describe the present invention, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that changes to the embodiments and examples shown may be made without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention.
Other embodiments are within the following claims.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
As used herein, "PTK related disorder," "PTK driven disorder", "abnormal PTK activity" and "inappropriate PTK
activity" all refer to a disorder characterized by inappropriate or over-activity of PTKs, which can be either RTKs or CTKs. Inappropriate activity refers to either: (1) PTK
expression in cells which normally do not express PTKs; (2) increased PTK expression leading to unwanted cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth; or, (3) decreased PTK expression leading to unwanted reductions in cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth. Overactivity of PTKs refers to either amplification of the gene encoding a particular PTK or production of a level of PTK activity which can correlate with a cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth disorder (that is, as the level of the PTK increases, the severity of one or more of the symptoms of the cellular disorder increases).
- The methods and compositions of the invention are designed to inhibit unwanted cell proliferation or metastasis by altering the activity of PTKs. Without being bound to any theory, inhibition of the activity of PTKs may occur by SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
inhibiting tyrosine phosphorylation of a RTK, by inhibiting substrate or adaptor protein binding to the receptor, or by inhibiting other downstream signaling events, thereby inhibiting the activity of the RTK. However, unless otherwise 5 stated, the use of the claimed methods and compositions are not limited to this particular theory.
E. MCTA
MCTA, also known as leflunomide and HWA 486, has been 10 previously discussed in various publications as having a variety of uses including as an antirheumatic, antiphlogistic, antipyretic or analgesic and in the treatment of multiple sclerosis (Kommerer F-J, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,284,786 (1981) and Kommerer F-J, et al . , U . S . Pat . No . 4 , 351, 841 ( 1982 ) . It 15 has been suggested as an anti-inflammatory agent (Bartlett, et al., Agents and Actions 32:10-21, 1991; EP 607 775, EP 607 776, EP 607 777). European Application 0 414 329 A2 suggests the use of MCTA for the treatment of ocular disorders associated with an inflammatory response, and (EP 665 014, US 5,519,042) 20 suggests its use in treating vascular disorders.
Hirth, et al., (PCT/US95/00363) assert that MCTA can be used to treat cell proliferative disorders that are related to inappropriate activity of the Platelet Derived Growth Factor Receptor (PDGFR) including PDGFR driven cancer. Bartlett, et 25 al. (PCT/EP90/01800, US 5,532,259 issued July 2, 1996) assert that MCTA can be used to treat cancers, in particular cancers associated with inappropriate activity of the Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGFR). In Bartlett, et al., Agents and Actions 32:10, 1991, the authors state:
30 we could show that tyrosine phosphorylation of the RR-SRC peptide substrate and the autophosphorylation of the epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor were, dose dependently, inhibited by 35 leflunomide.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
Mattar et al., FEBS 339:161, 1993 (not admitted to be prior art) describes the use of a metabolite of leflunomide to inhibit EGF-dependent cell growth, including A431 cells. Mattar also asserts that platelet-derived growth factor-dependent tyrosine phosphorylation was also inhibited by A77 1726 in intact cells at concentrations similar to EGF-dependent phosphorylation.
The inventors herein have discovered that the teachings of Bartlett and Mattar may be in error. As illustrated in the examples described below, MCTA inhibits FGFR activity while having little if any effect on EGF-receptor activity in cells.
In addition, while MCTA inhibited growth of tumors characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity, it did not significantly inhibit the growth of cells shown in PCT/EP90/01800 (A431 and KB) when tested in in vivo models.
This data is surprising in view of the results described by Bartlett et al., supra, (Agents and Actions) in which MCTA was ostensibly shown to inhibit EGF induced EGF receptor autophosphorylation and cell proliferation, and Mattar et al., supra, in which a metabolite of MCTA inhibited the in vitro growth of A431 cells. Furthermore, neither Bartlett or Mattar suggest that MCTA can be used to inhibit metastasis.
The present disclosure demonstrates the ability of MCTA
to inhibit the cellular response to FGFR activity and unwanted cell proliferation in vivo, such as that found in cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity. Moreover, the present invention demonstrates that MCTA is useful for inhibiting metastasis.
F. Treatment of Solid Tumor Cancers In yet another aspect, the present invention relates to - a method for inhibiting tumorigenic activity in a cell comprising administering to the cell a combination of drugs - including a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea and a cytostatic signal transduction inhibitor. The cytostatic signal SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ transduction inhibitor may be MCTA or one or more of the novel compounds described herein; preferably, it is MCTA. It is understood, however, that reference to MCTA in the description that follows applies also to the novel compounds of this invention. While MCTA might perform effectively with any nitrosourea; e.g., chlorozoticin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine and ranimustine, at present BCNU, also known as carmustine or, formally, N,N'-bis(2-chloroethyl)-N-nitrosourea, is considered the most active of the group; thus, this invention is directed in particular toward the combination of MCTA with BCNU.
"Comprising" as used herein in connection with "administering" is intended to mean that drugs being administered pursuant to the present invention may be administered as simply a combination of MCTA and BCNU only or may be expanded to include additional drugs which are known or expected to offer additional beneficial characteristics to the combination.
As used herein, "combination" refers to two or more compounds or drugs which are administered simultaneously, sequentially, continuously, intermittently, etc. in accordance with a regimen calculated to take maximum advantage of the characteristics of each of the component drugs. In a preferred embodiment of this invention, the combination comprises MCTA
and BCNU. However, combinations of BCNU with two, three and more additional compounds are well known to those skilled in the art and it would be within the spirit and scope of this invention to include one or more of these additional compounds together with the BCNU and MCTA.
"Tumorigenic" activity, as it relates to a cell, refers to both intracellular and extracellular biochemical activity which contributes to the formation of a neoplasm.
A "neoplasm" is an abnormal tissue that grows by cellular proliferation more rapidly than normal and continues to grow even after the stimuli that initiated the new growth cease. A
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
neoplasm partially or completely lacks structural organization and functional coordination with the normal tissue and usually forms a distinct mass of tissue. Such masses may be benign (benign tumors) or malignant (solid tumor cancer). Malignant neoplasms are locally invasive and destructive and in many cases metastasize (spread to and invade and destroy tissues in areas of the affected organism remote from the site of origin). The process of neoplasm formation is generally referred to as "neoplasia"; i.e., neoplasia is the biochemical process by which a neoplasm forms and grows.
In another aspect of this invention, MCTA and BCNU are used together to inhibit the, formation of malignant neoplasms;
i.e., to inhibit neoplasia.
With regard to malignant neoplasms, "inhibit" or "inhibiting" refers to eliminating, reducing, containing, impeding, preventing, slowing, retarding and/or restricting neoplasia.
"Statistically significant" means that data obtained from experiments is analyzed using the Student's T Test and "P", the calculated probability that the results obtained are random and not indicative of a true trend, is less than or equal to 0.05 or 5 0 .
The terms "malignant neoplasm", "cancer", "tumor" and "solid tumor cancer" are used interchangeably herein to refer to the condition well known to those skilled in the art as the life-threatening disease commonly referred to simply as "cancer." Among the most virulent and difficult to treat of the malignant neoplasms are brain tumors. Brain tumors are classified as primary, originating in cells found in the brain itself; secondary, metastatic from sites outside the central nervous system; or developmental, arising from displaced - midline epithelium or germ cells. Such tumors are further described as intra-axial or extra-axial. Intra-axial brain tumors are those which originate within the brain parenchyma;
that is, the interstitial tissues of the brain itself or SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ closely associated tissues such as the pineal gland, the posterior pituitary gland, the spinal cord and the retina.
Extra-axial tumors, on the other hand, originate in tissues not directly associated with the brain but still within its vicinity; e.g., in the skull, the cranial nerves or in brain appendages such as the pituitary gland. About half of primary intra-axial brain tumors are gliomas which include astrocytoma, particularly anaplastic astrocytoma, glioblastoma multiforme and oligodendroglioma. Both glioblastoma and astrocytoma are expected to be particularly vulnerable to the combination of drugs claimed herein.
About half of the gliomas are glioblastoma multiforme, which will be referred to herein simply as "glioblastoma" and which are generally regarded as the most virulent of all the brain tumors. Glioblastoma consist chiefly of undifferentiated anaplastic cells of glial origin that show marked nuclear pleomorphism, necrosis and vascular endothelial proliferation.
They grow extremely rapidly and invade extensively. They occur most frequently in the cerebrum of adults. While survival depends on numerous factors, generally speaking, most patients survive less than 9 months after diagnosis of glioblastoma.
In yet another aspect of this invention, a method is claimed for treating solid tumors (malignant neoplasms) in a patient by administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of MCTA and a therapeutically effective amount of a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea, in particular, BCNU.
Individual pharmacological compositions of both MCTA and of BCNU, which compositions facilitate the administration of each of the drugs, are an additional feature of this invention. The use of the pharmacological compositions of MCTA and BCNU for the treatment of brain tumors, especially glioblastoma and astrocytoma, is a particularly preferred aspect of this invention.
A "patient" refers to any higher organism which is susceptible to the formation of neoplasms. In particular, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCTlUS98/10174.
"patient" refers to mammals, especially, of course, human beings.
A "chemotherapeutic" refers to a chemical substance or drug used to treat a disease; the term is most often applied 5 to such substances or drugs which are used primarily for the treatment of cancer.
(1) Biochemistry/Pharmacology of BCNU and MCTA
At present, many chemotherapy agents act by affecting DNA
10 synthesis or function. For example, the alkylating agents, such as cyclophosphamide, directly attack DNA, damaging the molecule so that it cannot perform its cellular function resulting in the death of the cell. The antimetabolites, such as 6 mercaptopurine and 5-fluorouracil interfere with DNA synthesis.
15 Certain antitumor antibiotics such as doxorubicin and bleomycin bind to DNA and thereby prevent the synthesis of RNA. The nitrosoureas, of which BCNU is currently considered the most potent, act similarly to the alkylating agents. BCNU has been postulated to participate in cross-linking both DNA and DNA-20 protein. In addition, the nitrosoureas appear to inhibit changes necessary for repair of damaged DNA, perhaps by virtue of the fact that, as well as being alkylating agents, the nitrosoureas are carbamoylating agents since isocyanates are formed during their decomposition at physiological pHs;
25 proteins are known to be carbamoylated by isocyanates derived from BCNU.
BCNU has been used to treat a number of different solid tumor cancers; e.g., lymphomas, malignant melanoma, breast cancer and multiple myeloma. It has been employed in 30 combination with other drugs such as cyclophosphamide, cisplatin, vincristine, melphalan, dexamethasone, vinblastine, ° methotrexate, daunorubicin, etoposide, procarbazine, prednisone, cytarabine, thioguanine and hydroxyurea. In - addition, because of its ability to cross the blood-brain 35 barrier, BCNU is presently the chemotherapeutic of choice for SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) the treatment of brain cancers, including glioblastoma.
Although combinations of BCNU with other chemotherapeutic agents are used in the treatment of gliomas as well as other neoplasms, the number of such combinations is fewer than for non-brain tumors due to the inability of many other chemotherapeutic agents to cross the blood-brain barrier. For example, for the treatment of gliomas, BCNU has been combined with cyclophosphamide, cisplatin, thiotepa, procarbazine, vincristine, etoposide and taxol.
A limiting factor for the use of BCNU, alone or in combination with other drugs, is the inherent toxicity of the known chemotherapeutic agents. BCNU is known to cause myelosuppresion (resulting in leukopenia and thrombocytopenia), pulmonary fibrosis (lung disease), hepatotoxicity (liver damage) and nephrotoxicity (kidney damage). The effects of BCNU are dose dependent, progressive and cumulative. In addition, BCNU itself has been shown to cause tumors in rats and mice at doses approximating those clinically employed (Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products, FDA disclosure enclosure accompanying commercial BCNU packaging).
Reducing the incidence of drug-related adverse reactions from BCNU by reducing the dose through combination therapy with existing chemotherapeutic agents is only marginally effective.
At stated previously, the most commonly used drugs in combination with BCNU for the treatment of gliomas are other alklyating agents; for the most part they exhibit toxicities similar to that of BCNU. For example, a complication associated with cisplatin is the possibility of renal (kidney) failure. Cyclophosphamide has been associated with mucositis (van der Wall, et al., Cancer Treatment Reviews, 21(2):105-142 (1995)). In one study, treatment with thiotepa and etoposide in combination with BCNU (total dosage BCNU: 600 mg/mz over three days) has been reported to result in high mortality due to multiorgan failure (Finlay, Bone Marrow Transplantation, 18 (Suppl. 3): S1 - S5 (1996)).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
Thus, what is needed is a compound (or compounds) whose anti-tumor activity coordinates with that of BCNU but which does not concomitantly increase overall toxicity to the patient. We have found that MCTA is such a compound.
MCTA has been shown to be well-tolerated in human studies. For instance, there were few side effects among 500 rheumatoid arthritis patients treated with MCTA in a Phase II
clinical study (Bartlett, et al., Non-steroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs: Mechanisms and Clinical Uses, Lewis, AJ, Furst, DE, eds., New York:Dekker ,1994:349). In two studies of the effect of MCTA against a variety of solid tumors including ovarian, prostate and non-small cell lung cancer, MCTA was reported to be only mildly to moderately toxic at the highest doses employed (Rosen, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am.
Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A739 (1997); VanUmmersen, et al., Proc.
Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A740 (1997)).
Furthermore, in a clinical trial in which the effect of MCTA
against malignant gliomas, which cell lines were found to be the most sensitive to the compound in pre-clinical trials, was studied, no dose-limiting toxicities were observed (Malkin, et al., Proc. Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Clin. Oncol., 16:A1971 (1997)).
MCTA, however, affects tumors by a mode of action which to the inventors' knowledge is completely different from that of the known chemotherapeutic agents and, therefore, it was unknown whether it would have any beneficial effect in conjunction with BCNU. That is, as stated previously, BCNU
acts primarily as an alkylating agent, attacking and damaging a number of key enzymatic reactions involved in DNA synthesis and DNA itself. Virtually all of the reported chemotherapeutic combinations with BCNU likewise interfere directly in one way or another with DNA synthesis or activity. MCTA, on the other ' hand, does not interact directly with DNA synthesis/activity.
Rather, MCTA intervenes at an earlier stage of the cell cycle.
That is, MCTA has been shown to inhibit signaling events which are necessary for a cell to initially enter into the active SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
stage of DNA synthesis and cell proliferation where BCNU and the other alkylating agents exhibit their predominant activity.
Specifically, MCTA inhibits platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) mediated cell signaling events which are necessary for the inception of cell growth, cell cycle progression and cell proliferation. When treated with MCTA, cells become essentially quiescent, at least with regard to DNA synthesis and cell division (mitosis), and remain so until treatment with MCTA is withdrawn at which time cell activity resumes. The fact that a cell will return to normal activity once treatment with MCTA is terminated demonstrates that MCTA, unlike BCNU and other alkylating agents, is cytostatic rather than cytotoxic.
That is, MCTA inhibits cell activity but does not kill cells.
Many types of tumor cells have been shown to over-express PDGF receptors and to be particularly dependent on the abnormally high PDGF signaling events arising from this over expression for their continued proliferation. For example, PDGF ligands and receptors have been detected in many cell lines or tissues derived from, without limitation, glioma, melanoma, esophageal tumors, gastric tumors, colorectal adenocarcinoma, basal cell cancer, choriocarcinoma, breast cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma, ovarian cancer, non-small cell lung carcinoma and prostate adenocarcinoma. Some cancer cells have even been shown to co-express PDGF itself as well as the receptor for it. This suggests that these tumor cells may be self-stimulating; i.e., employ an autocrine as well as a paracrine growth mechanism which could account for the previously noted propensity for neoplasms to continue growing and proliferating even when the external stimuli are removed.
MCTA, however, is a blocker of PDGF-mediated activity and thereby is capable of inhibiting the uncontrolled growth and proliferation of tumors.
Given the lack of any information regarding a combination of BCNU, a DNA synthesis inhibitor, with a compound such as MCTA which effectively prevents a cell from entering the stage SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
of cell cycle where DNA synthesis occurs, the excellent resuits obtained from the combination of the two compounds was truly surprising. MCTA alone was efficacious at concentrations of 20, 10 and 5 mg/kg/day. BCNU alone was effective at 27 and 18 = 5 mg/kg. BCNU alone at 12 mg/kg was ineffective. However, the combination of 5 mg/kg of MCTA and 12 mg/kg BCNU showed a statistically significant percentage inhibition as high as 63.40 on day 18. In addition, 5 mg MCTA with 18 mg/kg BCNU
also exhibited a greater percentage inhibition than the corresponding amount of MCTA or BCNU alone, as did 10 mg/kg of MCTA with both 12 and 18 mg/kg BCNU. Furthermore, the increased effect was of longer duration than that afforded by BCNU alone as indicated by the increased number of days of statistically significant percentage inhibition.
Finally, there was no observed change in the mortality of the mice when the combination of BCNU and MCTA was used, indicating that there was no additive general toxicity even though there was a distinct therapeutic advantage from the concentration. This suggests that the therapeutic index, that is, the ratio of the LDso (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) to the EDSO (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population), of the MCTA/BCNU combination is higher that for either drug alone which translates into a substantial benefit to patients in need of as much chemotherapy as possible without a concomitant increase in intolerable side effects requiring cessation of treatment.
It should be noted that MCTA is known to metabolize in mammals to N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxy-crotonamide. Generally speaking, MCTA tends to metabolize most readily when subjected to acid conditions such as those encountered in the stomach when a drug is administered orally.
However, the preferred mode of administration of the combination claimed herein is more direct; e.g., without - limitation, intravenously or intraarterially. Nevertheless, a portion of the MCTA administered to a patient may metabolize SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) W098/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ to N-(4-trifluoro- methylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxy- crotonamide prior to reaching the target tumor. Therefore, some of the activity of the claimed combination may in fact be due to a combination which includes not only MCTA and BCNU but N-(4-5 trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide as well.
The mode of action of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide has been determined to be inhibition of pyrimidine biosynthesis and therefore subsequent cell growth and/or survival which may in fact provide additional synergy 10 of the claimed combination. Thus, it is understood that the scope and spirit of this invention encompasses not only MCTA
and BCNU in the claimed combination but N-(4trifluoromethylphenyl)-2-cyano-3-hydroxycrotonamide, the metabolite of MCTA, as well.
G. Pharmacological Compositions and Therapeutic Applications.
(1) General MCTA as well as the compounds disclosed herein are preferably administered to a patient in a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds of this invention together with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers) and/or excipients. The compound can be prepared as a physiologically acceptable salt (i.e., non-toxic salts which do not prevent the compound from exerting its effect).
Physiologically acceptable salts can be acid addition salts such as those containing hydrochloride, sulfate, phosphate, sulfamate, acetate, citrate, lactate, tartrate, methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, cyclohexylsulfamate and quinate. Such salts can be derived using acids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid and sulfamic acid, acetic acid, citric acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, cyclohexylsulfamic acid, and quinic acid.
Physiologically acceptable salts can be prepared by standard techniques. For example, the free base form of the . 5 compound is first dissolved in a suitable solvent such as an aqueous or aqueous-alcohol solution, containing the appropriate _ acid. The salt is then isolated by evaporating the solution.
In a another example, the salt is prepared by reacting the free base and acid in an organic solvent.
Carriers or excipient can be used to facilitate administration of the compound, for example, to increase the solubility of the compound. Examples of carriers and excipient include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars or starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, vegetable oils, polyethylene glycols and physiologically compatible solvents.
The compositions or pharmaceutical composition can be administered by different routes including intravenously, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, and intramuscular, orally, topically, or transmuccosally.
The specific delivery route of any selected agent depends on the use of the agent. Generally, a specific delivery program for each agent focuses on agent uptake with regard to intracellular localization, followed by demonstration of efficacy. Alternatively, delivery to these same cells in an organ or tissue of an animal can be pursued. Uptake studies include uptake assays to evaluate, e.g., cellular nucleic acid or protein uptake, regardless of the delivery vehicle or strategy. Such assays also determine the intracellular localization of the agent following uptake, ultimately establishing the requirements for maintenance of steady-state concentrations within the cellular compartment containing the ' target sequence (nucleus and/or cytoplasm). Efficacy and cytotoxicity can then be tested. Toxicity not only includes cell viability but also cell function. Generally, the dosages SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
of the mutated protein and nucleic acid is as described above for the featured compounds.
Drug delivery vehicles are effective for both systemic and topical administration. They can be designed to serve as a slow release reservoir, or to deliver their contents directly to the target cell. An advantage of using direct delivery drug vehicles is that multiple molecules are delivered per uptake.
Such vehicles increase the circulation half-life of drugs which would otherwise be rapidly cleared from the blood stream. Some examples of such specialized drug delivery vehicles falling into this category are liposomes, hydrogels, cyclodextrins, biodegradable nanocapsules, and bioadhesive microspheres.
Pumps can also be used for this purpose.
From the above group of delivery systems, liposomes are preferred. Liposomes increase intracellular stability, increase uptake efficiency and improve biological activity.
Liposomes are hollow spherical vesicles composed of lipids arranged in a similar fashion to those lipids making up the cell membrane. They have an internal aqueous space for entrapping water soluble compounds and range in size from 0.05 to several microns in diameter. Antibodies can be attached to liposomes to target particular cells.
Topical administration of the featured compound is advantageous, particularly when treating skin disorders such as Kaposi's sarcoma, since it allows localized concentration at the site of administration with minimal systemic adsorption.
This simplifies the delivery strategy of the agent to the disease site and reduces the extent of toxicological characterization. Furthermore, the amount of material applied is far less than that required for other administration routes.
Many compounds, MCTA for example, are preferably absorbed systemically when used to treat disorders such as cancer.
Systemic absorption refers to the accumulation of drugs in the blood stream followed by distribution throughout the entire body. Administration routes which lead to systemic absorption SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
include: intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal and intrathecal. Each of these administration routes expose the drug to an accessible diseased tissue.
Subcutaneous administration drains into a localized lymph node which proceeds through the lymphatic network into the circulation. The rate of entry into the circulation has been shown to be a function of molecular weight or size.
MCTA is hydrophobic and thus not very soluble in water.
It is expected that the novel compounds of this invention may also be hydrophobic. Effective doses of hydrophobic compounds for systemic administration can be obtained using the pharmaceutical formulations described in US Patent No.
5,610,173, issued March 11, 1997. A particularly preferred formulation is obtained using a combination of the compound and VPD:DSW. VPD consists of a solution of 12% w/v polysorbate 80, 0.55% citric acid (anhydrous), 35% w/v polyenthlene glycol (MW
- 300 daltons) and 26.3% v/v 190 proof ethanol. VPD is diluted 1:22 in a diluent. Preferred diluents are 0.45% saline, and 0.9% saline. A particularly preferred diluent is 5% dextrose in water (D5W).
Another way of overcoming the hydrophobicity problem includes the use of frequent small daily doses rather than a few large daily doses. For example, the composition can be administered at short time intervals, preferably the 2.5 composition can be administered using a pump to control the time interval or achieve continuously administration. Suitable pumps are commercially available (e. g., the ALZET~ pump sold by Alza corporation, and the BARD ambulatory PCA pump sold by Bard MedSystems).
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compounds with solid excipient, - optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if . desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are, in particular, fillers such as sugars, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98!52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulose preparations such as, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). If desired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.
Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added.
The proper dosage depends on various factors such as the type of disease being treated, the particular composition being used, the dosing regimen and the size and physiological condition of the patient. For the treatment of cancers it is prefered that the minimal plasma concentration in a patient be greater than 5 ug/ml, more preferably greater than 25 ug/ml, most preferably greater than 50 ug/ml. The compound can be delivered daily or less frequently provided plasma levels of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) ~WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
the active moiety are sufficient to maintain therapeutic effectiveness. Plasma levels may be reduced if pharmacological effective concentrations of the drug are achieved at the site of interest.
. 5 Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. For example, for determining the LDso (the dose lethal to 500 of the population) and the EDso (the dose therapeutically effective in 50~ of the population).
10 The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LDso/EDso. Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range 15 of dosage for use in human. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the EDso with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
20 For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. For example, a dose can be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the ICSO as determined in cell culture 25 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal disruption of the protein complex, or a half-maximal inhibition of the cellular level and/or activity of a complex component). Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma 30 may be measured, for example, by HPLC.
The exact formulation, route of administration and dosage can be chosen by the individual physician in view of the patient's condition. (See e-g. Fingl et al., 1975, in "The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", Ch. 1 pl).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
It should be noted that the attending physician would know how to and when to terminate, interrupt, or adjust administration due to toxicity, or to organ dysfunctions.
Conversely, the attending physician would also know to adjust treatment to higher levels if the clinical response were not adequate (precluding toxicity). The magnitude of an administrated dose in the management of the oncogenic disorder of interest will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and to the route of administration. The severity of the condition may, for example, be evaluated, in part, by standard prognostic evaluation methods. Further, the dose and perhaps dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient. A program comparable to that discussed above may be used in veterinary medicine.
(2) MCTA/BCNU
MCTA and BCNU can be administered to a human patient her se, or in pharmacological compositions wherein they are mixed with suitable carriers or excipient(s). In general, techniques for formulation and administration of drugs may be found in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences," Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition.
(i) Routes Of Administration.
Suitable routes of administration may, for example, include transmucosal, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intra-medullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, intravenous, intra-arterial or intraperitoneal.
Alternately, one may administer MCTA and BCNU in a local rather than systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compound directly into a solid tumor, often in a depot or sustained release formulation.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ Other means of administering the drugs of this invention which are well within the knowledge of those skilled in the art are within the scope and spirit of this invention.
(ii) Composition/Formulation.
Pharmacological compositions of MCTA and BCNU are preferred embodiments of this invention. Pharmacological compositions of the present invention may be manufactured by processes well known in the art; e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilizing processes.
Pharmacological compositions for use in accordance with the present invention may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.
For injection, preferred formulation for BCNU are provided with the commercial compound. In one instance this includes Dehydrated Alcohol injection USP in which the BCNU is dissolved and then the alcoholic solution is diluted aseptically with sterile water to a final concentration of 3.3 mg/ml of BCNU in 10% ethanol, pH 5.6 to 6.0 (BCiNU~ from Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products).
For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 2G ) vehicles, and may contain formulating agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
For MCTA, a preferred formulation for injection comprises ethanol/water containing a surfactant. The specifics of such formulation are disclosed in Schwartz, et al., U. S. Patent No.
5,610,173, issued March 11, 1997, which patent is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.
In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
The pharmacological compositions herein also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include but are not limited to calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
(iii) Dosage.
Pharmacological compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an amount effective to achieve its intended purpose. More specifically, a therapeutically effective amount means an amount of compound effective to prevent, alleviate or ameliorate symptoms of disease or prolong the survival of the subject being treated. Determination of a therapeutically effective amount is well within the capability of those skilled in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein and, with regard to BCNU, existing literature.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
For MCTA, the dosage and interval should be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the compound at or above the amount necessary to maintain the PDGF-mediated signal transduction inhibiting effects of the compound. HPLC assays _ 5 or bioassays can be used to determine plasma concentrations.
Dosage intervals for MCTA can also be determined using plasma concentrations. MCTA should be administered using a regimen which maintains plasma levels above, preferably well above, the level necessary to elicit its therapeutic effect for 10-90~ of the time, preferably between 50-90o and most preferably between 70-900.
In cases of local administration or selective uptake, the effective local concentration of the drug may not be related to plasma concentration.
The amount of both MCTA and BCNU administered will, of course, be dependent on the subject being treated, on the subject's weight (from which body surface area is calculated), the severity of the cancer, the manner of administration and the judgment of the prescribing physician.
Since MCTA is cytostatic rather than cytotoxic, it is a feature of this invention that MCTA be administered to a patient throughout all or a substantial portion of a course of treatment with the combination of MCTA and BCNU. A "course of treatment" is defined as a time period over which a complete cycle of a pre-determined regimen of administration of MCTA
and BCNU is performed.
With regard to the pre-determined regime of a course of treatment, such regime may entail simultaneous administration of MCTA and BCNU or sequential administration of the drugs in such order, dosages and intervals as are deemed most appropriate with regard to a particular patient by the treating physician. Or, MCTA may be administered prior to administration of BCNU. Conversely, BCNU can be administered before treatment with MCTA begins. Preferable, however, MCTA
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/iJS98/10174_ is administered to the patient in a "loading dose" prior to administration of BCNU.
As used herein, a "loading dose" refers to an initial dose or doses of a drug given to create an initial level of the 5 drug in the body of the patient prior to the administration of another drug. The loading dose may be administered as a single dose, as a continuous infusion over time or as several discrete administrations of equal or unequal doses at discrete intervals. The time period over which the loading dose is 10 administered may vary as seen fit by the prescribing physician.
Preferable, however, the loading dose is administered over a period of 3 to 6 days either as a continuous infusion or as equal doses given on each day of the loading dose period. The loading dose may be from 100 to 550 mg/mz/day. Preferable, the 15 loading dose is 200 to 500 mg/mZ/day. Most preferably, it is from 350 - 950 mg/m2/day. The exact amount of the loading dose would, of course, be determined by the treating physician on a case-by-case basis.
In a preferred embodiment of this invention BCNU is 20 administered on the day immediately following completion of the loading dose. The BCNU may be administered in a single dose or in smaller doses given over a period of several days. The amount of BCNU administered may be from 75 to 200 mg/m2.
Actual choice of dosage is likewise within the province of the 25 treating physician. Preferable, however, the BCNU is administered in a single dose of from 150 to 200 mg/m2.
The overall course of treatment may vary extensively depending on the judgment of the treating physician.
Preferable it is from 6 to 8 weeks. During the course of 30 treatment, maintenance doses of MCTA are administered either for the entire duration of the course of treatment or for any portion thereof. Such maintenance doses may be administered at intervals of from 2 to 10 days apart. Preferable, the maintenance doses are administered 6-7 days apart and the 35 number of such maintenance doses is from 5 to 10, preferable SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98110174_ at a rate of one maintenance dose per week for the entire course of treatment; e.g., if an 8 week course of treatment is selected, a maintenance dose of MCTA is administered during each of those weeks at approximately one-week intervals. The amount of the maintenance dose would be selected by the treating physician but is preferably in the range of 100 to 555 _ mg/m2/week, more preferable 200 to 450 mg/m2/week and most preferably, from 350 to 450 mg/m2/week.
A "maintenance dose" refers to an additional dose or doses of the drug given initially as a loading dose, the purpose being to maintain the level of the drug or its metabolite achieved by the loading dose for an extended period of time.
At the conclusion of a course of treatment, the patient is evaluated and, if the indications, including but not limited to, positive response to the therapy and no signs of serious side effects, are appropriate in the eyes of the treating physician, the course of treatment may be repeated. The number of repeat courses of treatment is left to the discretion of the treating physician and should be limited only by the determination by the treating physician that continued treatment could be detrimental to the patient.
It is of course to be understood that dosages different from those described above may be administered and still be within the scope and spirit of this invention. For instance, different routes of administration, such as direct injection into a tumor or interstitial implantation would be expected to permit even lower doses than those discussed herein due to less likelihood of dilution and metabolic decomposition when the target is more directly addressed. It would be most beneficial to be able to lower the dosage of the more individually toxic of the two drugs of the combination, BCNU, with 50 - 100 mg/m2 below the dosage usually recommended by the commercial suppliers of the drug as a reasonable target. In addition, as discussed previously herein, employing other known SUBSTITUTE SHEET { rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10i74 chemotherapeutic agents along with the core duo of MCTA and BCNU could permit lower dosages of BCNU concomitant with equally low doses of the added drug. Again, so long as the unique combination of MCTA with a nitrosourea is part of the combination therapy, the combination is within the scope and spirit of this invention.
The unexpected synergistic activity of the combination of MCTA with BCNU without apparent increase in overall toxicity suggests that MCTA might also work in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents as well. For instance, the combination of MCTA with other alkylating agents might likewise afford synergistic activity without concomitant increased toxicity.
Such alkylating agents could include, without limitation, the alkyl sulfonates; e.g., busulfan (used for treatment of chronic granulocytic leukemia), improsulfan and piposulfan; the aziridines; e.g., benzodepa, carboquone, meturedepa, and uredepa; the ethyleneimines and methylmelamines; e.g., altretamine, triethylenemelamine, triethylenephosphoramide, triethylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolmelamine and the nitrogen mustards; e.g., chlorambucil (used in treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia, primary macroglobulinemia and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma), cyclophosphamide (used in treatment of Hodgkin's disease, multiple myeloma, neuroblastoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, lung cancer, Wilm's tumor and rhabdomyosarcoma), estramustine, ifosfamide, novembrichin, prednimustine and uracil mustard (for primary thrombocytosis, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, Hodgkin's disease and ovarian cancer);
and the triazines; e.g., dacarbazine (used for soft-tissue sarcoma).
Likewise, MCTA could have a beneficial effect in combination with the antimetabolite chemotherapeutic agents such as, without limitation, the folic acid analogs (e. g., methotrexate (used in treating acute lymphocytic leukemia, choriocarcinoma, mycosis fungoides, breast, neck and head and lung cancer, osteogenic sarcoma) and pteropterin); the SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ pyrimidine analogs (fluorouracil (5-FU) used in treatment of breast, colon, stomach, pancreatic, ovarian, head and neck, and urinary cancers as well as topically for premalignant skin lesions and cytarabine (acute granulocytic and acute lymphocytic leukemias) and the purine analogs such at mercaptopurine and thioguanine which find use in the treatment of acute granulocytic, acute lymphocytic and chronic granulocytic ieukemias).
MCTA could also prove effective in combination with natural product chemotherapeutic agents such as, without limitation, the vinca alkaloids (vinblastine (used for breast and testicular cancer), vincristine and vindesine), the epipodophylotoxins (etoposide, teniposide (both used in the treatment of testicular cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma)), the antibiotic chemotherapeutic agents (daunorubicin, doxorubicin, bleomycin mitomycin (used for stomach, cervix, colon, breast, bladder and pancreatic cancer)), dactinomycin, plicamycin, bleomycin (used for skin, esophagus and genitourinary tract cancer) and the enzymatic chemotherapeutic agents such as L
Asparaginase.
Based on the disclosures of this invention, MCTA might also benefit the activity of chemotherapeutic agents such as platinum coordination complexes (cisplatin, etc.), substituted ureas (hyroxyurea), methylhydrazine derivatives (procarbazine), adrenocortical suppressants (mitotane, aminoglutethimide) as well as hormones and antagonists such as adrenocorticosteroids (prednisone), progestins (hydroxyprogesterone caproate), estrogens (diethylstilbestrol), antiestrogens (tamoxifen) and androgens (testosterone propionate).
Finally, the combination of MCTA with mitoxantrone or paclitaxel might be expected to display especially beneficial . results in the treatment of solid tumors.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) H. Measurement Of Cell Toxicity Therapeutic compounds should be more potent in inhibiting receptor tyrosine kinase activity than in exerting a cytotoxic effect. A measure of the effectiveness and cell toxicity of a compound can be obtained by determining the therapeutic index: ICso/LDSO. ICSO, the dose required to achieve 50%
inhibition, can be measured using standard techniques such as those described herein. LDSO, the dosage which results in 500 toxicity, can also be measured by standard techniques (Mossman, 1983, J. Immunol. Methods, 65:55-53), by measuring the amount of LDH released (Korzeniewski and Callewaert, 1983, J. Immunol.
Methods, 64:314; Decker and Lohmann-Matthes, 1988, J. Immunol.
Methods, 115:61), or by measuring the lethal dose in animal models. Compounds with a large therapeutic index are preferred. The therapeutic index should be greater than 2, preferably at least 10, more preferably at least 50.
Synthesis The compounds of this invention may be readily synthesized using techniques well known in the chemical arts.
The following syntheses are shown by way of example only and are not to be construed as limiting in any way. In fact, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that other synthetic pathways for forming the compounds of the invention are available and that the following are but a few of the possible routes to the claimed compounds.
a. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
_ _______, _ Ethyl propiolate (2.8 g) and pyrrolidine (1.4 g) in 5 ml of acetonitrile are mixed at room temperature for 1 hour, the solvent evaporated and the ethyl 3-pyrrolidin-1-acrylate used as isolated or distilled under vacuum. Triethylamine (0.25 ml) is added to a mixture of 1.8 g of ethyl 3-pyrrolidin-1-acrylate, 0.9 g of nitroethane and 2.5 g of phenyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) isothiocyanate in 10 ml of toluene at room temperature and stirred overnight. The mixture is then refluxed for 0.5 hour, cooled, and the diphenylurea removed by filtration. The mixture is washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous _ 5 sodium sulfate, and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to give 1.4 g of ethyl 3-methyl-9-isoxazolecarboxylate. ( Stork, G., McMurry, J. C., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 89, 5461,1967).
Ethyl 3-methyl-4-isoxazolecarboxylate (1.3 g) is stirred at room temperature overnight in 5 ml of ethanol and 10 ml of 10 2.5 N sodium hydroxide. Dilution with water, cooling in ice, and acidification to pH 2 with 6 N hydrochloric acid precipitates an off-white solid which is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol/water, and dried under vacuum to give 1.0 g of 3-methyl-4-isoxazolecarboxylic acid.
15 3-Methyl-9-isoxazolecarboxylic acid (0.9 g) is stirred with 5 ml of thionyl chloride at room temperature for one hour .and the mixture evaporated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in 5 ml tetrahydrofuran and 1 ml of pyridine containing 1.2 g of 4-trifluoromethylaniline and stirred 20 overnight. The mixture is refluxed for one hour, cooled and diluted with water to give an off-white precipitate. The solid is collected by vacuum filtation, washed with ethanol/water and dried under vacuum to give 1.2 g of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
25 b. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
isoxazole A solution of 5.5 g of 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in 6 ml of toluene at i20 °C is treated with 5.4 g of 2,2,5-trimethyl-4H-1,3-dioxin-4-one. The mixture is refluxed for four hours 30 and cooled. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, - washed with toluene and dried to give 6 g of N-[4 (trifluoromethyl)phenylacetoacetamide.
N-[9-(Trifluoromethyl)phenylacetoacetamide (6 g), 4 g of triethylorthoformate and 8 g of acetic anhydride is cautiously SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) heated to reflux for 2 hours. The reaction is cooled to room temperature and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration and dried to give 4 g of N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide.
N-[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)-acetoacetamide (9 g) is suspended in 10 ml of ethanol treated with 1.5 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 10 ml of water which has been adjusted to pH 5 with sodium hydroxide. The mixture is stirred and warmed to 40 °C for 2 hours, then cooled to room temperature and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration. Sodium hydroxide (1 g) is added to the filtrate which is stirred for 30 minutes. The mixture is acidified to pH 2 with 6 N hydrochloric acid and the precipitate collected by vacuum filtration. The filtrate is then diluted with 100 ml of water and allowed to stand at 4 °C overnight. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol:water 2:1 and dried to give 300 mg of crude 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole. The crude is purified on a column of silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane 1:4 to give 100 mg of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, an off-white solid.
c. 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole N-[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene) acetoacetamide (1 g) in 3 ml of ethanol is stirred overnight with 0.3 g of hydrazine hydrate. The precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration, washed with ethanol: water 2:1 and dried to give 0.3 g of 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole as an off-white solid.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
d 3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole By substituting 2-aminopyridine for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in a, the identical process gives 1 g of 3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole as an off-white solid.
_e 3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole By substituting 2-aminopyridine for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in the first two steps of the process of b, the identical process gives 2.5 g of N-(pyrid-2-yl)-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide. By substituting N-(pyrid-2-yl)-2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide for N-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenyl]-2-ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamide in c, the identical process gives 0.3 g of 3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole as an off-white solid.
f. 3-Cvclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole By substituting cyclopropylnitromethane (Williams et al (1965) J. O~. Chem. 30: 2674-2675) for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 1.2 g of 3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole as an off white solid.
g. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole Methyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate (1.9 g) and 1.6 g of 4 (trifluoromethyl)aniline are heated to 160 °C overnight. When the crude product (or the product purified by crystallization or silica gel chromatography) is substituted for N-[9-trifluoromethylphenyl]acetoacetamide in the second step of b, the identical process gives N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl]-2-. (ethoxymethylene)-cyclopropylcarbonylacetamide. When N-[4 trifluoromethylphenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)cyclopropylcarbonyl acetamide is substituted for N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2 (ethoxymethylene)-acetoacetamide in c, the identical process SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) gives 3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole.
h. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole When 2-aminopyridine is substituted for 4-(trifluoro methyl)aniline in f, the identical process gives 3-cyclopropyl 4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole.
i. 3-Cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole When 2-aminopyridine is substituted for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in g, the identical process gives 3-cyciopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole.
j. 3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino carbonyl] isoxazole By substituting 3-methyl-4(trifluoromethyl)aniline (Tordeaux, M., et al {1990) J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. EN 8:
2293-2299) and 4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)aniline (Jagupolski, M. (1954) Zh. Obshch. Khim. 24: 887-893, Engl. Ausg. S. 885-889)for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in the identical process of a, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocar-bonyl]isoxazole and 9-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole are prepared.
k. 3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino carbonyl]pyrazole By substituting the appropriate amine for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in the identical process of ~, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole are prepared.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174.
1 3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-_ 5 carbonyl]isoxazole;
3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-_ carbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting 4-vitro-1-butene (Seebach, D., et al (1978) Angew. Chem. GE 90: 479-480) for nitroethane in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in _a, the identical process gives 3-allyl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 3-allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3-allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoro-methyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole and 3-allyl-4-[9-(tri-fluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
m. 3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-Allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3-Allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole;
3-Allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting methyl 3-butenoate for methyl cyciopropylcarbonylacetate in g, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in q, the identical process gives 3-allyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocar-bonyl] pyrazole, 3-allyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole), 3-allyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole, and 3-allyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenyl-aminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
n 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3,5-Dimethyl-9-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) 70 _ _ .
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]-isoxazole.
By using 3,5-dimethyl-4-chlorocarbonylisoxazole or by substituting ethyl methylpropiolate f or ethyl propiolate in a and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole , 3,5-dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole (Example 25), and 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole.
o. 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl) henylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3,5-Dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl-aminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting triethylorthoacetate for triethylortho-formate in the second step of b, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 9-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in b, the identical process gives the corresponding substituted 2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamides. By substituting the corresponding substituted 2-(ethoxymethylene)acetoacetamides for N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2-(ethoxymethylene)aceto-acetamide in c, the identical process gives 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyrazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3,5-dimethyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyrazole, and 3,5-dimethyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]
pyrazole.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ p. 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl) isoxazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-chlorophenylpropiolate (Newman, M. (1955) J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 77:5549) for ethyl. propiolate in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoro-methyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
q. 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl) pyrazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-9-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting methyl 2-chlorobenzoylacetate for methylcyclopropylcarbonylacetate in g., and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in g, the identical process with triethylorthoacetate substituted for triethylorthoformate in b, gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]prazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
r. 5-(2-Chloro henyl)-3-cyclopro yl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole 5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)isoxazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[9-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-chlorophenylpropiolate for ethyl propiolate and cyclopropylnitromethane for nitroethane in _a, and then the appropriate amines for 9-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] isoxa-zole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)isoxazole, and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-9-[3-methyl-9-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
s. S-(2-Chloro henyl)-3-cyclopro yl-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] yrazole 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl)pyrazole;
5-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in ~, and then by substituting triethyl-2-chloroorthobenzoate for triethylorthoformate in _b, the identical process of ~ gives 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl] pyra-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ -zole, 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-(pyrid-2-amino-carbonyl) pyrazole, and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole and 5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl-sulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
t. 3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole 3-(2-carboxy- ethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole.
By substituting ethyl 4-(t-butoxycarbonylethyl) nitrobutane (from 9-nitrobutyric acid methyl ester, Bissell, E. R. et al., Tetrahedron (1970), p 5737 - 5743) for ethyl propiolate in a, and then the appropriate amines for 4 (trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, the identical process followed by removal of the t-butyl group gives 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[9 (trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, 3-(2-carboxy ethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)isoxazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]isoxazole, and 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenyl-aminocarbonyl]isoxazole u. 3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole;
3-(2-Carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole;
3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole.
By substituting ethyl 2-(t-butoxycarbonyl)priopiono-acetate for ethyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate in g, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl)-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) aniline in g, the identical process, followed by removal of the t-butyl group, gives 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenylaminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)pyrazole, 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]pyrazole, and 3-(2-carboxyethyl)-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)-phenylamino-carbonyl]pyrazole.
v. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-isoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyl-isoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
By substituting 6-amino-1,3-benzodioxane for 4-(trifluoro methyl)aniline in a, and then substituting the appropriate substituted priopiolates for methyl priopiolate and/or the appropriate substituted nitromethanes for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclo-propylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole,4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocar-bonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropyl-isoxazole.
w. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-pyrazole;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) i~VO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyl-pyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole;
5 4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
By substituting 6-amino-1, 3-benzodioxane for 4 10 (trifluoromethyl)aniline in q, and then the appropriate substituted acetoacetate for methyl cyclopropylcarbonyl acetoacetate and/or the appropriate substituted orthoester for triethylorthoformate in the second step of b, the identical process of the second step of b and of ~ gives 4-(1,3 15 benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3,5-dimethyipyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyra-20 zole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxan-6-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chloro-phenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
x. 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxa-zole;
25 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylisoxa-zole;
9-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-30 methylisoxazole;
- 4-(1,3-benzo-dioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
. By substituting 5-amino-I,3-benzodioxole for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in a, and then substituting the SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ -appropriate substituted propiolic ester for ethyl propiolate and/or the appropriate stubstituted nitromethane for nitroethane in a, the identical process gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylisoxazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylisoxazole, and 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylisoxazole.
y- 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methyl-pyrazole 4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-amino-carbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-pyrazole; .
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethyl-pyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole;
4-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
By substituting 5-amino-1,3-benzodioxole for 4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline in ~, and then substituting the appropriate substituted acetoacetate for ethyl cyclopropylcarbonylacetate and/or the appropriate substituted orthoformate for triethylorthoformate in the second step of b, the identical process of the second step of b and of ~ gives 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole, 9-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl])-3,5-dimethylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-3-cyclopropyl-5-methylpyrazole, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-methylpyrazole, and 9-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-aminocarbonyl)-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-cyclopropylpyrazole.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) z 3 Methyl 4-[4-(trifluoro- methyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]-3-Methyl-4-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)thiazole;
3-Methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole;
3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]thiazole.
By substituting 3-methyl-4-thiazole carboxylic acid (Buttimore, D. et al.: J. Chem. Soc. (1963) p 2032 - 2039) for 3-methyl-4-isoxazole carboxylic acid in a, and then substituting the appropriate amines for 4-(trifluoromethyl) aniline in _a, the identical process gives 3-methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole, 3-methyl-9-(pyrid-2-aminocarbonyl)thiazole, 3-methyl-4-[3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole, and 3-methyl-9 [4-(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)phenylaminocarbonyl]thiazole.
_Brief Description of the Tables Table 1 is a comparison of the activity of MCTA, its metabolite and a compound of this invention as inhibitors of FGF induced DNA synthesis alone or with added uridine.
Table 2 shows the results of the ability of several of the compounds of this invention to inhibit DNA synthesis induced by FGF, PDGF and EGF.
Table 3 shows the results of a subcutaneous xenograft experiment testing the ability of Cmpd. 1 to inhibit tumor growth in vivo and, in addition, testing the toxic effects of Cmpd. 1 at the dose used.
Table 4 demonstrates that MCTA inhibits the specific biological response of cells to FGF while having no effect on the response of the cells to EGF. MCTA also inhibits the specific biological responses to PDGF. The results are shown as IC50s, the concentration at which 50~ of the maximal BrdU
- incorporation response is inhibited.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 5 shows the results of subcutaneous xenograft experiments wherein administration of MCTA significantly inhibited the growth of tumors associated with FGFR activity with no significant effect on a non-FGFR expressing tumor thus demonstrating MCTA's effectiveness as a treatment for cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity.
Brief Description of the Figures Figure 1 graphically depicts the effect over time of 20, 10, 5.0 and 2.5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5 methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone on tumor weight compared to that in the untreated controls.
Figure 2 is a graph of the effect over time of 27, 18, 12 and 8.0 mg/kg BCNU alone on tumor weight compared to the untreated control.
Figure 3 is a graphical comparison of the effect over time of 10.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 18 mg/kg BCNU alone and the combination of 10.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 18 mg/kg BCNU, administered as described in Section 4, below, compared to the control.
Figure 4 is a graph of the effect over time on tumor weight of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone and the combination of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU, again, compared to the untreated control.
Figure 5 graphically compares the effect over time on tumor weight of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 18 mg/kg BCNU alone, the combination, in the manner described in Section 9, below, of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 18 mg/kg BCNU and the untreated control.
Figure 6 is a graph depicting the effect over time on tumor weight of 5.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/101?4 methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone, the combination of 5.0 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU, compared as before with the untreated control.
Biological Evaluation Methods It will be appreciated that, in any given series of compounds, a spectrum of biological activity will be afforded.
In its most preferred embodiments, this invention relates to novel heteroarylcarboxamides demonstrating the ability to modulate PTK activity. The following assays are employed to select those compounds demonstrating the optimal degree of the desired activity.
As used herein, the phrase "optimal degree of the desired activity" refers to the lowest IC50, defined elsewhere herein, against a PTK related to a particular disorder so as to provide an organism, preferably a human, with a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of this invention at the lowest possible dosage.
The following in vitro assays may be used to determine the level of activity and effect of the different compounds of the present invention on one or more of the RTKs. Similar assays can be designed along the same lines for any PTK using techniques well known in the art.
The cellular/catalytic assays described herein are performed in an ELISA format. The general procedure is a follows: a compound is introduced to cells expressing the test kinase, either naturally or recombinantly, for a selected period of time after which, if the test kinase is a receptor, a ligand known to activate the receptor's activity is added.
The cells are lysed and the lysate is transferred to the wells of an ELISA plate previously coated with a specific antibody recognizing the substrate of the enzymatic phosphorylation _ reaction. Non-substrate components of the cell lysate are washed away and the amount of phosphorylation on the substrate SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) is detected with an antibody specifically recognizing phosphotyrosi.ne compared with control cells that were not contacted with a test compound.
The cellular/biologic assays described herein measure the 5 amount of DNA made in response to activation of a test kinase, which is a general measure of a proliferative response. The general procedure for this assay is as follows: a compound is introduced to cells expressing the test kinase, either naturally or recombinantly, for a selected period of time after 10 which, if the test kinase is a receptor, a ligand known to activate the receptor's activity is added. After incubation at least overnight, a DNA labeling reagent such as Bromodeoxy-uridine (BrdU) or 3H-thymidine is added. The amount of labeled DNA is detected with either an anti-BrdU antibody 15 or by measuring radioactivity and is compared to control cells not contacted with a test compound.
1. Cellular/Catalytic Assays Enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISA) may be used to 20 detect and measure the presence of PTK activity. The ELISA may be conducted according to known protocols which are described in, for example, Voller, et al., 1980, "Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay," In: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d ed., edited by Rose and Friedman, pp 359-371 Am. Soc. Of 25 Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
The disclosed protocol may be adapted for determining activity with respect to a specific RTK. For example, the preferred protocols for conducting the ELISA experiments for specific RTKs is provided below. Adaptation of these protocols 30 for determining a compound's activity for other members of the RTK family, as well as for CTKs, is well within the scope of knowledge of those skilled in the art.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) _ WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 81 ' a. FLK-1 An ELISA assay can be conducted to measure the kinase activity of the FLK-1 receptor and more specifically, the inhibition or activation of TK activity on the FLK-1 receptor.
Specifically, the following assay can be conducted to measure kinase activity of the FLK-1 receptor in cells genetically engineered to express Flk-1.
Materials And Methods Materials. The following reagents and supplies are being used:
a. Corning 96-well ELISA plates (Corning Catalog No.
25805-96);
b. Cappel goat anti-rabbit IgG (catalog no. 55641);
c. PBS (Gibco Catalog No. 450-1400EB);
d. TBSW Buffer (50 mM Tris (pH 7.2), 150 mM NaCl and 0.1% Tween-20);
e. Ethanolamine stock (10% ethanolamine (pH 7.0), stored at 4C);
f. HNTG buffer (20mM HEPES buffer (pH 7.5), 150mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton X-100, and 10% glycerol):
g. EDTA (0.5 M (pH 7.0) as a 100X stock);
h. Sodium ortho vanadate (0.5 M as a 100X stock);
i. Sodium pyro phosphate (0.2M as a 100X stock);
j. NUNC 96 well V bottom polypropylene plates (Applied Scientific Catalog No. AS-72092);
k. NIH3T3 C7#3 Cells (FLK-1 expressing cells);
1. DMEM with 1X high glucose L Glutamine (catalog No.
11965-050);
m. FBS, Gibco (catalog no. 16000-028);
n. L-glutamine, Gibco (catalog no. 25030-016);
o. VEGF, PeproTech, Inc. (catalog no. 100-20)(kept as 1 ~g/100~1 stock in Milli-Q dH20 and stored at -20C:
p. Affinity purified anti-FLK-1 antiserum;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) q. UB40 monoclonal antibody specific for phosphotyrosine (see, Fendley, et al., 1990, Cancer Research 50:1550-1558);
r. EIA grade Goat anti-mouse IgG-POD (BioRad catalog no. 172-1011);
s. 2,2-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-6-sulfonic acid (ABTS) solution (100mM citric acid (anhydrous), 250 mM Na2HP04 (pH 4.0), 0.5 mg/ml ABTS (Sigma catalog no. A-1888)), solution should be stored in dark at 4°C until ready for use;
t. H202 (30% solution)(Fisher catalog no. H325);
u. ABTS/H202 (15m1 ABTS solution, 2 ~.1 H202) prepared 5 minutes before use and left at room temperature;
v. 0.2 M HCl stock in H20;
w. dimethylsulfoxide (100%)(Sigma Catalog No. D-8418);
and y. Trypsin-EDTA (Gibco BRL Catalog No. 25200-049).
Protocol. The following protocol is being used for conducting the assay:
1. Coat Corning 96-well elisa plates with 1.O~.g per well Cappel Anti-rabbit IgG antibody in O.1M Na2C03 pH 9.6.
Bring final volume to 150 ul per well. Coat plates overnight at 4°C. Plates can be kept up to two weeks when stored at 4°C.
2. Grow cells in Growth media(DMEM, supplemental with 2.OmM L-Glutamine, 10% FBS) in suitable culture dishes until confluent at 37°C, 5% CO2.
3. Harvest cells by trypsinization and seed in Corning 25850 polystyrene 96-well roundbottom cell plates, 25.000 cells/well in 200u1 of growth media.
4. Grow cells at least one day at 37°C, 5% C02.
5. Wash cells with D-PBS 1X.
6. Add 200u1/well of starvation media (DMEM, 2.OmM 1-Glutamine, 0.1% FBS). Incubate overnight at 37°C, 5% COz.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 7. Dilute Compounds 1:20 in polypropylene 96 well plates using starvation media. Dilute dimethylsulfoxide 1:20 for use in control wells.
8. Remove starvation media from 96 well cell culture _ 5 plates and add 162 ul of fresh starvation media to each well.
9. Add 18u1 of 1:20 diluted Compound dilution (from step 7) to each well plus the 1:20 dimethylsulfoxide dilution to the control wells (+/- VEGF), for a final dilution of 1:200 after cell stimulation. Final dimethylsulfoxide is 0.5%.
Incubate the plate at 37°C, 5% COZ for two hours.
10. Remove unbound antibody from ELISA plates by inverting plate to remove liquid. Wash 3 times with TBSW +
0.5% ethanolamine, pH 7Ø Pat the plate on a paper towel to remove excess liquid and bubbles.
11. Block plates with TBSW + 0.5% Ethanolamine, pH 7.0, 150 ul per well. Incubate plate thirty minutes while shaking on a microtiter plate shaker.
12. Wash plate 3 times as described in step 10.
13. Add 0.5ug/well affinity purified anti-FLU-1 polyclonal rabbit antiserum. Bring final volume to 150u1/well with TBSW + 0.5% ethanolamine pH 7Ø Incubate plate for thirty minutes while shaking.
14. Add 180 ul starvation medium to the cells and stimulate cells with 20u1/well lO.OmM sodium orthovanadate and 500 ng/ml VEGF (resulting in a final concentration of l.OmM
sodium orthovanadate and 50ng/ml VEGF per well) for eight minutes at 37°C, 5% CO2. Negative control wells receive only starvation medium.
15. After eight minutes, media should be removed from the cells and washed one time with 200u1/well PBS.
16. Lyse cells in 150u1/well HNTG while shaking at room temperature for five minutes. HNTG formulation includes sodium orthovanadate, sodium pyrophosphate and EDTA.
17. Wash ELISA plate three times as described in step 10.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
84 , _ 18. Transfer cell lysates from the cell plate to ELISA
plate and incubate while shaking for two hours. To transfer cell lysate pipette up and down while scrapping the wells.
19. Wash plate three times as described in step 10.
20. Incubate ELISA plate with 0.02ug/well UB40 in TBSW
+ 0.5% ethanolamine. Bring final volume to 150u1/well.
Incubate while shaking for 30 minutes.
21. Wash plate three times as described in step 10.
22. Incubate ELISA plate with 1:10,000 diluted EIA grade goat anti-mouse IgG conjugated horseradish peroxidase in TBSW
+ 0.5o ethanolamine, pH 7Ø Bring final volume to 150u1/well.
Incubate while shaking for thirty minutes.
23. Wash plate as described in step 10.
24. Add 100 ul of ABTS/H20z solution to well. Incubate ten minutes while shaking.
25. Add 100 ul of 0.2 M HC1 for 0.1 M HC1 final to stop the color development reaction. Shake 1 minute at room temperature. Remove bubbles with slow stream of air and read the ELISA plate in an ELISA plate reader at 410 nm.
b. HER-2 ELISA
Assay 1: EGF Receptor-HER2 Chimeric Receptor Assay In Whole Cells.
HER2 kinase activity in whole EGFR-NIH3T3 cells are measured as described below:
Materials and Reagents. The following materials and reagents are being used to conduct the assay:
a. EGF: stock concentration - 16.5 ILM; EGF 201, TOYOBO, Co., Ltd. Japan.
b. 05-101 (UBI) (a monoclonal antibody recognizing an EGFR extracellular domain).
c. Anti-phosphotyrosine antibody (anti-Ptyr) (poly-clonal)(see, Fendley, et al., supra).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) d. Detection antibody: Goat anti-rabbit 1gG horse radish peroxidase conjugate, TAGO, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
e. TBST buffer:
5 Tris-HC1, pH 7.2 50 mM
NaCl 150 mM
Triton X-100 0.1 f. HNTG 5X stock:
HEPES 0.1 M
10 NaCl 0.75 M
Glycerol 50~
Triton X-100 l.Oa g. ABTS stock:
Citric Acid 100 mM
15 Na2HP0q 250 mM
HC1, conc. 0.5 pM
ABTS* 0.5mg/ml *2,2'azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazolinesulfonic acid).
Keep solution in dark at 4C until use.
20 h. Stock reagents of:
EDTA 100 mM pH 7.0 Na3V09 0.5 M
Naq ( PZO~ ) 0 . 2 M
Pro cedure. The following protocol is being used:
A. Pre-coat ELISA Plate 1. Coat ELISA plates (Corning, 96 well, Cat. #25805-96) with OS-101 antibody at 0.5 g per well in PBS, 100 ul final volume/well, and store overnight at 4°C. Coated plates are good for up to 10 days when stored at 4°C.
2. On day of use, remove coating buffer and replace - with 100 ul blocking buffer (5$ Carnation Instant Non-Fat Dry Milk in PBS). Incubate the plate, shaking, at room temperature (about 23°C to 25°C) for 30 minutes. Just prior to use, remove 3.5 blocking buffer and wash plate 4 times with TBST buffer.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) B. Seeding Cells 1. An NIH3T3 cell line overexpressing a chimeric receptor containing the EGFR extracellular domain and intracellular HER2 kinase domain can be used for this assay.
2. Choose dishes having 80-90o confluence for the experiment. Trypsinize cells and stop reaction by adding 100 fetal bovine serum. Suspend cells in DMEM medium (10% CS DMEM
medium) and centrifuge once at 1500 rpm, at room temperature for 5 minutes.
3. Resuspend cells in seeding medium (DMEM, 0.5o bovine serum), and count the cells using trypan blue. Viability above 90°s is acceptable. Seed cells in DMEM medium (0.5% bovine serum) at a density of 10,000 cells per well, 100 ul per well, in a 96 well microtiter plate. Incubate seeded cells in 5% COZ
at 37°C for about 40 hours.
C. Assay Procedures 1. Check seeded cells for contamination using an inverted microscope. Dilute drug stock (10 mg/ml in DMSO) 1:10 in DMEM medium, then transfer 5 ~,1 to a TBST well for a final drug dilution of 1:200 and a final DMSO concentration of 10.
Control wells receive DMSO alone. Incubate in 5o COZ at 37°C
for two hours.
2. Prepare EGF ligand: dilute stock EGF in DMEM so that upon transfer of 10 ul dilute EGF (1:12 dilution), 100 nM final concentration is attained.
3. Prepare fresh HNTG* sufficient for 100 ul per well;
and place on ice.
HNTG* (10 ml):
HNTG stock 2.0 ml milli-Q HZO 7.3 ml EDTA, 100 mM, pH 7.0 0.5 ml -Na3V09, 0.5 M 0.1 ml Na9 ( P20~ ) , 0 . 2 M 0 . 1 ml , SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 4. After 120 minutes incubation with drug, add prepared SGF ligand to cells, 10 ul per well, to a final concentration of 100 nM. Control wells receive DMEM alone. Incubate, shaking, at room temperature, for 5 minutes.
5. Remove drug, EGF, and DMEM. Wash cells twice with PBS. Transfer HNTG* to cells, 100 ul per well. Place on ice for 5 minutes. Meanwhile, remove blocking buffer from other ELISA plate and wash with TBST as described above.
6. With a pipette tip securely fitted to a micropipettor, scrape cells from plate and homogenize cell material by repeatedly aspirating and dispensing the HNTG*
lysis buffer. Transfer lysate to a coated, blocked, and washed ELISA plate. Incubate shaking at room temperature for one hour.
7. Remove lysate and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly diluted anti-Ptyr antibody to ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes in the presence of the anti-Ptyr antiserum (1:3000 dilution in TBST).
8. Remove the anti-Ptyr antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer the freshly diluted TAGO anti-rabbit IgG
antibody to the ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes (anti-rabbit IgG
antibody: 1:3000 dilution in TBST).
9. Remove TAGO detection antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly prepared ABTS/H202 solution to ELISA
plate, 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 20 minutes . (ABTS/H20Z solution: 1 . 0 ul 30 o H202 in 10 ml ABTS stock).
10 . Stop reaction by adding 50 ul 5N H2S09 ( optional ) , and determine O.D. at 410 nm.
11. The maximal phosphotyrosine signal is determined by subtracting the value of the negative controls from the positive controls. The percent inhibition of phosphotyrosine content for extract-containing wells is then calculated, after subtraction of the negative controls.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) c. PDGF-R ELISA
All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum can be purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95o air and 5-loo COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for ' mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
For ELISA assays, cells (U1242, obtained from Joseph "
Schlessinger, NYU) are grown to 80-90% confluency in growth medium (MEM with loo FBS, NEAA, 1 mM NaPyr and 2 mM GLN) and seeded in 96-well tissue culture plates in 0.5o serum at 25,000 to 30,000 cells per well. After overnight incubation in 0.5%
serum-containing medium, cells are changed to serum-free medium and treated with test compound for 2 hr in a 5o C02, 37°C
incubator. Cells are then stimulated with ligand for 5-10 minute followed by lysis with HNTG (20 mM Hepes, 150 mM NaCl, loo glycerol, 5 mM EDTA, 5 mM Na3V04, 0.2o Triton X-100, and 2 mM NaPyr). Cell lysates (0.5 mg/well in PBS) are transferred to ELISA plates previously coated with receptor-specific antibody and which had been blocked with 5o milk in TBST (50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.2, 150 mM NaCl and O.lo Triton X-100) at room temperature for 30 min. Lysates are incubated with shaking for 1 hour at room temperature. The plates are washed with TBST
four times and then incubated with polyclonal anti-phosphotyrosine antibody at room temperature for 30 minutes.
Excess anti-phosphotyrosine antibody was removed by rinsing the plate with TBST four times. Goat anti-rabbit IgG antibody was added to the ELISA plate for 30 min at room temperature followed by rinsing with TBST four more times. ABTS (100 mM
citric acid, 250 mM Na2HP09 and 0.5 mg/ml 2,2'-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-6-sulfonic acid)) plus H202 (1.2 ml 30% H202 to 10 ml ABTS) was added to the ELISA plates to start color development. Absorbance at 410 nm with a reference wavelength of 630 nm was recorded about 15 to 30 min after ABTS addition.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) 89 - . -d. IGF-I
Receptor ELISA
The following protocol may be used to measure phosphotyrosine level on IGF-I
receptor, which indicates IGF-I
receptor tyrosine kinase activity.
- 5 Materials And Reagents.
The following materials and reagents are used:
a. The cell line used in this assay is 3T3/IGF-1R, a cell line genetically engineered to overexpresses IGF-1 receptor.
b. NIH3T3/IGF-1R is grown in an incubator with 5o C02 at 37C. The growth media is DMEM + loo FBS (heat inactivated)+ 2mM L-glutamine.
c. Affinity purified anti-IGF-1R antibody 17-69.
d. D-PBS:
KH2P04 0.20 g/1 KZHPO9 2.16 g/1 KC1 0.20 g/1 NaCl 8.00 g/1 (pH 7.2) e. Blocking Buffer: TBST plus 5o Milk (Carnation Instant Non-Fat Dry Milk).
f. TBST buffer:
Tris-HC1 50 mM
NaCl 150mM (pH 7.2/HC1 lON) Triton X-100 0.1%
Stock solution of TBS (10X) is prepared, and Triton X-100 is added to the buffer during dilution.
g. HNTG buffer:
HEPES 20 mM
NaCl 150 mM (pH 7.2/HC1 1N) Glycerol 10~
Triton X-100 0.2%
Stock solution (5X) is prepared and kept at 4C.
h. EDTA/HC1: 0.5 M pH 7.0 (NaOH) as 100X stock.
i. Na3V04: 0.5 M as 100X stock and aliquots are kept in -80C.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) j . NaQP20~: 0.2 M as 100X stock.
k. Insulin-like growth factor-1 from Promega (Cat#
65111 ) .
1. Rabbit polyclonal anti-phosphotyrosine antiserum.
5 m. Goat anti-rabbit IgG, POD conjugate (detection antibody), Tago (Cat. No. 4520, Lot No. 1802): Tago, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
n. ABTS (2.2'-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazolinesulfonic acid)) solution:
10 Citric acid 100 mM
Na2HP0q 250 mM (pH 4.0/1 N HC1) ABTS 0.5 mg/ml ABTS solution should be kept in dark and 4°C. The solution should be discarded when it turns green.
15 0. Hydrogen Peroxide: 30o solution is kept in the dark and at 4°C.
Procedure. All the following steps are conducted at room temperature unless it is specifically indicated. All ELISA
plate washings are performed by rinsing the plate with tap 20 water three times, followed by one TBST rinse. Pat plate dry with paper towels.
A. Cell Seeding:
1. The cells, grown in tissue culture dish (Corning 25 25020-100) to 80-90o confluence, are harvested with Trypsin EDTA (0.250, 0.5 ml/D-100, GIBCO).
2. Resuspend the cells in fresh DMEM + loo FBS + 2mM L-Glutamine, and transfer to 96-well tissue culture plate (Corning, 25806-96) at 20,000 cells/well (100 ~.1/well).
30 Incubate for 1 day then replace medium to serum-free medium (90/~l) and incubate in 5% COZ and 37°C overnight.
B. ELISA Plate Coating and Blocking:
1. Coat the ELISA plate (Corning 25805-96) with Anti-35 IGF-1R Antibody at 0.5 ~,g/well in 100 ~1 PBS at least 2 hours.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
2. Remove the coating solution, and replace with 100 ul Blocking Buffer, and shake for 30 minutes. Remove the blocking buffer and wash the plate just before adding lysate.
C. Assay Procedures:
1. The drugs are tested in serum-free condition.
2. Dilute drug stock (in 100% DMSO) 1:10 with DMEM in 96-well polypropylene plate, and transfer 10 ul/well of this solution to the cells to achieve final drug dilution 1:100, and final DMSO concentration of 1.0%. Incubate the cells in 5% COZ
at 37°C for 2 hours.
3. Prepare fresh cell lysis buffer (HNTG*) HNTG 2 ml EDTA 0.1 ml Na3V04 0.1 ml Naq ( P207 ) 0 . 1 ml H20 7 . 3 ml 4. After drug incubation for two hours, transfer 10 ul/well of 200nM IGF-1 Ligand in PBS to the cells (Final Conc.
- 20 nM), and incubate at 5% COZ at 37°C for 10 minutes.
5. Remove media and add 100u1/well HNTG* and shake for 10 minutes. Look at cells under microscope to see if they are adequately lysed.
6. Use a 12-channel pipette to scrape the cells from the plate, and homogenize the lysate by repeat aspiration and dispense. Transfer all the lysate to the antibody coated ELISA
plate, and shake for 1 hour.
7. Remove the lysate, wash the plate, transfer anti pTyr (1:3,000 with TBST) 100 ul/well, and shake for 30 minutes.
8. Remove anti-pTyr, wash the plate, transfer Tago (1:3,000 with TBST) 100 ul/well, and shake for 30 minutes.
9. Remove detection antibody, wash the plate, and transfer fresh ABTS/H202 (1.2 ul H202 to 10 ml ABTS) 100 ul/well to the plate to start color development.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 10. Measure OD at 910 nm with a reference wavelength of 630 nm in Dynatec MR5000.
e. EGF Receptor ELISA
EGF Receptor kinase activity in cells genetically engineered to express human EGF-R
is measured as described below:
Materials and Reagents.
The following materials and reagentsare used a. EGF Ligand: stock concentration = 16.5 uM; EGF 201, TOYOBO, Co., Ltd. Japan.
b. 05-101 (UBI) (a monoclonal antibody recognizing an EGFR extracellular domain).
c. Anti-phosphotyosine antibody (anti-Ptyr)(polycional).
d. Detection antibody: Goat anti-rabbit 1gG horse radish peroxidase conjugate, TAGO, Inc., Burlingame, CA.
e. TBST buffer:
Tris-HC1, pH 7 50 mM
NaCl 150 mM
Triton X-100 0.1 f. HNTG 5X stock:
HEPES 0.1 M
NaCl 0.75 M
Glycerol 50 Triton X-100 l.Oo g. ABTS stock:
Citric Acid 100 mM
Na2HP04 250 mM
HC1, conc. 9.0 pH
ABTS~ 0.5 mg/ml Keep solution in dark at 4C until used.
h. Stock reagents of:
EDTA 100 mM pH 7.0 Na3V04 0.5 M
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 93 PCT/US98/10174. -Na4 ( P20~ ) 0 . 2 M
Procedure. The following protocol was used:
A. Pre-coat ELISA Plate 1. Coat ELISA plates (Corning, 96 well, Cat. X25805-96) - 5 with 05-101 antibody at 0.5 ug per well in PBS, 150 ul final volume/well, and store overnight at 4°C. Coated plates are good for up to 10 days when stored at 9°C.
2. On day of use, remove coating buffer and replace with blocking buffer (5% Carnation Instant NonFat Dry Milk in PBS). Incubate the plate, shaking, at room temperature (about 23°C to 25°C) for 30 minutes. Just prior to use, remove blocking buffer and wash plate 4 times with TEST buffer.
B. Seeding Cells 1. NIH 3T3/C7 cell line (Honegger, et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987) can be use for this assay.
2. Choose dishes having 80-90% confluence for the experiment. Trypsinize cells and stop reaction by adding 10%
CS DMEM medium. Suspend cells in DMEM medium (10% CS DMEM
medium) and centrifuge once at 1000 rpm, and once at room temperature for 5 minutes.
3. Resuspend cells in seeding medium (DMEM, C.5% bovine serum), and count the cells using trypan blue. Viability above 90% :.s acceptable. Seed cells in DMEM medium (0.5% bovine serum) at a density of 10,000 cells per well, 100 ul per well, in a 96 well microtiter plate. Incubate seeded cells in 5% COz at 37°C for about 40 hours.
C. Assav Procedures.
1. Check seeded cells for contamination using an inverted microscope. Dilute drug stock (10 mg/ml in DMSO) 1:10 in DMEM medium, then transfer 5 ul to a test well for a final drug dilution of 1:200 and a final DMSO concentration of 1%.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Control wells receive DMSO alone. incubate in 5o COZ at 37°C
for one hour.
2. Prepare EGF ligand: dilute stock EGF in DMEM so that upon transfer of 10 ul dilute EGF (1:12 dilution), 25 nM final concentration is attained.
3. Prepare fresh 10 ml HNTG~ sufficient for 100 ui per well wherein HNTG* comprises: HNTG stock (2.0 ml), milli-Q Hz0 (7.3 ml), EDTA, 100 mM, pH 7.0 (0.5 ml), Na3V04 0.5 M (0.1 ml) and Na4(PzO~), 0.2 M (0.1 ml).
4. Place on ice.
5. After two hours incubation with drug, add prepared EGF ligand to cells, 10 ul per well, to yield a final concentration of 25 nM. Contrcl wells receive DMEM alone.
3ncubat~, shaking, at room temperature, for 5 minutes.
6. Remove drug, EGF, and DMEM. Wash cells twice with PBS. Transfer HNTG~ to cells, 100 ul per well. Place on ice for 5 minutes. Meanwhile, remove blocking buffer from other ELISA plate and wash with TBST as described above.
7. With a pipette tip securely fitted to a micropipettor, scrape cells from plate and homogenize cell material by repeatedly aspirating and dispensing the HNTGa lysis buffer. Transfer lysate to a coated, blocked, and washed ELISA plate. Incubate shaking at room temperature for one hour.
8. Remove lysate and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly diluted anti-Ptyr antibody to ELISA plate at 100 ui per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes in the presence of the anti-Ptyr antiserum (/:3000 dilution in TBST ) .
9. Remove the anti-Ptyr antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer the freshly diluted TAGO 30 anti-rabbit IgG
antibody to the ELISA plate at 100 ul per well. Incubate shaking at room temperature for 30 minutes (anti-rabbit IgG
antibody: 1:3000 dilution in TBST).
10. Remove detection antibody and wash 4 times with TBST. Transfer freshly prepared ABTS/H20z solution to ELISA
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) plate, 100 ul per well. Incubate at room temperature for 20 minutes. ABTS/H202 solution: 1.2 ul 30o H202 in 10 ml ABTS
stock.
11. Stop reaction by adding 50 ul 5N H2S09 (optional) , 5 and determine O.D. at 410 nm.
12. The maximal phosphotyrosine signal is determined by subtracting the value of the negative controls from the positive controls. The percent inhibition of phosphotyrosine content for extract-containing wells is then calculated, after 10 subtraction of the negative controls.
2. Cellular/Biologic Assays Assay 1: PDGF-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents:
(1) PDGF: human PDGF B/B; 1276-956, Boehringer Mannheim, 15 Germany (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
20 (4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetrarnethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer 25 Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.4, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
30 (8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human PDGF-R.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol (1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10%
CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in 5% COZ.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (0%CS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (PDGF=3.8 nM, prepared in DMEM
with 0.1% BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with 0.1% BSA only the positive control cells receive the ligand (PDGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, 0.1% BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 pl/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
2~ (6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5% dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
( 7 ) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1% BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 910 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 990 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 2: EGF-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201: Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.4, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human EGF-R.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) - W O 98/529449 8 PCT/US98/10174 _ .
Protocol (1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in loo CS, 2mM
Gln in DMEM, in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in So CO2.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (OoCS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (EGF=2 nM, prepared in DMEM with 0.1~ BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (EGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(9) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 ~M) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1s BSA) is added (100 ~1/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) aatactcatactcttc:ctttttcaatattattgaagcatttatcagggttattgtctcat 4800 gagcggatacatattt:gaatgtatttagaaaaataaacaaat - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98I10174 _ -(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
S (9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes a~ room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(20) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 3: EGF-Induced Her2-Driver. HrdU Incorporation Materials and Reagents:
(1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan (2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.9), Cat.
No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. _ 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X PBS, pH 7.9, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line engineered to express a chimeric receptor having the extra-cellular domain of EGF-R
and the intra-cellular domain of Her2.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol:
(1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10%
CS, 2mM Gln in a 96- well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 3~ in 5o COZ.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (OoCS
DMEM with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (EGF=2 nM, prepared in DMEM with O.lo BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (EGF) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(9) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel . Milk is added ( 5 o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (I:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ (8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
_ 5 (9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 990 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Assay 4: IGF1-Induced BrdU Incorporation Assay Materials and Reagents:
(1) IGF1 Ligand: human, recombinant; 6511, Promega Corp, USA.
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM. in PBS (pH7.9), Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehrinaer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution: 1X PBS, pH 7.9, made in house.
(7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) 3T3 cell line genetically engineered to express human IGF-1 receptor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Protocol:
(1) Cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10s CS, 2mM Gln in a 96-well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37C in 5~ COz.
(2) After 29 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then are serum starved in serum free medium (Oa CS
DMEM with O.lo BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (IGF1=3.3 nM, prepared in DMEM
with O.lo BSA) and test compounds are added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells receive serum free DMEM with 0.1s BSA only; the positive control cells receive the ligand (IGF1) but no test compound. Test compounds are prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 16 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 95 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate is incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) is added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 _ PCT/US98/1D17~1~
(B) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate is dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ~1/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a - plate shaker until color development is sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 910 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
c. HUV-EC-C Assav The following protocol may also be used to measure a compound's activity against PDGF-R, FGF-R or Flk-1/KDR, all of which are naturally expressed by HUV-EC cells.
Day 0 1. Wash and trypsinize HUV-EC-C cells (human umbilical vein endothelial cells, (American Type Culture Collection;
2~ catalogue no. 1730 CRL). Wash with Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (D-PBS; obtained from Gibco BRL; catalogue no.
14190-029) 2 times at about 1 ml/IO cm' of tissue culture flask. Trypsinize with 0.058 trypsin-EDTA in non-enzymatic cell dissociation solution (Sigma Chemical Company; catalogue no. C-1544). The 0.05 trypsin was made by diluting 0.25 trypsin/1 mM EDTA (Gibco; catalogue no. 25200-099) in the cell dissociation solution. Trypsinize with about 1 ml/25-30 cm' of tissue culture flask for about 5 minutes at 37°C. After cells have detached from the flask, add an equal volume of assay medium and transfer to a 50 ml sterile centrifuge tube (Fisher Scientific; catalogue no. 05-539-6).
2. Wash the cells with about 35 ml assay medium in the 50 ml sterile centrifuge tube by adding the assay medium, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) centrifuge for 10 minutes at approximatel.~z ZDOxg, aspirate the supernatant, and resuspend with 35 ml D-PBS. Repeat the wash two more times with D-PBS, resuspend the cells in about 1 ml assay medium/15 cm2 of tissue culture flask. Assay medium consists of F12K medium (Gibco BRL; catalogue no. 21127-014) + 0.5o heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum. Count the cells with a Coulter Counter~v Coulter Electronics, Inc.) and add assay medium to the cells to obtain a concentration of 0.8-1.0x105 cells/ml.
3. Add cells to 96-well flat-bottom plates at 100 ul/well or 0.8-1.0x109 cells/well; incubate ~24h at 37°C, 50 COZ .
Day 1 1. Make up two-fold drug titrations in separate 96-well plates, generally 50 uM on down to 0 uM. Use the same assay medium as mentioned in day 0, step 2 above. Titrations are made by adding 90 ul/well of drug at 200 uM (9X the final well concentration) to the top well of a particular plate column.
Since the stock drug concentration is usually 20 mM in DMSO, the 200 uM drug concentration contains 2% DMSO.
Therefore, diluent made up to 2% DMSO in assay medium (F12K + 0.5o fetal bovine serum) is used as diluent for the drug titrations in order to dilute the drug but keep the DMSO
concentration constant. Add this diluent to the remaining wells in the column at 60 ul/well. Take 60 ul from the 120 ul of 200 uM drug dilution in the top well of the column and mix with the 60 pl in the second well of the column. Take 60 ul from this well and mix with the 60 ul in the third well of the column, and so on until two-fold titrations are completed.
When the next-to-the-last well is mixed, take 60 ul of the 120 ul in this well and discard it. Leave the last well with 60 ul of DMSO/media diluent as a non-drug-containing control.
Make 9 columns of titrated drug, enough for triplicate wells each for 1) VEGF (obtained from Pepro Tech Inc., catalogue no.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) 100-200, 2) endothelial cell growth factor (ECGF) (also known as acidic fibroblast growth factor, or aFGF) (obtained from Boehringer Mannheim Biochemica, catalogue no. 1439 600); or, 3) human PDGF B/B (1276-956, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany) and assay media control. ECGF comes as a preparation with sodium heparin.
2. Transfer 50 ul/well of the drug dilutions to the 96 well assay plates containing the 0.8-1.0x104 cells/100 pl/well of the HUV-EC-C cells from day 0 and incubate ~2 h at 37°C, 50 COZ .
3. In triplicate, add 50 ul/well of 80 ug/ml VEGF, 20 ng/ml ECGF, or media control to each drug condition. As with the drugs, the growth factor concentrations are 4X the desired final concentration. Use the assay media from day 0 step 2 to make the concentrations of growth factors. Incubate approximately 24 hours at 37°C, 5o COz. Each well will have 50 ul drug dilution, 50 ul growth factor or media, and 100 ul cells, - 200 ul/well total. Thus the 4X concentrations of drugs and growth factors become 1X once everything has been added to the wells.
Day 2 1. Add 3H-thymidine (Amersham; catalogue no. TRK-686) at 1 uCi/well (10 ul/well of 100 uCi/ml solution made up in RPMI
media + loo heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum) and incubate ~24 h at 37°C, 5o C02. RPMI was obtained from Gibco BRL, catalogue no. 11875-051.
Day 3 2. Freeze plates overnight at -20°C.
D_ay 4 1. Thaw plates and harvest with a 96-well plate harvester (Tomtec Harvester 96~R~) onto filter mats (Wallac;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
catalogue no. 1205-401); read counts on a Wallac Betaplate~TM~
liquid scintillation counter.
C. In Vivo Animal Models 1. Xenograft Animal Models The ability of human tumors to grow as xenografts in athymic mice (e. g., Balb/c, nu/nu) provides a useful in vivo model for studying the biological response to therapies for human tumors. Since the first successful xenotransplantation of human tumors into athymic mice, (Rygaard and Povlsen, 1969, Acta Pathol. Microbial. Scand. 77:758-760), many different human tumor cell lines (e. g., mammary, lung, genitourinary, gastro-intestinal, head and neck, glioblastoma, bone, and malignant melanomas) have been transplanted and successfully grown in nude mice. The following assays may be used to determine the level of activity, specificity and effect of the different compounds of the present invention. Three general types of assays are useful for evaluating compounds:
cellular/catalytic, cellular/biological and in vivo. The object of the cellular/catalytic assays is to determine the effect of a compound on the ability of a TK to phosphorylate tyrosines on a known substrate in a cell. The object of the cellular/biological assays is to determine the effect of a compound on the biological response stimulated by a TK in a cell. The object of the in vivo assay is to determine the 2~ effect of a compound in an animal model of a particular disorder such as cancer.
Suitable cell lines for subcutaneous xenograft experiments include C6 cells (glioma, ATCC # CCL 107), A375 cells (melanoma, ATCC # CRL 1619), A431 cells (epidermoid carcinoma, ATCC # CRL 1555), Calu 6 cells (lung, ATCC # HTB
56), PC3 cells (prostate, ATCC # CRL 1435) and NIH 3T3 fibroblasts genetically engineered to overexpress EGFR, PDGFR, IGF-1R or any other test kinase.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) -WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ .
The following protocol can be used to perform xenograft experiments:
Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They receive sterile rodent chow and water _ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in appropriate medium (for example, MEM, DMEM, Ham's F10, or Ham's F12 plus 5% - 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 2 mM glutamine (GLN)). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum are purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95o air and 5-10%
COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.05 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) to a particular concentration and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice ( 8 - 10 mice per group, 2 - 10 x 106 cells/animal). Tumor growth is measured over 3 to 6 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height unless otherwise indicated.
P values are calculated using the Students' t-test. Test compounds in 50 - 100 uL excipient (DMSO, or VPD:DSW) was delivered by IP injection at different concentrations generally starting at day one after implantation.
2. Tumor Invasion Model The following tumor invasion model has been developed and maybe used for the evaluation of therapeutic value and efficacy of the compounds identified to selectively inhibit KDR/FLK-1 receptor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) ___ 8 week old nude mice (female) (Simonsen Inc.) are used as experimental animals. Implantation of tumor cells was performed in a laminar flow hood. For anesthesia, Xylazine/Ketamine Cocktail (100 mg/kg ketamine and 5 mg/kg) are administered intraperitoneally. A midline incision is done to expose the abdominal cavity (approximately 1.5 cm in length) to inject 10' tumor cells in a volume of 100 ul medium. The cells are injected either into the duodenal lobe of the pancreas or under the serosa of the colon. The peritoneum and muscles are closed with a 6-0 silk continuous suture and the skin was closed by using would clips. Animals are observed daily.
Analysis After 2-6 weeks, depending on gross observations of the animals, the mice are sacrificed, and the local tumor metastases to various organs (lung, liver, brain, stomach, spleen, heart, muscle) are excised and analyzed (measurement of tumor size, grade of invasion, immunochemistry and in situ hybridization).
7. EXAMPLES
A. Compounds of this invention.
The following are examples of the results of specific assays used to evaluate the activity of the compounds of this invention. The assays shown are exemplary only and are not to be construed as limiting in any manner.
1. Inhibition of Ligand-Stimulated DNA Synthesis.
The following example illustrates the ability of the compounds of the invention to inhibit FGFR-stimulated and PDGFR-stimulated DNA synthesis in cells. DNA synthesis is required for many of the activities of FGFR and PDGFR
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) including, but not limited to, cell proliferation. Uridine is added in one set of samples to overcome any contribution made by inhibition of DHOD and just evaluate the inhibition of PDGFR
or FGFR signaling. (See Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharmacol., 50(6):861 (1995), Nair, et al., Immunology Letters, 47:171 (1995)).
Materials And Methods (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. 3apan; PDGF, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany; FGF, Gibco.
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4),Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.4 (7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
(8) NIH3T3 clone C7 (3T3/EGFRc7)(Honegger et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987)) engineered to over-express human EGF receptor. These cells natively express FGFR and PDGFR.
Protocol (1) 3T3/EGFRc7 cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10% CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37° C in 5% CO2.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) (2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then serum starved in serum free medium (0%CS DMEM
with 0.1~ BSA) for 24 hours.
3 ) On day 3, ligand ( 2nM EGF or 1. 5 nM FGF or 3 .
8 nM
PDGF) prepared in DMEM with O.lo BSA and 30 uM
(final concentration) uridine) and test compound is added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells received serum free DMEM with O.lo BSA
only; the positive control cells received ligand but no test compound. Test compound is prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, O.lo BSA) is added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium is removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution is added (50 ul/well) and the plates incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution is thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5o dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate was incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution is removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, 1% BSA) was added (100 ul/well) and the plate is incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(8) The antibody conjugate is thoroughly removed by decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCTlUS98/10174 and the plate dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution is added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development was sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples are measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Results In a first experiment, the activity of MCTA, its metabolite and a compound of this invention are compared in their ability to inhibit FGF induced DNA synthesis alone or with added uridine. As shown in Table 1 below, the ability of the metabolite to inhibit DNA synthesis is completely abolished by the addition of uridine and that of MCTA reduced, demonstrating that the inhibitory effect is due to inhibition of DHOD, not inhibition of FGFR signaling. In contrast, the inhibitory activity of claimed compound is not decreased, and is even slightly increased, demonstrating that it is inhibiting FGFR signaling. Similar experiments are conducted using PDGF
stimulation with similar results. Also tested was the known DHOD inhibitor brequinar which inhibited DNA synthesis in the absence of uridine (IC50 - 1.6 uM) and was inactive in the presence of uridine (IC50 = >100uM).
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 1 Compound IC50 - uridine IC50 - uridine MCTA 20 uM 80 pM
A771726 20 uM >100uM
3-Methyl-4-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylam-inocarbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 1) In another experiment, several of the compounds of this invention are tested for their ability to inhibit DNA synthesis induced by FGF, PDGF and EGF. The results, shown in Table 2 below, indicate that the compounds of the invention are selective for inhibition of FGF and PDGF induced signaling compared to EGF signaling.
Table 2 Compound PDGF-inducedFGF-induced EGF-induced 3-Methyl-4- [ 4- 95 ~tM >100 ~M >100 GSM
(trifluoromethyl)phenyla-minocarbonyl]pyrazole (cmpd. 2) 3,5-Dimethyl-4-[4- >100 ~M >100 ~M >100 ~.M
(trifluoro-methyl)phenylamino-carbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 21}
3-Methyl-4-[4- 90 ~tM 65 ~M >100 ~M
(trifluoromethyl)phenyla minocarbonyl]isoxazole (cmpd. 1) 2. Inhibition of Tumor Growth in vivo The following example demonstrates the ability of Cmpd.
1 to inhibit the in vivo growth of tumors characterized by SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) inappropriate FGFR and/or PDGFR activity. The FGFR expressing cells are from two glioblastomas (C6, ATCC CRL 107, Powell and Klagsbrun, Exp. Cell Res., 209:224 (1993); for PDGFR, see Strawn, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 269:21215 (1995).
Materials And Methods Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They received sterile rodent. chow and water _ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in Ham's F10 plus 5o fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 2 mM glutamine (GLN). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum is purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95a air and 5-10°s COZ at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.050 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice (8 - 10 mice per group, 3 x 106 cells/animal). Tumor growth was measured over 3 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height unless otherwise indicated. P values are calculated using the Students' t-test.
Cmpd. 1 in 50 uL excipient (DMSO) was delivered by IP bolus injection daily.
Results The results of the subcutaneous xenograft experiment, shown in Table 3 below, demonstrates that administration of Cmpd. 1 significantly inhibited the tumor growth in vivo and had no toxic effect at the dose tested.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Table 3 Treatment Day inhibition of control) mortality p-value DMSO alone 20 -- 0 --30 mg/kg/day (cmpd. 1) 8 34 0 0.0158 10 42 0 0.0034 14 48 0 0.0520 15 47 0 0.0392 17 50 0 0.0188 20 52 0 0.0064 3. Inhibition of Tumor Growth and Metastasis in vivo.
The following example can be used to test the ability of the compounds of the invention to inhibit growth and metastasis of a tumor cell line expressing FGFR and PDGFR (C6 cells).
Materials And Methods Ten to 12 week old athymic Balb/c nu/nu mice are obtained from Simonsen Laboratory (Gilroy, CA) and maintained in a pathogen-free environment throughout the experiments.
C6 cells (ATCC CCL 107) are grown and maintained in F-10 medium (Life Technologies, Inc. Grand Island, NY) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2mM glutamine in a 5o C02 environment. Approximately 80~ confluent cultures are harvested by brief trypsinization (0.06250 trypsin-0.25 mM EDTA
in Cell Dissociation Medium) (Life Technologies) and resuspended at a final concentration of 8 x 10' cells per ml in magnesium and calcium free phosphate buffered saline for implantation. Cell viability is determined by Trypan blue exclusion and found to be >95~.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
On the day of implantation, animals are anesthetized with either isoflurane or Ketaset and Rompun and the abdomen is prepared for sterile surgery. A small abdominal incision is made and the ascending colon identified. The gut is then placed on strips of sterile gauze before injection. Two million viable tumor cells in 0.025 ml PBS are injected under the serosa into the muscularis/submuscularis by means of a sterile tuberculin syringe and a 27 gauge needle. Cells are injected so as to visibly infiltrate between the submucosal and subserosal tissues. The serosal surface at the injection site is dabbed gently with 70o isopropyl alcohol pads to kill tumor cells that may have escaped. The organs are replace in situ.
The abdominal wall is closed with continuous nylon sutures. The outer skin is then closed using wound clips which are removed 1~ seven days post implantation.
To ensure that cell implantation is properly performed, after 7 days, several control animals are euthanized by cerebral dislocation , the abdominal organs and thorax examined for the presence of macroscopic "primary" colonic tumors and metastases. Pilot studies demonstrated that at this time intracolonic tumors of approximately 5 to 7 mm3 are present without peritoneal spread of tumor after injection of C6 cells.
One day following implantation of cells, animals are treated once daily intraperitoneally with either MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day in VPD:DSW or vehicle alone in a 0.1 ml bolus. The health of the animals is monitored daily and if signs of severe discomfort or pain is observed or the animal is deemed to be moribund, animals are sacrificed humanely. Dosing of the animals continued until all surviving animals in the experiment are deemed moribund. When possible, the local tumor growth on the colon is measured and the major organs such as lung, heart, spleen, liver and kidney are resected from moribund animals and submitted for histopathological analysis.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) B. MCTA against FGF/FGFR
The examples below are non-limiting and are merely representative of various aspects and features of the present invention. They demonstrate that the compositions herein described inhibit the activity of FGFR in cells and can be used to reduce tumor growth and inhibit metastasis.
4. Inhibition of FGFR-Stimulated DNA Synthesis The following example illustrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit ligand-stimulated DNA synthesis in cells, specifically when stimulated with FGF or PDGF but not when stimulated with EGF. DNA synthesis is required for many of the activities of FGFR including, but not limited to, cell proliferation.
Uridine is added to remove the effect of a metabolite of MCTA.
(See Greene, et al., Biochem. Pharmacol. 50(6):861, 1995;
Nair, et al., Immunology Letters 97:171, 1995) Materials And Methods (1) EGF: mouse EGF, 201; Toyobo,Co., Ltd. Japan, PDGF, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany, FGF, Gibco, USA
(2) BrdU Labeling Reagent: 10 mM, in PBS (pH7.4),Cat.
No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(3) FixDenat: fixation solution (ready to use), Cat. No.
1 697 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(4) Anti-BrdU-POD: mouse monoclonal antibody conjugated with peroxidase, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(5) TMB Substrate Solution: tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), ready to use, Cat. No. 1 647 229, Boehringer Mannheim, Germany.
(6) PBS Washing Solution . 1X phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.9 (7) Albumin, Bovine (BSA): fraction V powder; A-8551, Sigma Chemical Co., USA.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) (8) NIH3T3 clone C7 (3T3/EGFRc7)(Honegger et al., Cell 51:199-209, 1987)) engineered to over-express human EGF receptor. These cells natively express FGFR and PDGFR.
Protocol (1) 3T3/EGFRc7 cells are seeded at 8000 cells/well in DMEM, 10% CS, 2mM Gln in a 96 well plate. Cells are incubated overnight at 37 C in 5% CO2.
(2) After 24 hours, the cells are washed with PBS, and then serum starved in serum free medium (0% CS DMEM
with 0.1% BSA) for 24 hours.
(3) On day 3, ligand (2nM EGF, 3.8 nM PDGF or 1.5 nM
bFGF) prepared in DMEM with 0.1% BSA and 30 uM
(final concentration) uridine) and test compound was added to the cells simultaneously. The negative control wells received serum free DMEM with 0.1%
BSA
only; the positive control cells received ligand (EGF, PDGF or FGF) but no test compound. Test compound was prepared in serum free DMEM with ligand in a 96 well plate, and serially diluted for 7 test concentrations.
(4) After 20 hours of ligand activation, diluted BrdU
labeling reagent (1:100 in DMEM, 0.1% BSA) was added and the cells are incubated with BrdU (final concentration=10 uM) for 1.5 hours.
(5) After incubation with labeling reagent, the medium was removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. FixDenat solution was added (50 ul/well) and the plates incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes on a plate shaker.
(6) The FixDenat solution was thoroughly removed by decanting and tapping the inverted plate on a paper towel. Milk is added (5% dehydrated milk in PBS, 200 ul/well) as a blocking solution and the plate SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) was incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(7) The blocking solution was removed by decanting and the wells are washed once with PBS. Anti-BrdU-POD
solution (1:100 dilution in PBS, to BSA) was added (100 ul/well) and the plate was incubated for 90 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker.
(8) The antibody conjugate was thoroughly removed by -. decanting and rinsing the wells 5 times with PBS, and the plate dried by inverting and tapping on a paper towel.
(9) TMB substrate solution was added (100 ul/well) and incubated for 20 minutes at room temperature on a plate shaker until color development was sufficient for photometric detection.
(10) The absorbance of the samples was measured at 410 nm (in "dual wavelength" mode with a filter reading at 490 nm, as a reference wavelength) on a Dynatech ELISA plate reader.
Results The results shown in Table 4 below demonstrate that MCTA
inhibits the specific biological response of cells to FGF while having no effect on the response of the cells to EGF. MCTA
also inhibits the specific biological responses to PDGF. The results are shown as ICSOs, the concentration at which 500 of the maximal BrdL3 incorporation response is inhibited.
Table 4 FGF-induced PDGF-induced EGF-induced DNA synthesis DNA synthesis DNA synthesis (IC50 uM) (IC50 ~.~M) (IC50 uM) Cell Dine/ EGFRC7/FGF EGFRC7/PDGF EGFRC7/EGF
higand MCTA 80 45 >100 SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rute 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ 5. Inhibition of Tumor Growth in vivo The following example demonstrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit the in vivo growth of tumors characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity while having no inhibitory effect on a tumor that does not express FGFR. The FGFR expressing cells are from a prostate cancer (PC3, Nakamoto, et al., Cancer Res. 52:571, 1992). The non-FGFR-expressing cell line was obtained from an epidermoid carcinoma (A431, ATTC CRL 1555, Takahashi, et al., su ra).
Materials And Methods Female athymic mice (BALB/c, nu/nu) are obtained from Simonsen Laboratories (Gilroy, CA). All animals are maintained under clean-room conditions in Micro-isolator cages with Alpha-dri bedding. They received sterile rodent chow and water ad libitum.
Cell lines are grown in appropriate medium (A431 - DMEM
with l0a FBS and 2 mM GLN: PC3 - HAM'S F12 with 7o FBS and 2 mM GLN). All cell culture media, glutamine, and fetal bovine serum is purchased from Gibco Life Technologies (Grand Island, NY) unless otherwise specified. All cells are grown in a humid atmosphere of 90-95% air and 5-10°s C02 at 37°C. All cell lines are routinely subcultured twice a week and are negative for mycoplasma as determined by the Mycotect method (Gibco).
Cells are harvested at or near confluency with 0.05 Trypsin-EDTA and pelleted at 450 x g for 10 min. Pellets are resuspended in sterile PBS or media (without FBS) to a particular concentration and the cells are implanted into the hindflank of the mice (8 - 10 mice per group). Tumor growth was measured over 3 to 6 weeks using venier calipers. Tumor volumes are calculated as a product of length x width x height . unless otherwise indicated. P values are calculated using the Students' t-test. MCTA in 50 - 100 uL excipient _(DMSO, or VPD:DSW) was delivered by IP injection at different concentrations.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Results The results of the subcutaneous xenograft experiments, shown in Table 5 below, demonstrate that administration of MCTA
significantly inhibited the growth of tumors associated with S FGFR activity with no significant effect on a non-FGFR
expressing tumor demonstrating MCTA's effectiveness as a treatment for cancers characterized by inappropriate FGFR
activity.
Table 5 Cell line Dose ~ Inhibition P value PC-3 20mg/kg/day 710 <0.01 A431 l4mg/kg/day 400 not sig.
6. Inhibition of Tumor Growth and Metastasis in vivo The following example illustrates the ability of MCTA to inhibit growth and metastasis of a tumor cell line expressing FGFR (C6 cells).
Materials And Methods Ten to 12 week old athymic Balb/c nu/nu mice are obtained from Simonsen Laboratory (Gilroy, CA) and maintained in a pathogen-free environment throughout the experiments.
C6 cells (ATCC CCL 107) are grown and maintained in F-10 medium (Life Technologies, Inc. Grand Island, NY) supplemented with loo fetal bovine serum, 2mM glutamine in a 5o C02 environment. Approximately 800 confluent cultures are harvested by brief trypsinization (0.06250 trypsin-0.25 mM EDTA
in Cell Dissociation Medium) (Life Technologies) and resuspended at a final concentration of 8 x 10' cells per ml in magnesium and calcium free phosphate buffered saline for SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) implantation. Cell viability was determined by Trypan blue exclusion and found to be >95$.
On the day of implantation, animals are anesthetized with either isoflurane or Ketaset and Rompun and the abdomen was prepared for sterile surgery. A small abdominal incision was made and the ascending colon identified. The gut was then placed on strips of sterile gauze before injection. Two million viable tumor cells in 0.025 ml PBS is injected under the serosa into the muscularis/submuscularis by means of a sterile tuberculin syringe and a 27 gauge needle. Cells are injected so as to visibly infiltrate between the submucosal and subserosal tissues. The serosal surface at the injection site was dabbed gently with 70o isopropyl alcohol pads to kill tumor cells that may have escaped. The organs are replace _in situ.
The abdominal wall was closed with continuous nylon sutures.
The outer skin was then closed using wound clips which are removed seven days post implantation.
To ensure that cell implantation was properly performed, after 7 days, several control animals are euthanized by cerebral dislocation , the abdominal organs and thorax examined for the presence of macroscopic "primary" colonic tumors and metastases. Pilot studies demonstrated that at this time intracolonic tumors of approximately 5 to 7 mm3 are present without peritoneal spread of tumor after injection of C6 cells.
One day following implantation of cells, animals are treated once daily intraperitoneally with either MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day in VPD:DSW or vehicle alone in a 0.1 ml bolus. The health of the animals is monitored daily and if signs of severe discomfort or pain is observed or the animal is deemed to be moribund, animals are sacrificed humanely. Dosing of the animals continued until all surviving animals in the experiment are deemed moribund. When possible, the local tumor growth on the colon is measured and the major organs such as lung, heart, spleen, liver and kidney are resected from moribund animals and submitted for histopathological analysis.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 .
Results In this model, vehicle treated animals are found to be all moribund by day 16 - day 18 with a 50% survival rate at approximately day 12 post implantation. Gross observation of moribund animals in this group showed severe metastasis in the liver, occasional tumor growth in the spleen, occasional carcinomatosis (metastasis in the peritoneal cavity) and the presence of a richly vascularized local tumor.
In two separate experiments, it was found that daily treatment with MCTA at 20 mg/kg/day extended the survival of the animals by >200% with a 50% survival rate at day 30 - day 33 post-implantation. Necropsy of a selected moribund animal showed several nodules of metastasis in the liver and an apparently pale while local tumor, suggesting that treatment with MCTA had an antiangiogenic effect. In comparison to the vehicle treated animals, an >87% inhibition of local tumor growth was observed in animals treated with MCTA.
Histopathology results confirmed the presence of limited liver metastasis with no apparent metastasis to the brain.
C. MCTA/BCNU
Materials: BCNU is commercially available. One source is Bristol Laboratories Oncology Products, Princeton, NJ, under the trade name BiCNU°.
A synthetic procedure amenable to the preparation of N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is described in US Patent No. 9,087,535 which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.
Procedure: SF763T cells, derived from human glioblastoma cells, are used in all of the examples shown below. 1X10' cells per mouse are implanted in 100 ul PBS subcutaneously into the hindflanks of female BALC/c nu/nu mice. Tumors are allowed to establish before dosing was initiated.
N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide was administered IP in VDP:DSW (VDP: 3% benzyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) - WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174_ .
alcohol (w/v), 8% Tween 80 (v/v), 65% PEG 300 (w/v), QS to 100%
with 100% ethanol; DSW: 5% dextrose (w/v) in water) at 2.5, 5.0, 10 and 20 mg/kg from day 8 to day 29 post implantation.
BCNU was administered IV in 2% ethanol/saline at 8, 12, 18 and 27 mg/kg on days 8, 12 and 16 post implantation. Combinations of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide at 2.5, 5.0 and 20 mg/kg and BCNU at 8, 12 andl8 mg/kg were also administered with the same regimens.
Tumor weight is determined twice per week until day 43 post implantation. In general the size of the tumor is determined by measuring two of its dimensions, length and width, by deducing its depth using procedures well known to those skilled in the art, and calculating its weight based on standard assumptions regarding the density of such tumors.
Example 7 Example 1, the results of which can be seen in graphical form as the CONTROL in each of Figures 1-6 shows tumor growth in untreated mice. All subsequent examples are compared to this control for determination of whether statistically significant inhibition is being shown by either N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide or BCNU
alone or by various combinations of these two drugs.
Example 8 This example, shown graphically in Figure 1, shows the effect of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4 carboxamide alone at 20 mg/kg dose. Analysis of the raw data obtained in this example (not shown) demonstrated that while N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is being administered, statistically significant inhibition of tumor growth is observed. When treatment with N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is stopped, tumor growth resumed. This demonstrates that N-(9-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is in SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) WO 98/52944 PCT/US98/10174 _ fact cytostatic rather than cytotoxic; i.e., N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide temporarily stops cell activity but does not kill the cell.
Example 9 This example, the results of which are also shown graphically in Figure 1, shows the results of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone at 10 mg/kg. Again, statistical analysis of the raw data, not shown, revealed that the percentage inhibition is less than with 20 mg/kg but inhibition continued throughout the time period during which N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is being actively administered and then, when treatment with N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide ceased, tumor growth resumed.
Example 10 This example, the results of which are likewise shown in Fig. 1 shows the effect of 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide. Again, the percentage inhibition is less but, when the raw data is statistically analyzed using the Student's T Test, still statistically significant.
Example 11 At 2.5 mg/kg, N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisox azole-4-carboxamide, the raw data did not show statistically significant inhibition of tumor growth. This is graphically depicted in Fig.l where it can be seen that the curve for 2.5 mg/kg essentially tracks that of the control.
Example 12 Here, the effect of 27 mg/kg of BCNU alone is shown. One dose at this rate is effective to maintain a relatively high SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) percentage inhibition of tumor growth for the duration of this test. This is graphically depicted in Fig. 2.
Example 19 At 18 mg/kg, BCNU is already losing some of its potency.
Analysis of the raw data (not shown) revealed statistically significant percentages inhibition only up to day 22 at which time tumor growth began to catch up with the control. Again, this is shown graphically in Fig.2.
Example 14 At 12 mg/kg BCNU is found to be ineffective; i.e., no statistically significant percentage inhibition is observed from the raw data. Graphically, it can be seen in Fig. 2 that the 12 mg/kg curve shows some inhibition in the days immediately post treatment but as the days post-treatment increassed, the curve approached that of the control.
Example 15 At 8 mg/kg, BCNU had no therapeutic effect; i.e. in Fig.
2 the curve for 8 mg/kg essentially tracks that of the control.
Example 16 When N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is administered at 10 mg/kg and BCNU at 18 mg/kg, the result is very positive. Statistical analysis of the raw data (not shown) showed that the overall percentage inhibition is substantially higher than treatment with BCNU alone at 18 mg/kg or N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide alone at 10 mg/kg. Furthermore, the time period over which statistically significant inhibition occurred is much longer than that observed with either drug alone. Fig. 3 graphically displays this result.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 ) Example 17 In this example the combination of 10 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide and 12 mg/kg BCNU is quite effective; the raw data showed statistically significant inhibition up to day 25 of the trial.
To the contrary, 12 mg/kg BCNU alone showed no statistically significant effect. This is graphically depicted in Fig. 4.
This ability to achieve inhibition as lower doses of BCNU
should be of great benefit to patients.
Example 18 When 18 mg/kg BCNU is augmented with only 5 mg/kg N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide, not only is a higher percentage inhibition realized over 18 mg/kg of BCNU alone, the duration of statistically significant inhibition is longer, up to day 29 as opposed to only day 22 with BCNU alone indicating that even at very low doses the N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is having a marked positive effect on the efficacy of BCNU. This is shown graphically in Fig. 5.
Example 19 The graphical representation of the combination of 5 mg/kg of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide with 12 mg/kg BCNU showed some marginal effectiveness but statistical analysis of the raw data did not attach any statistical significance to the result.
Conclusion Thus, it will be appreciated that the compounds, methods and pharmacological compositions of the present invention modulate PTK activity and therefore are expected to be effective as therapeutic agents against PTK-related disorders.
It will also be appreciated that the heteroaryl-carboxamide, N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( ruie 26 ) carboxamide ("MCTA"), is particularly useful for the treatment of disorders characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity and is expected to be especially useful in the treatment of invasive cancers noted for their aggressiveness and tendency to metastatize.
Finally, it will be appreciated N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide together with a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea, in particular BCNU, is an effective tumor suppressant for human glioblastoma tumor cells at dosages substantially lower than that necessary when either of the compounds is used alone and that it is therefore expected that this combination will have similarly positive results in human subjects.
Although certain embodiments and examples have been used to describe the present invention, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that changes to the embodiments and examples shown may be made without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention.
Other embodiments are within the following claims.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET ( rule 26 )
Claims (83)
1. A heteroarylcarboxamide compound, or physiologically acceptable salt thereof, which modulates the activity of a protein tyrosine kinase.
2. The compound of claim 1 wherein said protein tyrosine kinase comprises a receptor tyrosine kinase.
3. The compound of claim 2 wherein said receptor tyrosine kinase comprises a fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR).
4. The compound of claim 2 wherein said receptor tyrosine kinase comprises a platelet derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR).
5. The compound of claim 1 having the following chemical structure:
wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur;
B is selected from the group consisting of nitrogen and sulfur and it is understood that when B is sulfur and A is nitrogen, said nitrogen is participating in both a single bond and a double bond within the ring so that it cannot be bonded to any atom outside the ring; that is, when B is sulfur, R2 does not exist;
D, E, F, G, and J are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon and nitrogen and, furthermore, when any of D, E, F, G and J is nitrogen, R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9, respectively, does not exist;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, carbonyl, C-carboxy, S-sulfonamido, sulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, trihalomethanesulfonyl, halo, guanyl, C-amido and C-thioamido:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic;
Z is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy and C-carboxy;
R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicycloxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkyoxy, thiocycloalkoxy, thioheteraryloxy, thioheteralicycloxy, halo, nitro, cyano, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, silyl, phosphonyl, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, N-amido, C-amido, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, S-sulfonamido, N-sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, guanyl, guanidino, trihalomethanesulfonamido, amino and -NR14R14, wherein, R14 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C-carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl and, combined, a five- or six-member heteroalicyclic ring containing at least one nitrogen;
and physiologically acceptable salts thereof.
wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur;
B is selected from the group consisting of nitrogen and sulfur and it is understood that when B is sulfur and A is nitrogen, said nitrogen is participating in both a single bond and a double bond within the ring so that it cannot be bonded to any atom outside the ring; that is, when B is sulfur, R2 does not exist;
D, E, F, G, and J are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon and nitrogen and, furthermore, when any of D, E, F, G and J is nitrogen, R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9, respectively, does not exist;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, carbonyl, C-carboxy, S-sulfonamido, sulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, trihalomethanesulfonyl, halo, guanyl, C-amido and C-thioamido:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heteroalicyclic;
Z is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy and C-carboxy;
R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalicyclic, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroalicycloxy, thiohydroxy, thioalkyoxy, thiocycloalkoxy, thioheteraryloxy, thioheteralicycloxy, halo, nitro, cyano, O-carbamyl, N-carbamyl, O-thiocarbamyl, N-thiocarbamyl, silyl, phosphonyl, C-carboxy, O-carboxy, N-amido, C-amido, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, S-sulfonamido, N-sulfonamido, trihalomethanesulfonyl, guanyl, guanidino, trihalomethanesulfonamido, amino and -NR14R14, wherein, R14 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, carbonyl, C-carboxy, sulfonyl, trihalomethanesulfonyl and, combined, a five- or six-member heteroalicyclic ring containing at least one nitrogen;
and physiologically acceptable salts thereof.
6. The compound or salt of claim 5 wherein A is oxygen and B is nitrogen.
7. The compound or salt of claim 6 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aklenyl and alkynyl.
8. The compound or salt of claim 7 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl.
9. The compound or salt of claim 8 wherein R4 is hydrogen.
10. The compound or salt of claim 9 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl an cycloalkyl.
11. The compound or salt of claim 10 wherein Z is oxygen.
12. The compound or salt of claim 11 wherein R5, R6, R8 and R9 are hydrogen.
14. The compound or salt of claim 12 wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl.
14. The compound or salt of claim 14 wherein R5, R8 and R9 are hydrogen.
15. The compound or salt of claim 14 wherein R6 and R7 combine to form a methylenedioxy or a 1,3-dioxano group.
16. The compound or salt of claim 5 wherein A and B are nitrogen.
17. The compound or salt of claim 16 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aklenyl and alkynyl.
18. The compound or salt of claim 17 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl.
19. The compound or salt of claim 18 wherein R4 is hydrogen.
20. The compound or salt of claim 19 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl an cycloalkyl.
21. The compound or salt of claim 20 wherein Z is oxygen.
22. The compound or salt of claim 21 wherein R5, R6, R8 and R9 are hydrogen.
23. The compound or salt of claim 22 wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl.
24. The compound or salt of claim 21 wherein R5, R8 and R9 are hydrogen.
25. The compound or salt of claim 24 wherein R6 and R7 combine to form a methylenedioxy or a 1,3-dioxano group.
26. The compound or salt of claim 5 wherein J is nitrogen.
27. The compound or salt of claim 26 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl; and, R5, R6, R8, and R9 are hydrogen.
R7 is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl and trihalomethanesulfonyl; and, R5, R6, R8, and R9 are hydrogen.
28. The compound or salt of claim 27 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and cycloalkyl.
29. The compound or salt of claim 28 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl.
30. A method for the treatment or prevention of a disorder characterized by inappropriate protein tyrosine kinase activity comprising administering to an organism afflicted with such a disorder a therapeutically effective amount of one of more of said compounds of claim 1 or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof.
31. A pharmacological composition of said compound of claim 1.
32. The method of claim 30 wherein said therapeutically effective amount of said compound of claim 1 is administered in said pharmacological composition.
33. The method of claim 30 wherein said organism comprises a mammal.
34. The method of claim 33 wherein said mammal is a human.
35. The method of claim 30 wherein said disorder comprises cancer.
36. The method of claim 35 wherein said cancer comprises brain cancer, colon cancer, prostate cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, lung cancer, salivary gland cancer, oral cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma, melanoma and ovarian cancer.
37. The method of claim 30 wherein said disorder comprises a skeletal disorder.
38. The method of claim 30 wherein said disorder comprises a fibrotic disorder.
39. The method of claim 30 wherein said disorder comprises a blood vessel proliferative disorder.
40. The method of claim 38 wherein said fibrotic disorder comprises arterial restenosis, liver cirrhosis, kidney sclerosis and wound scarring.
41. A method of inhibiting the metastasis of a cancer comprising administering to said organism said pharmacological composition of said compound of claim 1.
42. The method of claim 41 wherein said cancer comprises colon cancer, prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma, ovarian cancer, breast cancer and gliomas.
43. A method of treating a disorder characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity in a patient comprising the step of administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
44. The method of claim 43 wherein the disorder is cancer.
45. The method of claim 44 wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of brain cancer, colon cancer, prostate cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, salivary gland cancer, oral cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and ovarian cancer.
46. The method of claim 45 wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer, kidney cancer and bladder cancer.
47. The method of claim 43 wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is VPD:D5W.
48. The method of claim 43 wherein the disorder is benign prostatic hypertrophy.
49. The method of claim 43 wherein the disorder is a skeletal disorder.
50. The method of claim 43 wherein the disorder is a fibrotic disorder.
51. The method of claim 50 wherein the fibrotic disorder is selected from the group consisting of hepatic cirrhosis, glomular sclerosis, interstitial nephritis, interstitial pulmonary fibrosis, restinosis, atherosclerosis, wound scarring and scleroderma.
52. A method of inhibiting the metastasis of a cancer characterized by inappropriate FGFR activity comprising administering to a patient N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
53. The method of claim 52 wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of colon cancer, prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma.
54. A method for inhibiting tumorigenic activity in a cell by administering to said cell a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea and N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide.
55. The method of claim 54 wherein said chemotherapeutic nitrosourea comprises 1,3-bis(2-chloroethyl)-1-nitrosourea (BCNU).
56. The method of claim 55 wherein said tumorigenic activity comprises a malignant neoplasm.
57. The method of claim 56 wherein said malignant neoplasm comprises a brain tumor.
58. The method of claim 57 wherein said brain tumor comprises a primary intra-axial brain tumor.
59. The method of claim 58 wherein said intra-axial brain tumor comprises a glioblastoma.
60. The method of claim 58 wherein said primariy intra-axial brain tumor comprises an astrocytoma.
61. A method for the treatment of a solid tumor in a patient by administering to said patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a chemotherapeutic nitrosourea and a therapeutically effective amount of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide.
62. The method of claim 61 wherein said chemotherapeutic nitrosourea comprises BCNU.
63. The method of claim 62 wherein said therapeutically effective amount of said BCNU comprises a first pharmacological composition.
64. The method of claim 61 wherein said therapeutically effective amount of said N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide comprises a second pharmacological composition.
65. The method of claim 64 wherein said therapeutically effective amount of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methyl-isoxazole-4-carboxamide comprises an initial loading dose.
66. The method of claim 65 wherein said initial loading dose comprises administration of said N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide to said patient over an interval of about 3 to about 6 days.
67. The method of claim 66 wherein said initial loading dose comprises administration of said N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide in equal amounts on each of said days of said interval.
68. The method of claim 66 wherein said initial loading dose comprises administration of said N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide as a continuous infusion over said 3 - 6 day interval.
69. The method of claim 67 or 68 wherein said initial loading dose comprises from about 350 mg/m2/day to about 450 mg/m2/day.
70. The method of claim 69 wherein on the day immediately following the last day of said administration of said initial loading dose of N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide to said patient, said therapeutically effective dose of said BCNU is administered to said patient.
71. The method of claim 70 wherein said therapeutically effective dose of BCNU comprises from about 50 mg/m2 to about 200 mg/m2.
72. The method of claim 71 wherein subsequent to said loading dose, a maintenance dose of said N-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide is administered to said patient.
73. The method of claim 72 wherein said maintenance dose of said N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide comprises from about 350 mg/m2 to about 450 mg/m2.
74. The method of claim 73 wherein from about 10 to about 15 additional of said maintenance dose is administered to said patient.
75. The method of claim 74 wherein each said additional maintenance dose is administered to said patient at intervals of from 5 to about 10 days after each previous said maintenance dose.
76. The method of claim 75 wherein each said additional maintenance dose comprises from about 350 mg/m2/week to about 450 mg/m2/week of said N-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazole-4-carboxamide.
77. The method of claim 61 wherein said solid tumor comprises a malignant neoplasm.
78. The method of claim 77 wherein said malignant neoplasm comprises a brain tumor.
79. The method of claim 78 wherein said brain tumor comprises a primary intra-axial brain tumor.
80. The method of claim 79 wherein said primary intra-axial brain tumor comprises a glioblastoma.
81. The method of claim 79 wherein said primary intra-axial brain tumor comprises an astrocytoma.
82. The method of claim 61 wherein said patient is a mammal.
83. The method of claim 82 wherein said mammal is a human being.
Applications Claiming Priority (9)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US4694597P | 1997-05-19 | 1997-05-19 | |
US4708497P | 1997-05-19 | 1997-05-19 | |
US60/046,945 | 1997-05-19 | ||
US60/047,084 | 1997-05-19 | ||
US5662397P | 1997-08-20 | 1997-08-20 | |
US60/056,623 | 1997-08-20 | ||
US6159097P | 1997-10-10 | 1997-10-10 | |
US60/061,590 | 1997-10-10 | ||
PCT/US1998/010174 WO1998052944A1 (en) | 1997-05-19 | 1998-05-18 | Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2302438A1 true CA2302438A1 (en) | 1998-11-26 |
Family
ID=27489113
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002302438A Abandoned CA2302438A1 (en) | 1997-05-19 | 1998-05-18 | Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP1012150A4 (en) |
AR (1) | AR015685A1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU7687998A (en) |
CA (1) | CA2302438A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO1998052944A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP1150670A2 (en) * | 1999-02-12 | 2001-11-07 | Quanam Medical Corporation | Alkylating agents for treatment of cellular proliferation |
GB9904103D0 (en) | 1999-02-24 | 1999-04-14 | Zeneca Ltd | Quinoline derivatives |
US7125875B2 (en) | 1999-04-15 | 2006-10-24 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Cyclic protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors |
WO2000062778A1 (en) | 1999-04-15 | 2000-10-26 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. | Cyclic protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors |
US6689883B1 (en) | 1999-09-28 | 2004-02-10 | Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Substituted pyridines and pyridazines with angiogenesis inhibiting activity |
US7977333B2 (en) | 2000-04-20 | 2011-07-12 | Bayer Healthcare Llc | Substituted pyridines and pyridazines with angiogenesis inhibiting activity |
US6903101B1 (en) | 2000-08-10 | 2005-06-07 | Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Substituted pyridazines and fused pyridazines with angiogenesis inhibiting activity |
GB0322012D0 (en) | 2003-09-19 | 2003-10-22 | Syngenta Participations Ag | Chemical compounds |
US7737149B2 (en) | 2006-12-21 | 2010-06-15 | Astrazeneca Ab | N-[5-[2-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-4-(3,5-dimethylpiperazin-1-yl)benzamide and salts thereof |
EP1990048A3 (en) * | 2007-05-08 | 2009-05-06 | Ulrike Wiebelitz | Therapy of benign prostatic hyperplasia (bph) |
DK2278960T4 (en) | 2008-03-17 | 2020-01-27 | Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd | DOSAGE regimen for a selective SIP1 RECEPTOR AGONIST |
US20140179712A1 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2014-06-26 | Astrazeneca Ab | Pharmaceutical formulation of n-[5-[2-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]-2h-pyrazol-3-yl]-4-[(3r,5s)-3,5-dimethylpiperazin-1-yl]benzamide |
CN108929271B (en) * | 2018-06-29 | 2021-08-31 | 中国药科大学 | Tyrosinase inhibitor and preparation method and use thereof |
Family Cites Families (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE3133418A1 (en) * | 1981-08-24 | 1983-03-10 | Basf Ag, 6700 Ludwigshafen | THIAZOLYL AND ISOTHIAZOLYLCARBONIC ACID ANILIDES, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND THEIR USE AS FUNGICIDES |
EP0418667B1 (en) * | 1989-09-22 | 1995-08-16 | BASF Aktiengesellschaft | Carboxylic acid amides |
EP0527736B1 (en) * | 1990-05-18 | 1997-04-16 | Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft | Isoxazole-4-carboxamides and hydroxyalkylidene-cyanoacetamides, drugs containing these compounds and use of such drugs |
ATE152443T1 (en) * | 1992-07-10 | 1997-05-15 | Glaxo Lab Sa | ANILIDE DERIVATIVES |
US5342851A (en) * | 1992-10-07 | 1994-08-30 | Mcneil-Ppc, Inc. | Substituted thiazole derivatives useful as platelet aggregation inhibitors |
GB9320299D0 (en) * | 1993-10-01 | 1993-11-17 | Roussel Lab Ltd | Isoxazole derivatives |
JPH07196637A (en) * | 1993-11-24 | 1995-08-01 | Mitsui Toatsu Chem Inc | Production of isothiazolecarboxymide derivative |
US5700823A (en) * | 1994-01-07 | 1997-12-23 | Sugen, Inc. | Treatment of platelet derived growth factor related disorders such as cancers |
WO1995024190A2 (en) * | 1994-03-07 | 1995-09-14 | Sugen, Inc. | Receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitors for inhibiting cell proliferative disorders and compositions thereof |
US5721277A (en) * | 1995-04-21 | 1998-02-24 | Sugen, Inc. | Compounds and methods for inhibiting hyper-proliferative cell growth |
US6020121A (en) * | 1995-09-29 | 2000-02-01 | Microcide Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Inhibitors of regulatory pathways |
DE19539638A1 (en) * | 1995-10-25 | 1997-04-30 | Hoechst Ag | The use of isoxazole and crotonic acid amide derivatives for the treatment of cancer |
GB9608435D0 (en) * | 1996-04-24 | 1996-06-26 | Celltech Therapeutics Ltd | Chemical compounds |
IL130286A0 (en) * | 1996-12-23 | 2000-06-01 | Du Pont Pharm Co | Nitrogen containing heteroaromatics as factor Xa inhibitors |
KR20010012868A (en) * | 1997-05-30 | 2001-02-26 | 다께다 가즈히꼬 | Novel sulfonamide derivatives |
ES2239806T3 (en) * | 1997-06-19 | 2005-10-01 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company | XA FACTOR INHIBITORS WITH A P1 NEUTRAL SPECIFICITY GROUP. |
US6022884A (en) * | 1997-11-07 | 2000-02-08 | Amgen Inc. | Substituted pyridine compounds and methods of use |
US6319920B1 (en) * | 1998-02-27 | 2001-11-20 | Syntex (U.S.A.) Llc | 2-arylethyl-(piperidin-4-ylmethyl)amine derivatives |
-
1998
- 1998-05-18 CA CA002302438A patent/CA2302438A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 1998-05-18 WO PCT/US1998/010174 patent/WO1998052944A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1998-05-18 AU AU76879/98A patent/AU7687998A/en not_active Abandoned
- 1998-05-18 EP EP98924794A patent/EP1012150A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 1998-05-19 AR ARP980102308 patent/AR015685A1/en unknown
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP1012150A1 (en) | 2000-06-28 |
AR015685A1 (en) | 2001-05-16 |
EP1012150A4 (en) | 2002-05-29 |
AU7687998A (en) | 1998-12-11 |
WO1998052944A1 (en) | 1998-11-26 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US5880141A (en) | Benzylidene-Z-indoline compounds for the treatment of disease | |
US6649635B2 (en) | Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders | |
US5763470A (en) | Benzopyran compounds and methods for their use | |
US7189721B2 (en) | Bicyclic protein kinase inhibitors | |
AU760964B2 (en) | 3-heteroarylidenyl-2-indolinone compounds for modulating protein kinase activityand for use in cancer chemotherapy | |
EP0832073B1 (en) | Quinazolines and pharmaceutical compositions | |
US5710173A (en) | Thienyl compounds for inhibition of cell proliferative disorders | |
WO1999048868A9 (en) | Heterocyclic classes of compounds for the modulating tyrosine protein kinase | |
JP2002516310A (en) | Pyrrole-substituted 2-indolinone protein kinase inhibitors | |
CA2302438A1 (en) | Heteroarylcarboxamide compounds active against protein tyrosine kinase related disorders | |
WO1998024432A2 (en) | Use of indolinone compounds as modulators of protein kinases | |
US6051593A (en) | 3-(cycloalkanoheteroarylidenyl)-2- indolinone protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors | |
JP2003531895A (en) | (2-Oxindole-3-yridenyl) acetic acid derivatives and their use as protein kinase inhibitors | |
US6130238A (en) | 3-(cyclohexanoheteroarylidenyl)-2-indolinone protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors | |
US6696463B2 (en) | 3-heteroarylidenyl-2-azaindolinones active as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors | |
US20030191162A1 (en) | 3-heteroarylidenyl-2-indolinone compounds for modulating protein kinase activity and for use in cancer chemotherapy | |
US20030073837A1 (en) | 3-heteroarylidenyl-2-indolinone compounds for modulating protein kinase activity and for use in cancer chemotherapy | |
MXPA00011770A (en) | Pyrrole substituted 2-indolinone protein kinase inhibitors |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
FZDE | Discontinued |